JP7189625B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

A conventional gaming machine determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information acquired based on the establishment of a starting condition, and executes a game effect according to the result of the determination. is common.

Some of such gaming machines include main control means for controlling the progress of a game and effect control means for controlling effects in response to commands (signals) from the main control means (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-033816 A

However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, no consideration is given to the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means deviate.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that allows smooth cooperation between main control means and effect control means.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the present invention, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means means (production control board 130), the main control means includes acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening, and the determination information Determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the judgment means; Variable display execution means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; and a pending storage means for storing the determination information as a pending storage, and the effect control means is a winning signal transmitted when the pending memory increases due to the winning of the starting port (special figure at the time of increase When a pending number designation command) is received, it is possible to additionally display (increase the number of pending icons) in a normal additional mode (animation of multiple frames, one without intervals, etc.), and the variable display When the signal at the start (command to specify the number of special figures pending at the time of decrease) is received when the pending memory decreases due to the start of , the pending display is reduced (the earliest pending icon is transferred to the icon, pending It is possible to reduce the number of icons), and the winning signal or the start When an hour signal is received, it is possible to additionally display the deficient pending display so that the number of the pending displays corresponding to the number of the pending memories is displayed. When additional display of the reserved display is performed , it is possible to additionally display the reserved display in a special additional mode (multiple simultaneous, one frame non-animation, etc.) different from the normal addition mode, and In the special additional mode based on the reception of the winning signal, the deficient reserved display among the plurality of reserved displays to be additionally displayed is additionally displayed in a shorter period of time than in the normal additional mode . Characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a big-hit determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a special design determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a prior determination table. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol storage determination process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the main process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the customer waiting production|presentation processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a demonstration waiting time determination table. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead system production|presentation process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change scenario determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation execution process in a production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern determination table for pending icons; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a 1-step change pattern determination table for the icon, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a 2-step change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the said icon change pattern determination table for abnormal conditions. It is a figure which shows the continuous announcement production|presentation determination processing in an production|presentation control part. It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous announcement type determination table for production modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous notice type determination table for production modes D to G (specific game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous announcement effect scenario determination table for effect modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous announcement effect scenario determination table for effect modes D to G (specific game state). It is a figure which shows the continuation notice production|presentation execution process in an production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an alternative notice pattern determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the lamp change production|presentation execution process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a diagram showing an example of a variable effect pattern determination table for effect modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a variable production pattern determination table for production modes D to G (specific game state). It is a figure which shows the jackpot announcement production|presentation determination processing in an production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice determination table before a reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a dialog announcement pattern determination table; It is a figure which shows an example of a step-up notice pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a development effect pattern determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a cut-in effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a decided effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a re-lottery effect pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a fixed effect pattern determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the main process in an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial process in a lamp|ramp control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return processing in a lamp control part. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing initial operation processing in a lamp control unit; It is a figure which shows an example of a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no restoration abnormality in various accessories after power restoration; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power supply restoration. It is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is during the variable display of special symbols and with reserved storage. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in the case of resuming power supply only to the main control board after stopping; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example 2 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; It is a figure which shows the modification when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the modification of the accessory initial process in a lamp|ramp control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no restoration abnormality in various accessories after power restoration; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power supply restoration. It is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is during the variable display of special symbols and with reserved storage. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows a specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes in a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of operating an operation part during a customer waiting state. It is a timing chart when a variable effect is started from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation which a variable production|presentation is started from a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of production|presentation which a variable production|presentation is started from a customer waiting state. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during the variable production. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased during the variable effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after decreasing. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation which increases immediately after the number of reservations decreases. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during specific reach production. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased during the specific reach effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased or decreased before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a diagram showing the continuation of the effect example in which the number of pending is increased or decreased before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case the look-ahead operation|movement production|presentation and step-up notice production|presentation are performed. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a continuation of the effect example when the look-ahead action effect and the step-up notice effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case the look-ahead vibration production|presentation and the dialogue announcement production|presentation are performed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a continuation of the effect example in the case where the anticipatory vibration effect and the speech announcement effect are executed; It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case pseudo-continuous production is performed before a ready-to-win production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case pseudo-continuous production is performed after a ready-to-win production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case a development production|presentation is performed and SP ready-to-win production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case an expansion production|presentation is performed and a SPSP ready-to-win production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case a cut-in production|presentation is performed during SP ready-to-win production|presentation and it becomes a big hit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect when a cut-in effect is executed during the SP ready-to-win effect and a big win is achieved. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect example 1 in a case where a determined effect is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win effect and a big win is achieved. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the continuation of the production example 1 in the case where the determined production is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win production and the jackpot is achieved. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect example 2 in the case where a determined effect is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win effect and a big win is achieved. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the continuation of the effect example 2 in the case where a determined effect is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win effect and a big win is achieved. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case variable probability mission production|presentation is performed during a big hit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect example when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a continuation of the effect example when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. 1 is a timing chart 1 when a command cannot be received normally; It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 1. FIG. Fig. 2 is a timing chart 2 when a command cannot be received normally; It is the example 1 of the production|presentation in the various timing of the timing chart 2. FIG. 3 is an example 2 of production at various timings of the timing chart 2. FIG. 3 is timing chart 3 when a command cannot be received normally. 3 is an example 1 of production at various timings of the timing chart 3. FIG. 3 is a production example 2 at various timings of the timing chart 3. FIG. 4 is timing chart 4 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 4. FIG. 5 is timing chart 5 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 5. FIG. 6 is timing chart 6 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 6. FIG. 7 is timing chart 7 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 7. FIG. 8 is timing chart 8 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 8. FIG. Fig. 9 is a timing chart 9 when a command cannot be received normally; It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 9. FIG. 10 is a timing chart 10 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of the production|presentation in various timing of the timing chart 10. FIG. This is a modified example 1 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a modified example 2 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a modified example 3 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a modification 4 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a modification 5 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a modification 6 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a modified example 7 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 13 when the command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 14 when the command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 15 when the command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 16 when the command cannot be received normally. This is a concrete example 17 when the command cannot be received normally. This is a concrete example 18 when the command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 19 when the command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 20 in which a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of the gaming machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the decided effect pattern determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the frame role-product initial motion pattern determination table in 2nd Embodiment.

(First embodiment)
A first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 having a game area 5a in which game balls flow down is provided.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front-rear direction, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ).

The game board mounting frame 3 has a mounting part (not shown) for mounting the game board 5 from the front, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism part 6 at one end side in the horizontal direction. , and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, and various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. maintenance can be performed.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the front side of the game board mounting frame 3 so as to cover the front of the mounting part of the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, It is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) opening in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate) is formed so as to cover the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 mounted on the mounting part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4 are a sound output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame illumination device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and game balls paid out from a payout device 100 described later. an upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls, a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that have not entered the upper tray 11 and flowed into an overflowing ball flow path described later, and a game ball shooting operation. A firing operation device 13 is provided for performing the firing operation.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations in the upper part of the glass frame 4 with an interval therebetween, and output BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to produce sound (music, voice). It has become. A plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 also includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to light/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a payout abnormality (to be described later) occurs.

The upper plate 11 has a bottom surface of a game ball storage portion 11a which is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the shooting operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. . When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, there are a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1) that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various productions described later. They are arranged side by side.

The production button device 16 includes a production button 17 (not shown) capable of performing a decision operation (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 2) for detecting an operation to the production button 17, and a production button. A button driving device 17b (see FIG. 2) is provided for driving the game machine 17 so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The effect button 17 emits effect light by lighting the effect button LED (full color), which is a part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white, red, rainbow colors). It is possible. In addition, by the driving force of the button driving motor, which is a part of the button driving device 17b, it is possible to move vertically between the standby position (origin position) positioned below and the production position positioned above. A button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position. Furthermore, the driving force of the button vibration motor, which is a part of the button driving device 17b, vibrates in a predetermined vibration mode, thereby making it possible to perform an effect operation. A button 17 can be operated.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (not shown) that can be operated such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a ( 2) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. FIG.

In addition, a lending operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11 for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing the remaining money. When the lending button of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the balance stored in the storage medium received by the ball lending machine (not shown) installed in the gaming machine 1 is subtracted, and the game balls are lent out. When the return button of the operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball rental machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed for receiving game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. - 特許庁In addition, a tray full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 2) for detecting that the lower tray 12 is full of game balls is provided in the middle of the overflowing ball flow path. is detected, the payout of game balls by the payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The shooting operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a shooting handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand touches the shooting handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 2), a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 2) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a plurality of light emitting handles for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. A handle LED (frame illumination device 10) is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15, the ball sending solenoid 11b is activated to send game balls one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a shooting device 26 for shooting game balls toward the game area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3, and a glass frame. A lock mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape having an open front at substantially the center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3, and is capable of accommodating the game board 5 from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting portion 25 , and various devices provided on the back side of the game board 5 are connected to the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Come on.

The shooting device 26 includes a hitting member 28 for shooting a game ball, a shooting solenoid 28b (see FIG. 2) for driving the hitting member 28, and an upward movement from the hitting member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board. An inclined shooting rail 29 and a stopper 30 for stopping the game ball A at the shooting position which is the inclined lower end of the shooting rail 29 are provided. Then, when the game ball sent by the ball sending solenoid 11b is received at the shooting position, the game ball A is shot toward the game area 5a by the action of the hitting member 28. - 特許庁

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4 . When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame is rotated. 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, there are a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 positioned outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member for guiding the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 is provided. A shot ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball shot by the shooting device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a for guiding the game balls that have flowed down to outside the game area (recovery part of the game board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decoration frame 40, which is called a center case, is provided to restrict entry of game balls into the inside, and a performance space 40a is formed inside the decoration frame 40. - 特許庁A warp device 41 is provided on the side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce game balls flowing down the game area 5 a into the decorative frame 40 . A stage portion 42 is provided for rolling a game ball introduced into the interior of the frame 40 and causing it to flow downward.

In the lower part of the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) general winning openings 43 in which game balls can always win (entering a ball) are provided at intervals. When the winning (entering) game ball is detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are released from the payout device 100 (not shown) as prize balls. Dispensed onto a plate 11.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, a general pattern gate 44 (normal pattern start area) through which the game ball can pass is provided, and the game ball that has passed through this general pattern gate 44 When detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 2), a winning lottery (assisting game determination) of normal symbols is performed. It should be noted that the winning lottery of normal symbols will be described later.

At the bottom of the game area 5a and directly under the stage portion 42, there is provided a first start port 45 (special figure start region) in which the game ball can always win a prize (enter a ball), and this first start port 45 When a winning (entering) game ball is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are delivered from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. It is supposed to be paid out. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of a first special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

Below the first starting port 45, a game ball is opened from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (that a winning lottery with a normal symbol is won). A variable starting portion 46 is provided which is converted to an open state (special mode) that allows or facilitates winning (entering a ball).

The variable starting unit 46 includes a second starting port 47 (special figure starting region) in which a game ball can win (entering a ball), and a second A starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 2), a movable member 48 that changes (variable) the second starting port 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second starting port opening/closing solenoid for opening and closing the movable member 48. 48b (see FIG. 2) are provided. And, when the second starting port 47 is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second starting port 47 is open, the winning of the game ball ( ball entry) becomes possible or easier.

In addition, when the game ball that has entered the second start hole 47 is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are released from the payout device 100 as prize balls. It is to be paid out on 11th. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

Between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46, there is provided a prize winning port lamp NR (not shown) for causing the periphery of the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46 to emit light in a predetermined manner. It is possible to perform lighting effects by emitting light from a board lighting device 76 having a plurality of lamps (full-color LEDs, etc.).

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the right-hand normal figure gate 44, a closed state in which a game ball cannot win (enter a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning the special symbol jackpot determination) A variable winning section 49 is provided which is converted from (basic mode) to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can win (enter a ball).

The variable winning part 49 includes a big winning hole 50 in which a game ball can win (enter a ball), and a big winning hole detection switch 50a (FIG. 2), an opening/closing member 51 that converts (variable) the large winning opening 50 between a closed state and an open state, and a large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for opening and closing the opening/closing member 51 are provided. When the large winning opening 50 is closed, it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the large winning opening 50 is open, the winning of the game ball (ball ) is possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has won (entered) the big winning hole 50 is detected by the big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are sent from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. be paid out.

On the back side of the game board 5, the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the big winning opening 50 are won, and the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, A game ball detected by the second starting hole detection switch 47a and the big winning hole detection switch 50a, and a game ball that has flowed into the out hole 39 are received and gathered while flowing down. An out ball detection switch 52a is provided at the most downstream portion of the ball flow path. A game ball flowing down this out ball flow path and detected by the out ball detection switch 52a is discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island facility) from a discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1. - 特許庁

Outside the game area 5a, there are a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol reservation display device 63, a second special symbol reservation display device 64, as well as. Ordinary pattern holding display 65, round number display 66 (see FIG. 2) for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game) to be described later is executed, and jackpot game (special game) or time saving game state Inside, a right-handed display 67 (see FIG. 2) prompting the shooting of the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a, and a state confirmation display indicating that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. A main information display 59 is provided comprising a device 68 (see FIG. 2).

Also, a winning probability display sticker is attached near the main information display device 59 (not shown). The probability of winning a jackpot (1/285 to 1/300) and set values (4 to 1) of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment are printed on the winning probability display sticker. It should be noted that the sticking position of the winning probability display sticker 200 is an example, and is not limited to the vicinity of the main information display device 59, and may be the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1. FIG.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the first special symbol jackpot determination performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display device 61 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the second starting port 47. It is a variable display device, and the normal symbol display device 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the normal symbol winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the normal symbol gate 44. It is a vessel.

The first special symbol jackpot determination is obtained by acquiring a jackpot determination random number (first special figure determination information) when the game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45, and for the acquired jackpot determination. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "jackpot" by comparing the random value and the jackpot determination value. In addition, when the first special symbol jackpot determination is performed, the first special symbol display device 60 performs the variable display of the first special symbol, and after the lapse of a predetermined time, the stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. will be That is, the stop display of the first special symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

The second special symbol jackpot determination is obtained by acquiring a jackpot determination random value (second special figure determination information) when the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47, and for the acquired jackpot determination. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "jackpot" by comparing the random value and the jackpot determination value. In addition, when the second special symbol jackpot determination is performed, the second special symbol display device 61 performs a variable display of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. will be That is, the stop display of the second special symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

In addition, the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding display devices blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. do. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (big hit mode, losing mode) indicating the result of each big hit determination.

It should be noted that the "jackpot" in the present embodiment, the first special symbol jackpot determination (special game determination), or the second special symbol jackpot determination (special game determination), run the jackpot game (special game) It refers to the state in which you have acquired the right to The "jackpot game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big winning port 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, even before reaching the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the big winning opening 50. When (for example, 9) wins (enters a ball), one round game ends. In other words, the "jackpot game (special game)" is a game state that is advantageous to the player who can easily win prize balls. In this embodiment, it is possible to generate any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games with different degrees of advantage for the player, which will be described later in detail.

The winning lottery of the normal pattern is obtained by acquiring a random number value for hitting judgment when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, and comparing the obtained random number value for judgment with the hit judgment value to see if it is a "win". It corresponds to determining whether or not When the winning lottery for the normal symbols is performed, the normal symbols are variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 62, and after a predetermined time has passed, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed to indicate the result of the lottery. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

Incidentally, the normal symbol display device 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of normal symbols. Then, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (hitting mode or losing mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.

In the present embodiment, "hit" means a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is obtained in a winning lottery of normal symbols. The term "hit game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 even before reaching the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) win a prize (entering a ball), the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. In other words, the "hit game (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed (the start condition of the variable display is likely to be satisfied). In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, which will be described later in detail.

The first special symbol holding display device 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the first special symbol jackpot judgment (first special symbol) stored when the game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45 It is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved memories) for performing variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reserved memories. Although the maximum number of first reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The second special symbol holding display 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the second special symbol jackpot determination (second special symbol) stored when the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47 It is for displaying the number of rights (second reserved memory) for performing variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second reserved memories. Although the maximum number of second reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The normal symbol holding display device 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the right for performing a normal symbol winning lottery (normal symbol fluctuation display) that is stored when a game ball wins (passes) the normal symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (normal pattern reserved memory), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of normal pattern reserved memory. In addition, although the general pattern reservation memory is designed to be stored up to four at maximum, it may be less than or more than four.

Note that the first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, when winning the jackpot judgment of the special symbol, "7" is stopped and displayed, and when it is lost, "-" is stopped and displayed. ” should be repeated. In addition, before the start of the variable display of special symbols, the result of stopping the previous variable display is displayed by lighting the LED, so when the variable display starts, the LED is turned off. It becomes easy to grasp that it has been started.

The round number indicator 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs. is started, the lighting of the LED is continued during the jackpot game, and the LED is turned off when the jackpot game ends. For example, if the jackpot game has two rounds, only the fourth LED from the left lights up, and if the jackpot game has 16 rounds, all the LEDs light up.

The right-handed indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time-saving game state, the right-handed player urges to shoot the game ball toward the right gaming area (so-called right-handed hitting). It is for displaying a beating display, and the LED lights up during a big win state (special game state) and a time saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. , the LED starts lighting, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is turned off. In this way, since the state confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front surface (surface) of the gaming machine, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. It is possible to easily check whether it is set to

It should be noted that the installation position of the state confirmation display 68 is an example, and is not limited to the installation position of the present embodiment, and may be the front (surface) of the game machine 1 .

In the present embodiment, the same display mode (lighting display) is displayed regardless of whether the mode is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. You may For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be flashed. When the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 and any one of the second game information display devices 69 are illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status Only the confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the state confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. good. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69, which will be described later, are turned off, so these display devices may be used. Specifically, one LED of either the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on. All LEDs may be turned on.

In the lower right part inside the game area 5a, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 , a sub-normal figure holding display 86, and a sub-right-handed display 87 that prompts to shoot a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed). The sub-information display device 80 is not provided with an indicator such as the status confirmation indicator 68 described above, which indicates that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set.

The first sub-variation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the first special symbol jackpot determination, and the second sub-variation display 82 displays the result of the second special symbol jackpot determination. They are for (notifying), and are each composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the corresponding special pattern is started, the LED blinks at a predetermined interval (the first lamp pattern LZ or the second lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner), and when the corresponding special pattern is stopped and displayed, a big win. The result of the judgment (lights up in the case of a big hit, lights out in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82, it blinks and stops while the special symbols are being varied, so that only whether or not the special symbols are being varied is displayed. It may be turned on or off when displayed.

The first sub-reservation display 83 is for displaying the number of first reservation memories (number of reservations), and the second sub-reservation display 84 displays the number of second reservation memories (number of reservations). , each of which is composed of two left and right LEDs. Then, when the number of reservations is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the number of reservations is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, and when the number of reservations is "2" The left and right LEDs light up, the left LED blinks and the right LED blinks when the number of reservations is "3", and the left and right LEDs blink when the number of reservations is "4".

The sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of normal symbols is started, the LED blinks (variable display) at predetermined intervals. Then, when the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lighting up in the case of winning, light-out in the case of losing) is stop-displayed.

In addition, in the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display device 85, so that only whether or not the normal pattern is being displayed fluctuating can be grasped, it blinks during the normal pattern fluctuation display, and when it is stopped, it lights up or turns off. may

The sub-normal pattern reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of normal pattern reservation storage (number of reservations), and is composed of two LEDs arranged side by side. Then, the left and right LEDs are turned off when the number of normal figure reservations is "0", and when the number of normal figure reservations is "1", the LED on the left side lights up and the LED on the right side goes out, and the number of normal figure reservations is When the number is "2", the LED on the left side blinks and the LED on the right side lights up.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) made up of a liquid crystal display is provided in the inner part of the production space 40a, and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) in the lower part of the production space 40a. , a second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) consisting of a liquid crystal display having a display area smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided. is provided, and a circular second movable member 74 is provided on the right side of the production space 40a.

The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) performs various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, the customer waiting demo effect executed during the customer waiting state (waiting state in which the game is not progressing) in which the variable display of the special pattern is not performed, and the effect pattern executed during the variable display of the special symbol There is a variable production with a variable display of 70a.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is formed with three columns of variable display areas such as a left area, a central area, and a right area. The variable display of the production pattern 70a is performed by scrolling the production pattern 70a in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment). In addition, a special symbol display area is formed in the lower right corner of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area is changed to a variable display of the special symbol. Correspondingly, by scrolling in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the variable display of the special symbol TZ is performed.

In addition, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are, for example, constituted by patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", and the special patterns executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61 The variable display of the production pattern 70a is performed in correspondence with (synchronization with) the variable display of the symbols. That is, the variable display of the production design 70a is started in response to the start of the variable display of the special design, the performance design 70a is temporarily stopped (swing display) before the stop of the variable display of the special design, and the special design is changed. In response to the stop display of the display, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is stopped (still displayed). Incidentally, as the production pattern 70a, in addition to the patterns showing numbers, patterns showing alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be provided.

Note that the "temporary stop display" means that the performance symbol 70a shakes slightly or deforms slightly to give the player the impression that the performance symbol 70a is stopped (completely stopped). not).

In the stop display of the effect pattern 70a, the effect pattern 70a stops for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (losing mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the big hit determination. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same production pattern such as "777" or a combination of production patterns with regularity such as "357", and the losing mode is other aspects. be. In addition, the form of the variable display of the production pattern 70a is not limited to this, and may be scrolled in the horizontal direction, or may be rotated (rotated) on the spot.

In addition, during the variable display of the production pattern 70a, various production images such as a ready-to-win production, a background image, characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second display according to the result of the big hit determination. By being displayed on the image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the player's expectation for the execution of the big win (special game) (hereinafter referred to as "big win expectation") is heightened. there is

Here, the "ready-to-win effect" means that a jackpot game is executed for the player such that a part of the combinations of the effect patterns 70a that inform the big win are temporarily stopped and the other effect patterns 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode that makes you expect that. For example, when a combination of 3-digit performance symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a (jackpot result mode) for notifying a big hit, two performance symbols 70a are set in the left and right regions. 7" is temporarily stopped, and the remaining production pattern 70a is changing in the central area.

Also, in the present embodiment, there are six types of ready-to-reach effects: "normal reach effect", "SP reach effect", "SPSP reach effect", "SPSP "7" reach effect", and "full rotation reach effect". be.

"Normal ready-to-win production" is a ready-to-reach state in which two production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in the left and right regions while the background image before ready-to-reach is displayed, and the remaining one production pattern 70a changes in the central region. It is a reach effect that is performed with the

"SP ready-to-win production" is executed after the normal ready-to-win production, and the production pattern 70a in the state of forming the ready-to-win state is displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the screen, and the production effect is higher than the normal ready-to-win production (high expectation of winning big) ) is a ready-to-win production in which the production is performed.

The "SPSP ready-to-win effect" is executed after the normal ready-to-win effect or the SP ready-to-win effect, and is a ready-to-win effect in which the effect (higher expectations for a big hit) than the normal ready-to-win effect or the SP ready-to-win effect is performed.

The “all-rotation ready-to-win effect” is a ready-to-win effect that fluctuates at a low speed in a state in which all combinations of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for reporting a big win are complete. In this embodiment, it is a ready-to-win effect that is executed only when winning in the jackpot determination.

In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot related to the ready-to-win effect is higher in the order of normal ready-to-win effect<SP ready-to-win effect<SPSP ready-to-win effect<all-rotation ready-to-win effect (big win confirmed).

In addition, at the bottom of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the first A first reserved icon display area 70B for displaying reserved icons, and a number of second reserved icons corresponding to the second special figure reserved number (U2), which is the current number of second reserved memories in the specific game state, are displayed. A second reserved icon display area 70D for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed in the normal game state and the specific game state. A region 70C is formed.

The first pending icon display area 70B is divided into a first display section 70B1, a second display section 70B2, a third display section 70B3, and a fourth display section 70B4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. The display units 70B1 to 70B4 display the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first special figure pending number (U1). That is, the number of first reserved icons is also increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease in the number of first special figure reservations (U1).

Specifically, the first display portion 70B1 displays the first pending icon H11 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70B2 displays 2 The first reserved icon H12 indicating the first reserved memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed is displayed in the third display section 70B3, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the third display. A first reserved icon H13 indicating the first reserved memory is displayed, and a first reserved icon H14 indicating the first reserved memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display portion 70B4. be done.

The second pending icon display area 70D is divided into a first display section 70D1, a second display section 70D2, a third display section 70D3, and a fourth display section 70D4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. The display units 70D1 to 70D4 display the number of second pending icons corresponding to the number of second special figure pending (U2). That is, the number of second reserved icons is also increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease of the second special figure reservation number (U2).

Specifically, the first display portion 70D1 displays the second pending icon H21 indicating the second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70D2 displays two The second holding icon H22 indicating the second holding memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed third in the third display section 70D3. A second suspended icon H23 indicating a second suspended memory is displayed, and a second suspended icon H24 indicating a second suspended memory in which the fourth display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display portion 70D4. be done. In addition, in this embodiment, the "first special figure reservation number" may be referred to as the "first reservation number" and the "second special figure reservation number" may be referred to as the "second reservation number".

The icon display area 70C displays the first pending icon or the second When the second pending icon displayed in the first display portion 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D moves (shifts), the icon TI is displayed, and when the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) ends. The icon TI disappears (deletes). In addition, the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). In the present embodiment, the "first pending icon", the "second pending icon", and the "subject icon" may be collectively referred to as "icons".

Also, on the left side of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the first reserved number indicating the number of the current first special figure reserved number (U1) is displayed in the normal game state and the specific game state. For the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation for displaying the second reservation number indicating the number of the current second special figure reservation number (U2) in the normal game state and the specific game state A number display area 70F is formed.

The first movable member 73 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. It is vertically moved between a standby position (origin position) located above and a production position located below by the driving force of the first movable member driving motor, which is a part of the board driving device 75 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to perform a performance action by moving to , and the fact that it is at the origin position is detected by a first position detection sensor (not shown).

The second movable member 74 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. By the driving force of the second movable member driving motor, which is a part of the board driving device 75 (see FIG. 2), the position between the standby position (origin position) located on the upper right and the production position located on the lower left It is possible to perform a performance action by moving diagonally up and down, and a second position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.

Since the rendering positions of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 partially overlap each other, basically the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 operate simultaneously. By not doing so, they do not conflict with each other.

In addition, if the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, after one movable member moves to the rendering position, it returns to a position that does not overlap with the rendering position of the other movable member. The other movable member may be moved to the performance position.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), a game supplied from an island facility, etc. A game ball storage unit (not shown) that stores balls and supplies them to the payout device 100, a main control device 110A (not shown) that incorporates a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress of the game, and a main control board 110 A payout control device 120A (not shown) incorporating a payout control board 120 that controls the payout device 100 in response to a payout control command from the main control board 110. A performance control device 130A (not shown) incorporating a control board 130, a power supply device 160A (not shown) containing a power supply board 160 that supplies power supply voltage to various control devices, and game information (not shown) outside the game machine A game information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 2) is provided for outputting a game signal).

In addition, an opening and closing door type cover member is provided that opens and closes the left and right sides in the left and right direction around a rotation axis set on one left and right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device 110A and the entire production control device 130A from the rear. The production control device 130A includes the volume of the production sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member, the display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and various lighting A changeover switch 22 (see FIG. 2) is provided for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the light amount of the devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76).

On the surface side of the main control board 110, there is a main control unit 110m composed of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and a stage of clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or the degree of advantage of the game (game RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for updating the set value, and a signal for shifting to a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed by operation using the setting key. A setting key switch 112a for inputting , an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values, etc., which enables the actual performance of the gaming machine 1 to be grasped.

The information display 113 is for displaying setting values and performance information (normal base values to be described later), and is composed of four 7-segment displays each having a decimal point DP arranged side by side. there is An identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information is configured on two 7-segment displays corresponding to the upper two digits, and two 7-segment displays corresponding to the lower two digits. A numerical segment for displaying numerical information indicating numerical values of setting values and performance information is configured by .

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress of the game (basic actions). The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores a game control program and the like, and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing. It has an input port for main control, an output port, and the like. The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the program stored in the main ROM 110b, and uses the main RAM 110c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the game, thereby controlling the controlled devices (such as various solenoids and various displays). device), or transmit a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to allow bidirectional command (data) communication, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is the main control board. Commands (data) can be communicated only in one direction from 110 to the effect control board 130 .

The input ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a big winning opening detection switch 50a, and an out ball detection switch 52a. , magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control board 120 and the like are connected. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing corresponding to the detection signals is performed.

The output ports of the main control board 110 include the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the main information display device 59, the game information output terminal board 90, the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like. is connected. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various displays, and game information output terminal board to notify the outside of the game machine (hall computer, etc.) via the output port Information and the like are output.

The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on the reception of payout commands from the main control board 110 and controls the shooting of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launcher 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs and the like, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, and the like. . The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, uses the payout RAM 121c as a work area, performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of game balls, and operates the payout device 100. Control, or transmit a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, and the like.

The input port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to an open detection switch 31a, a tray full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the payout device 100, and a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit. A payout motor 100 b provided in the payout device 100 is connected to the output port of the payout control unit 121 .

When a payout command is received from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 drives a payout motor 100b provided in the payout device 100 to perform control to put out a predetermined number of game balls. When the payout of the game ball is detected, the control of putting out the game ball is terminated.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, and the like, which are not shown. The input port of the firing control unit 122 is connected with the touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b, and the output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected with the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b. ing.

When the shooting control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15 based on the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the energization of the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the shooting solenoid 28b. When the change in rotation angle of the shooting handle 15 is detected by the detection signal from the shooting volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the ball is shot so that the shooting intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the shooting handle 15. A solenoid 28b is driven to shoot a game ball.

The shooting solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the hitting member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft. . The operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, so the game ball is fired in one minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces/minute). That is, game balls are shot approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The effect control board 130 is a subordinate control board (subordinate control means) that controls the effect (performed in the gaming machine 1) related to the game based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110 . The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores a performance control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), audio output device 9 (speaker), etc., display control unit 140, frame lighting device 10, button driving device 17b, board driving device 75, board lighting It has a lamp control section 150 that controls the device 76 and the like, and an input port and an output port for effect control.

The sub CPU 130a reads out the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b upon receiving an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, and performs arithmetic processing related to effects while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area. In response to input signals from the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, various control units (display control unit 140, lamp control unit 150) are controlled to execute various effects (data and commands are Output).

The input port of the effect control board 130 is connected with the effect button detection switch 17a, the cross key detection switch 19a, a button position detection sensor (not shown), and the like. In the performance control board 130, a performance button detection signal indicating that the performance button 17 is operated is input from the performance button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection signal indicating that the cross key 19 is operated is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing for executing an effect according to the detection signal is performed.

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image. Also, it controls the audio output device 9 to output a predetermined sound.

The display control unit 140 includes an overall control unit 141 that comprehensively controls image display and audio output based on the reception of an effect control command from the effect control unit 130m, and a display control command (display list) from the overall control unit 141. The image control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on the reception, the CGROM 146 that stores image data, etc., and the reception of the voice control command from the general control unit 141 It has an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) for controlling the audio output device 9 based on the data, and an audio ROM 149 in which audio data and the like are stored.

The integrated control unit 141 includes an integrated CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an integrated ROM 141b that stores an integrated control program, an integrated RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image control unit 145 (VDP), and an audio control unit 148 (audio It has an input/output port to which a LSI) is connected.

The supervising CPU 141a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the supervising control program stored in the supervising ROM 141b, and uses the supervising RAM 141c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the effects. As a result, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing effect images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting the display control command (display list) to the display control unit 140, and an audio output device 9, and performs control processing and the like for generating an audio control command for instructing the effect sound to be output from 9 and transmitting it to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The VRAM 143 provided in the image control unit 145 (VDP) is a display list storage area for temporarily storing the display list output from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142a), and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , and a frame buffer area corresponding to the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time drawing is started.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 in the “drawing frame buffer” of the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on the instruction (display list) from the overall control unit 141, Drawing data is read from the "frame buffer for display" in the frame buffer area, a video signal (such as an RGB signal) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 70 are displayed. Various images are displayed by outputting to the image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

An operation clock is supplied from a crystal oscillator to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and by dividing this operation clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display are displayed. A synchronizing signal (horizontal synchronizing signal/vertical synchronizing signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is generated, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) are generated. output to In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second=about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be 60 fps (1/60 second=approximately 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and based on various production data (including commands) transmitted from the production control unit 130m, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display of the two-image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and uses the lamp RAM 150c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the effect received from the effect control unit 130m. In response to an effect instruction command, etc., it performs control (outputs data and commands) to cause controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform a predetermined effect.

The frame lighting device 10, the button driving device 17b, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80 are connected to the input/output ports of the lamp control section, and the information is transmitted from the production control section 130m (sub-CPU 130a). Based on various production data (including commands) that have been generated, lighting control of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80 is performed, and the button driving device 17b and the It also controls the driving of the driving source such as the motor and the solenoid of the board driving device 75 .

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the game machine 1 from power supplied from the outside of the game machine 1, and controls the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control). substrate 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 includes a power failure detection circuit 162 that detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure); A backup power supply circuit 163 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when power is cut off (power outage).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state for supplying main power to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130 and various electronic components) and an OFF state for stopping. A power switch is provided so as to be operable by a game store clerk, and when the power switch is turned on, the supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. The supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power failure detection signal goes high, the main CPU 110a becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal goes low, the main CPU 110a stops operating.

The backup power supply circuit 163 has a capacitor that stores electricity when power is supplied to the game machine. supply. As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and payout RAM 121c are retained even at the time of power failure (power failure), and after recovery from power failure (power failure), the control state of the game is restored to the state before power failure (power failure). can be restored. A backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 .

(Description of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, it has a "low probability state" and a "high probability state" as the state related to the jackpot determination of the special symbol, and "non-time-saving state" and " It has a "time saving state".

In this embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) Low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) that is “low-probability state” and “non-time-saving state”
(2) Low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state) that is “low-probability state” and “time-saving state”
(3) High-probability time-saving gaming state (probability variable gaming state) that is “high-probability state” and “time-saving state”

In addition, the game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "low-probability short-time game state". In addition, in the present embodiment, the "low-probability short-time gaming state" and "high-probability short-time gaming state" may be referred to as "specific game state" because they are game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

In the present embodiment, the "low probability state" is, for example, when the set value (jackpot probability in jackpot determination), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, is "1", the first start port 45 or the second It refers to a game state in which the winning probability of the big win is set as low as about 1/300 in the judgment of the big win of the special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball enters the 2 start hole 47.例文帳に追加On the other hand, in the "high probability state", the probability of winning the jackpot is improved compared to the low probability state. It says the game state.

Specifically, there are 4 types of set values from "1" to "4", and when the set value is "1", the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability state is about 1/300, which is a high probability. The probability of winning the jackpot in the state is about 1/60, and when the set value is "2", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low-probability state is about 1/295, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability state is about If the set value is "3", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is about 1/290, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is about 1/58, and the set value is " 4", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is about 1/285, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is about 1/57.

Therefore, in the "high-probability state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability state". Also, the change from the low-probability state to the high-probability state is after the jackpot game, which will be described later, is completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state is referred to as "variable probability jackpot". Also, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability state is called a "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, "non-time-saving state" means that in the normal pattern winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result It refers to a game state which is set longer than the "time-saving state" and tends to set the opening time of the second starting port 47 short when winning is won. For example, when a game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal pattern is performed, and the normal pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the normal pattern display device 62. For example, the display is stopped after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be open for 0.2 seconds, for example, after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the "time saving state" means that in the normal pattern winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result is " The game state is set shorter than the "non-time-saving state" and set longer than the "non-time-saving state", for example, 2.5 seconds for the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning. Furthermore, in the "non-time-saving state", the probability of winning the winning lottery of normal symbols is set as low as 1/128, and in the "time-saving state", the probability of winning the winning lottery of normal symbols is set to 127/128, for example. and is set high. Therefore, in the "time saving state", when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44 than in the "non-time saving state", the second starting port 47 is more likely to be controlled in the open mode. As a result, in the "time-saving state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game in a state where it is difficult to consume game balls.

In addition, in the embodiment, the "time saving state" is set so that the normal pattern fluctuation time, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the winning probability of the normal pattern lottery are advantageous compared to the "non-time saving state" It is However, the "time saving state" may be set so that only one of the normal symbol fluctuation time, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. In addition, in the non-time saving state, the probability of winning the winning lottery of the normal symbols may be set to 0/128, for example.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is five times the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state (common regardless of the set value). The probability of occurrence is not limited to 5 times, and may be set to an arbitrary value such as 3 times or 8 times as long as the value is 10 times or less.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is designed not to win a small win that is less advantageous to the advantageous person than the big win in the judgment of the big win. good too. In this case, it is preferable to set the small winning probability to be the same regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "4".

Also, the larger the set value is, the more advantageous it is to the player (the higher the probability of a big hit). can be

In addition, the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the low probability state and / or high probability state may be the same for all setting values (1 to 4), for example, two or three setting values (1 and 2, 1 to 3, etc.), the probability of being determined as a big win in the low probability state and/or the high probability state may be the same. In addition, although the set values in this embodiment are in four stages from 1 to 4, they are not limited to four stages, and may be more or less than four stages.

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 6. FIG.

(jackpot determination table)
FIG. 3(a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 (entering the ball). , FIG. 3(b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning (entrance) of the game ball to the second starting port 47. be.

As shown in FIGS. 3(a) and 3(b), the jackpot determination table corresponds to the current set value, the current probability state, the random number for jackpot determination, and the jackpot determination result (jackpot, lose). As a reference, the approximate winning probability in the case of a "jackpot" is described in the rightmost column.

The main CPU 110a refers to the first special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 3A or the second special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. Based on the random number value for judgment, it is judged whether it is a "big win" or a "loss".

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. The random number for judgment is judged to be a "jackpot". Then, a random value for judging a big win other than that judged to be a big win is judged to be "losing".

In addition, the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is stored in the first special figure determination information holding storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the game ball to the second starting port 47 The special figure determination information obtained based on the winning is stored in the second special figure determination information holding storage area of the main RAM 110c. Then, when the jackpot determination is performed, the special figure determination information stored in the first special figure determination information reservation storage area or the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the special figure determination information storage area of the main RAM 110c. , Jackpot determination will be performed using the shifted special figure determination information.

In addition, the first special figure determination information holding storage area is divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively, and the holding corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit Icons are displayed in the first display portion 70B1 to the fourth display portion 70B4 of the first pending icon display area 70B. The second special figure determination information holding storage area is divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively, and the holding icon corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in these first storage unit to the fourth storage unit They are displayed in the first display portion 70D1 to the fourth display portion 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D.

(Special pattern judgment table)
FIG. 4(a) is a special symbol determination table for big hits for determining the type of special symbols when it is determined to be a big hit, and FIG. 4(b) is a special symbol determination table when it is determined to be a loss. It is a special symbol determination table for losing for determining the type.

As shown in FIGS. 4(a) and 4(b), the special symbol determination table contains the types of special symbols to be stopped and displayed, the random number for special symbol determination, the determination result of the special symbol, and the determination result corresponding to the determination result. Stop special figure data and the special design designation command which corresponds to the decision result are matched.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are loss special symbols in which the jackpot game is not executed. The special symbols "01" and "04" are special jackpot patterns for executing the first jackpot game, and the special patterns "02" and "05" are jackpot patterns for executing the second jackpot game. , the special symbol “03” is a jackpot symbol for executing the third jackpot game.

In the "first jackpot game", a round game is executed up to 6 times in which the big winning hole 50 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds. In addition, in the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time elapses. Further, after the end of the first jackpot game, the low-probability short-time gaming state (short-time gaming state) is set until the variable display of the special symbols is performed 100 times.

In the "second jackpot game", a round game is executed up to 10 times, in which the big winning hole 50 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds. Further, after the second jackpot game is finished, the high-probability short-time game state (probability-variable game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbols is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost decided.

In the "third jackpot game", a round game is executed up to four times, in which the second big prize opening 56 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then the big prize opening is closed for 2 seconds. Further, after the end of the third jackpot game, the high-probability short-time game state (probability-variable game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbols is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost decided.

Although each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is associated with one unsuccessful special symbol, at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is associated with a plurality of unsuccessful special symbols. good too.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any of FIGS. 4(a) to 4(b), and based on the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed and the random number for special symbol determination, the type of special symbol, Stop special figure data and special design specification command are decided, special design specification command is transmitted to production control baseplate 130.

A first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 4 is that the types of the big hit special symbols and the types of the losing special symbols are the same without changing depending on the setting values. By doing so, it is possible for the player to play the game with peace of mind without making the game complicated.

A second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 4 is that the selection ratio of various jackpot special symbols and the selection ratio of various losing symbols are constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Special figure variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 5(a) is a special symbol variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the non-time saving state, and FIG. 5(b) is a special symbol variation pattern in the time saving state It is a special figure variation pattern determination table for the time saving state for determining.

As shown in FIG. 5, the special symbol variation pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting port) to be displayed, the big hit determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), and the reach determination Random number, 1st special figure reservation number (U1) or 2nd special figure reservation number (U2), random number for special figure variation pattern determination, special figure variation pattern as determination result, and special symbol variation time And, the special figure variation pattern specification command indicating the special figure variation pattern is associated.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol variation pattern" can specify the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 2 Based on the number of special figure reservations (U2) and the random number for special figure variation pattern determination, the special figure variation pattern is determined, and a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure variation pattern is transmitted to the production control board 130. It's like

In addition, as will be described later, the effect control board 130 determines the content (effect mode) of the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a according to the variation pattern designation command (jackpot determination result, special symbol determination result, etc.). Since it is designed to do, the rightmost column of the special figure pattern determination table shown in FIG. 5 describes the production contents that can be executed in the variable production as a reference.

"Normal variation", "shortened variation", "ultra-shortened variation", and "long variation" are shown in the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. , means to stop without reaching.

In addition, "ready-to-win" means that the player expects that a jackpot game will be executed in which some of the combinations of the performance symbols 70a that inform the big win are temporarily stopped and the other performance symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode that causes For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a for notifying a big hit, the same performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at "7" in the left area and the right area. , refers to a mode in which the remaining production patterns 70a are changing in the central area.

It should be noted that "temporary stop" means that the production pattern 70a swings slightly or is slightly deformed to make it appear to the player that the production pattern 70a is stopped (completely stopped). not).

"Normal reach" means a reach performance in which the same performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left and right regions and the remaining one performance pattern 70a fluctuates in the central region, and the expectation of a big hit is the lowest. It is a reach production.

"SP ready-to-win" and "special SP ready-to-win" are super ready-to-win effects with a higher expectation for a big hit than normal ready-to-win, and the development effects are executed from the normal ready-to-win effects, and then executed. For example, the two production patterns 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the first image display device 70, and a special ready-to-win production is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. . In addition, in the "special SP reach", a more special effect than in the "SP reach" is executed.

"SPSP ready-to-win" and "SPSP '7' ready-to-win" are special ready-to-win productions with a higher expectation of a big win than super ready-to-win, and are executed after normal ready-to-win production or super ready-to-win production. For example, the development effect is executed from the normal reach effect, and then the three effect patterns 70a are reduced and moved to the corner of the first image display device 70, and almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70 is used. It is designed to perform a special reach production than "SP reach". In addition, in "SPSP ready-to-win", the ready-to-win effect is executed by the effect pattern 70a other than "7", and in "SPSP "7" ready-to-win", the ready-to-win effect is executed by the pattern of "7".

In addition, the "full rotation reach" is a reach at which the jackpot is determined, and is executed after the normal reach effect. For example, the development effect is executed from the normal reach effect, and then the three effect patterns 70a are changed at a low speed in a state where they are all the same, and "SPSP reach" is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. Or "SPSP '7' reach" special reach effect (big hit confirmed reach effect) is performed.

The first feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 5 is that the type of the special figure variation pattern to be determined is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to see through the set value from the special figure variation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

The second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 5 is that the selection ratio of each special figure variation pattern is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to see through the set value from the special figure variation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

As the third feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. While it becomes easier, even if the second special symbol reservation number increases to 2 or 3 in the non-time saving state, the point is that the shortening variation is not determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. By doing so, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variable display of the special symbol when hitting the left side rather than when hitting the right side in the non-time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

As the fourth feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. While the variation is not determined, when the second special symbol pending number increases to 1 to 3 in the time saving state, (long) shortening variation is easily determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. By doing so, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variable display of the special symbol in the case of hitting to the right than in the case of hitting to the left in the time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

(Advance judgment table)
FIG. 6A is a non-time-saving state pre-determination table for pre-determining (prefetching) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 during the non-time-saving state. , FIG. 6(b) is a pre-determination table for the time saving state for pre-determining (prefetching) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 47 during the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 6, in the preliminary determination table, the type of special symbol (starting port), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the reach determination random value, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value , Toku-zu scheduled variation pattern as a determination result, and the look-ahead designation command indicating the toku-zu scheduled variation pattern are associated.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special figure variation pattern" can specify the special symbol type, the judgment result of the jackpot determination, the special symbol type, and the special figure variation pattern to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 6, and based on the random number value for judging the jackpot, the random number value for judging the special symbol, the random number value for judging reach, and the random number value for judging the special figure fluctuation pattern, the special figure scheduled fluctuation. A pattern is determined, and a look-ahead designation command corresponding to the special figure scheduled variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

Next, the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(main processing of the main control board)
Main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing main processing of the main control board 110 . This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S1, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S2, and waits for activation of other boards in step S3. Specifically, the activation of the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is waited for one second so that no command is missed from the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S4, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S5. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing for permitting the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 26 .

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. When the backup flag is saved, the process is moved to step S7 assuming that the power is restored, and when the backup flag is not saved, the process is moved to step S8 assuming that the power is turned on for the first time.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S9 assuming that the setting change mode is entered, and if there is no setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S10.

The main CPU 110a performs setting change processing in step S9. Specifically, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or being confirmed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and the setting value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. display the current setting values saved in , and transmit a setting change designation command to the performance control board 130. - 特許庁

Further, each time the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the setting value is changed (updated) within the range of "1" to "4", and the updated setting value is displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the setting key switch 112a is turned off. When there is a setting confirmation operation to change from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting value after change (update) is saved in the setting value area as confirmation of the setting value, and the display of the setting value on the information display 113 is terminated. At the same time, the state confirmation display on the state confirmation display 68 is terminated, and processing for terminating the setting change mode is performed.

Incidentally, in the effect control board 130 that has received the setting change designation command, processing for executing setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed is performed. Specifically, a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are displayed in a predetermined manner during the setting change. All of the LEDs are lit in a luminescent color (for example, white). Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound ("setting is being changed") indicating that the setting is being changed.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S7. If the checksum is normal (the data in the game RWM area is normal), the process proceeds to step S11, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the game RWM area is abnormal), Assuming that the control state before the power-off cannot be normally restored, the process proceeds to step S12.

If the backup flag is not saved, that is, if the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the proper range, the process proceeds to step S13, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S12. Transfer.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing in step S12. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130 , set interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, and after clearing the output port, output an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. and wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing non-restorable error notification is performed.

"Unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (game control is not performed), and is not canceled unless setting change processing is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then turned on without changing the settings, the error will not be canceled and the setting will not be canceled. The power switch has to be turned on with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

Although the "unrecoverable error" is not canceled unless the setting change process is executed, it may be canceled when the RWM clear without the setting change process is executed.

The "unrecoverable error notification" is a notification for recognizing that an unrecoverable error has occurred. ) is displayed, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 76 for the board are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or an unrecoverable error occurs from the voice output device 9. An unrecoverable error sound ("This is an unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) is output until the power is turned off.
Note that the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the board lighting device 76 may be collectively referred to as a "drawing device."

In step S13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process proceeds to step S14 assuming that the RWM clear is to be executed, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process proceeds to step S16.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing in step S14. Specifically, a process for initializing the game control state (initializing areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area) is performed.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a low-probability short-time game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process proceeds to step S21. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing the power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized. ), the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the RWM area is displayed from the audio output device 9. A power-on notification sound (“RWM cleared” + buzzer sound) indicating initialization is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the RWM has been cleared.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S17 assuming that the setting confirmation mode is entered, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process moves to step S18.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S17. Specifically, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or being confirmed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and the setting value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. display the current setting values saved in , and transmit a setting confirmation designation command to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

Further, when the setting key switch 112a is turned off from the ON state, when the confirmation end operation is performed, the display of the set values on the information display 113 is ended, and the state confirmation display on the state confirmation display 68 is ended. Perform processing to end the setting confirmation mode.

In addition, in the effect control board 130 that has received the setting confirmation designation command, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation is being performed is performed. Specifically, a setting checking screen indicating that the setting is being checked is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and predetermined light emission is performed while the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are checking the setting. All the lights are lit in a color (for example, white). Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“Confirming the setting value”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a clears (0 clears) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area, and sets the game RWM area when power is restored. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, in the effect control board 130, the processing for ending the setting confirmation notification and the like, which will be described later, and executing the power restoration notification is performed.

"Power restoration notification" is notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before power interruption, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect) at the time of power restoration on the image display devices 70 and 71 symbol “135”), or the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are fully lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, blue) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the audio output device 9 to output a power recovery notification sound ("power has been restored" + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been restored (from a power failure) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the notification of power recovery, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the power has been restored.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a sends other commands (first special figure reservation number (U1) and special figure reservation number designation command indicating the second special figure reservation number (U2), general figure reservation number (G) Ordinary figure holding number designation command etc. shown) is transmitted to the production control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special figures and the number of reserved normal figures, and the processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the first image display device 70 is performed. will be done.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S21. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current set value. In addition, this set value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted. Also, the set value specifying command may be transmitted each time the variable display of the special symbol is started, or may be transmitted each time the big winning game is started.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S22, and permits all interrupts in step S23.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value for determining the special symbol variation mode (variation time) and the special symbol determination random number value. An initial value random value updating process is performed to update the initial value random value, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred in step S26. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply substrate 160. If the power failure detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S24 to detect power failure. If a signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S27.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupts, performs processing to clear the output port in step S28, and clears the game RWM area (set value area) of the main RAM 110c in step S29. ) are calculated and saved in the game RWM area, and in step S30, a backup flag is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S31, Processing for prohibiting RAM access is performed, and the system waits until the supply of the power supply voltage is completely cut off.

In this way, multiple conditions (operations) are set for setting change operations, making it difficult to change settings easily. It is possible to

In addition, since the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the number of conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to be performed, and to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped, so that the game machine may perform unexpected operations, causing inconvenience to the game store and players. It becomes possible to improve the reliability of the game machine.

Also, if the value in the setting value area is not within the proper range, that is, if there is a possibility that the previous power failure occurred while the settings were being changed, unrecoverable error processing is executed even if the checksum is normal. By stopping the progress of the game by pressing the button, it is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine by preventing the game from progressing in a state where the setting value not intended by the game arcade is set. Become.

In addition, during setting change (setting change mode) or setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode), the state confirmation display 68, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the lighting device for the frame are displayed on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1. 10 and the board illumination device 76, it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed, and on the back side (rear side), it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113. ing. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (surface) or the rear (back) of the gaming machine 1 .

Note that the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state as a condition. By doing so, since the number of conditions increases, fraud can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

Also, if it is determined that there is no backup flag (this is the first time the power is turned on) and it is determined that there has been no setting change operation, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S10, unrecoverable error processing will be performed. is executed, but when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the game RWM area is initialized (cleared to 0) by the game program and the initial value "1" is saved in the set value area. Then, the process may be moved to step S13.

Also, if it is determined that there is a backup flag (that is, the power is restored) and that there is no setting change operation, and if it is determined that the checksum is abnormal in subsequent step S10, unrecoverable error processing is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the game RWM area is initialized (cleared to 0) by the game program and the initial value "1" is saved in the set value area. , the process may be moved to step S13.

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted including information indicating the current game state. You may make it transmit the game state designation|designated command which shows.

Also, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the game program calculates the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c. may be calculated. In this case, the calculated checksum should be saved in the information RWM area.

In addition, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if one of the checksums is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing may be performed.

Also, the setting change designation command is transmitted at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on designation command is transmitted after the setting change processing is completed. However, instead of the setting change designation command, the setting change start designation command is transmitted. Alternatively, a setting change end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power-on designation command. In this case, the setting change end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting change process, or may be transmitted after the setting change process ends.

Further, when the setting is changed, the RWM clearing process is performed after the setting is changed, but the RWM clearing process may be performed before the setting is changed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control board)
Timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, the special game timer counter such as update processing of the special symbol time counter, opening time of the special electric accessory, etc. , update processing of normal symbol time counter, update processing of opening and closing time of movable member 48, and other time control processing for updating various timer counters. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from a counter such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a starting opening timer counter, a starting opening closing timer counter, or the like is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for judging a special symbol, a random number for judging a special symbol variation pattern, a random number for judging a hit, a random number for determining a normal symbol, and a random number for determining a normal symbol variation pattern. Performs specific random number update processing for updating the random number used. Specifically, each random number value and the random number counter are updated by adding +1. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the action The random value is newly updated by setting the initial value random value to be used as a new cycle initial value.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a sets the initial random number value for judging a big hit, the initial random number value for judging a special symbol, the initial random number value for judging a hit, and the initial random number value for determining a normal symbol in step S130. Initial value random value update process to be updated.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a controls the normal winning opening detection switch 43a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, the out ball detection switch 52a, and the like. Input control processing is performed to determine whether or not there is an input to each switch, and to set predetermined data if there is an input. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a determines the number of reserved special symbols (judgment of a big hit, etc.), controls the display of special symbols, controls the opening and closing of the big winning opening 50 (opening/closing member 51), controls the game state, and so on. Perform control processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs normal pattern normal electric control processing for performing normal pattern storage number determination (hit determination, etc.), normal pattern display control, opening/closing control of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48), and the like. conduct.

It should be noted that the type of normal pattern per determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, the type of the normal pattern loss is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various normal patterns determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, and the selection ratio of various losing normal patterns are constant without changing depending on the set value. ing. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation designation command for checking the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, or controls a prize ball counter (three prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter), and perform payout control processing for transmitting payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning ports to the payout control board 120 . As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the payout device 100 .

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of magnetic anomaly or radio wave anomaly based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a. A magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination process for transmitting a command to the production control board 130 is performed. When the effect control board 130 receives a magnetic anomaly error designation command or an electric wave anomaly error designation command, it performs control for performing magnetic anomaly error notification or electric wave anomaly error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (game information) from the game information output terminal plate 90, starting opening/closing data to be output to the second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, and large winning opening/closing solenoid 51b to output. Winning opening opening/closing data, first special symbol display device 60, and special symbol display data output to second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display data output to normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63, and special design reservation display data to be output to the second special design reservation display device 64, data creation processing to create data such as normal design reservation display data to be output to the normal design reservation display device 65.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a performs port output processing for outputting signals such as the external information data created in step S700, the starting opening opening/closing data, and the big winning opening opening/closing data, special symbol display data, and normal symbol display data. , display output processing for outputting signals such as special symbol reserved display data and normal symbol reserved display data, and payout command transmission processing for sending the command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120 Also, an output control process for executing an effect command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 130 is performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs an information program calling process. Specifically, after the interrupt is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and the processing for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S810. Specifically, the normal payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to various winning openings (general winning opening, big winning opening, starting opening) during the normal gaming state, A process for counting the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a regardless of the game state, is performed. .

It should be noted that the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are game information that is not affected even if the set values are changed (irrelevant to the set values). By counting, it becomes possible to calculate performance information (a normal base value, which will be described later) from which the influence of the set value is eliminated, and it is possible to use it to grasp the performance of the gaming machine 1 .

The main CPU 110a performs performance information calculation processing (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((normal medium payout number/normal medium out number) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the RWM area for information is calculated. Save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area of .

The game interval is updated each time the total number of outs reaches 60,000. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game interval, a third area for storing the normal base value in the game interval two times before, and a normal base value in the game interval three times before A fourth area is provided for playing, and base values for four game intervals including the current one are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S850. Specifically, the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area are displayed on the information display device 113 while being switched every five seconds. Performs processing for setting performance display data.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing (information program) in step S870. Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to a test facility used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step S880. Specifically, display output processing for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various displays, and processing for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed. .

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return processing. Specifically, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area, the interrupt is permitted, and the process for returning to the game program is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, no timer interrupt is executed in the setting change process, RWM clear process, and setting confirmation process. Since the performance information is not displayed, the control load on the main control board 110 can be reduced.

Although the performance information calculation process is performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. FIG. Also, the game ball counting process may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110 . Specifically, it may be performed between step S25 and step S26.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
Input control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing input control processing in the main control board 110 .

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. In this general winning hole detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43 or not. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to step S220.

When a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the winning ball counter (5 winning ball counter) for the general winning hole used for winning balls is updated by adding data indicating 5 winning balls. Then, "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning hole and updated (D←D+1), and then the normal winning hole detection switch input processing is terminated.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process. In this big winning hole detecting switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the big winning hole detecting switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the big winning hole 50. If there is no detection signal input from the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to step S230.

When the detection signal from the big winning hole detection switch 50a is input, data indicating 15 winning balls is added to the winning ball counter for the big winning hole (15 winning ball counter) used for winning balls. The winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls entering the winning hole is updated by adding "1" (D←D+1) to determine whether the jackpot game (special game) is currently in progress. determine whether When the jackpot game is currently in progress, the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls that have won the jackpot 50 is updated by adding "1" (C←C+1) to the jackpot. Terminate the detection switch input process.

If the current game state is not the special game state, the number of game balls that have won (entered) a specific winning hole (second starting hole 47, big winning hole 50) outside the winning period. The counter (E) is updated by adding "1" (E←E+1), and it is determined whether or not the value of the fraudulent winning ball counter (E) is greater than a specified number (for example, 10), resulting in fraudulent winning. When the value of the ball counter (E) is equal to or less than the specified number, the big winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.

If the value of the fraudulent prize winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number, it is assumed that the fraudulent prize winning (illegal prize winning) occurs outside the winning period, and an error for fraudulent prize winning is specified. Set the command in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the error designation command for fraudulent winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 informs that the fraudulent winning has occurred by performing the fraudulent winning error notification.

Then, the external information data (output data) for outputting the illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared to detect the large winning opening. End switch input processing. As a result, an illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible for an external device to recognize (specify) that an illegal winning has occurred.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process. In this first starting hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the first starting hole detection switch 45a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first starting hole 45. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start opening detection switch input process. In this second starting port detection switch input processing, substantially the same processing as the first starting port detection switch input processing shown in FIG. 10, which will be described later, is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44. If the detection signal is not input from the gate detection switch 44a, the input control process is terminated.

When the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of normal pattern reservations, which is the number of normal pattern reservation memories stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area, is less than four. When the number of general pattern reservations is not less than 4, the input control process is terminated.

If the normal pattern reservation number is less than 4, add "1" to the normal pattern reservation number and update it, normal pattern determination information (random number for hit judgment, normal pattern determination random value, normal pattern fluctuation pattern Random number for determination) is acquired, and the vacant storage units are searched in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and the acquired normal pattern judgment information is stored in the vacant storage unit and input. End the control process.

(Input processing of the first start opening detection switch of the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the first starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the first start hole detection switch 45a has been input (a game ball has won the first start hole 45). When the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first 1 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counter used for prize balls, and in step S230-3, the special figure determination information ( Random number for jackpot judgment, random number for special pattern judgment, random number for reach judgment, random number for special figure fluctuation pattern judgment) is acquired.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol reservation number (U1) stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area is less than four in step S230-4. When the first special figure reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S230-5, and when the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, this first start End the mouth detection switch input process.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special figure pending number (U1) to update (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, the updated first special figure Set the first special figure reservation number designation command corresponding to the figure reservation number (U1) in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the 1st special figure reservation number specification command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the 1st special figure reservation number.

The main CPU 110a stores the acquired special symbol determination information in the first special symbol reservation storage area in step S230-7. Specifically, since the first special symbol reservation storage area is divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, the vacant storage unit is searched in order from the first storage unit, and the vacant storage unit Stores the acquired special figure determination information.

As described above, in the predetermined storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the special figure determination information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, and special figure fluctuation pattern determination random values, etc.) will be stored.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current gaming state is the non-time-saving gaming state. If it is in the non-time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S230-9, and if it is not in the non-time-saving gaming state, this first start opening detection switch input process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in step S230-9. In this first pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the special figure determination information (first reservation storage) acquired this time is displayed before the special symbol fluctuation display based on the determination information is performed. A scheduled variation pattern, which is a variation pattern scheduled to be determined and executed, is determined.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first look-ahead designation command corresponding to the scheduled variation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination process of step S230-8 in the effect transmission data storage area, 1 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

As a result, the first look-ahead specified command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 executes 1 or before the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first look-ahead specified command. It is possible to execute a look-ahead foretelling effect that executes a predetermined foretelling effect over a plurality of variable displays. It should be noted that the pre-reading notice effect is one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the lighting device 10 for the frame, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the lighting device 76 for the board. is done using

In addition, for the second starting opening detection switch input processing, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the first starting opening 45, the first special symbol reservation storage area, the first reservation storage, the number of first special symbol reservations (U1), 1st special symbol reservation number designation command, 1st pre-determination process, 1st prefetch designation command, respectively, 2nd start opening detection switch 47a, 2nd start opening 47, 2nd special design reservation storage area, 2nd reservation storage, The second special figure reservation number (U2), the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second pre-determination process, the second look-ahead designation command may be replaced.

(Special special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special figure special electric control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the special figure special electric control processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special special electric processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the special special electric processing data loaded in step S302, executes processing corresponding to the branch destination address, This special figure special electric control processing ends.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the variable display of the special symbol is started based on the judgment result of the reservation memory (special figure judgment information), the fluctuation time is set, and the start of the fluctuation display Processing and special figure special electric processing data for transmitting the accompanying start time command (special symbol storage specification command as start time signal, game state specification command, special symbol specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) to production control board 130 is changed to "1", a special symbol memory determination process (step S310) is executed. The details of the special symbol storage determination process will be described later.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 1, the variable display of the special symbol is stopped by the passage of the variation time, the stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set, and the stop command (special figure stop as a stop signal command) to the production control board 130, special symbol variation processing (step S320) for performing processing for changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "2", and the like.

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, by the lapse of the special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds), if it is a losing special symbol, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "0", and if it is a big hit special symbol, it is a big hit. A game opening time is set, a process for transmitting an opening designation command to the performance control board 130, and a special symbol stop process (step S330) for changing the special symbol special electric process data to "3" are executed.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the process for starting the round game by the lapse of the opening time of the big hit game and transmitting the round number designation command to the production control board 130 and the big hit based on the end of the final round game A jackpot game process (step S340) for performing a process for setting the game ending time and transmitting an ending designation command to the effect control board 130, a process for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "4", etc. is executed. do.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing to end the jackpot game by the passage of the ending time and the game state after the jackpot (low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state, high probability number, time-saving number ), a process for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "0", and the like (step S350).

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed. If the special symbols are being variably displayed, the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the special symbols are not being variably displayed, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more in step S310-2. When the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S310-3, and when the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4 to move.

The main CPU 110a updates the second special figure reservation number (U2) by subtracting "1" in step S310-3, and corresponds to the second special figure reservation number (U2) after subtraction in step S310-6. A special pattern storage specification command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the processing for updating the display of the icon are performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. Perform the shift processing of the data stored in the first storage unit ~ the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special figure determination information holding storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and stored in the 0th storage unit The special figure determination information used in the previous game that was held is erased.

On the other hand, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more in step S310-4. When the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S310-5, and when the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S319-1 to move.

The main CPU 110a updates the first special figure reservation number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, the special figure corresponding to the first special figure reservation number (U1) after subtraction A pattern storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the processing for updating the display of the icon are performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8 stores it in the first special symbol reservation storage area. Perform shift processing of the data that has been, to shift the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit ~ fourth storage unit to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game is erased.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first special figure reservation number (U1) and the second special figure reservation number (U2) after subtraction are stored in the main RAM 110c is set in a predetermined area. As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 are updated.

Also, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information holding storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information holding storage area (the number of second special figure reservations is shifted to the second 1 special figure reservation number is preferentially subtracted), but the first special figure judgment information reservation storage area or the second special figure judgment information reservation storage area in the order in which the game ball entered the start hole You may shift (subtract the first special figure reservation number and the second special figure reservation number in order of winning), or give priority to the first special figure determination information reservation storage area over the second special figure determination information reservation storage area (The first special figure reservation number is preferentially subtracted over the second special figure reservation number).

In step S311, the main CPU 110a performs a big hit determination process. Specifically, the special figure determination information (random number for big hit determination) stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area is collated with the big hit determination table shown in FIG. Determine whether or not In addition, the special symbol determination information (random number for special symbol determination) stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area is collated with the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 4, and the special symbol to be stopped Perform processing to determine the type of

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command (first information signal) corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol specifying command (first information signal) is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for determining the effect symbol 70a to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable effect is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs special figure variation pattern determination processing in step S313. Specifically, the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area is collated with the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Perform processing to determine the special figure variation pattern (variation time).

In step S314, the main CPU 110a stores a special figure variation pattern specification command (second information signal) corresponding to the special figure variation pattern type determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. set. As a result, a special figure variation pattern designation command (second information signal) is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the variation effect pattern, which is the effect mode of the variation effect performed during the variable display of the special symbol, is performed. will be done.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316 , to start the variable display of special symbols. As a result, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creating process of the step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of the step S800. In the special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, the variable display of the special symbols is performed.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets "1" to the special symbol special electric processing data, and ends the current special symbol storage determination processing. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. When the customer waiting state flag is set, the special symbol storage determination processing of this time is ended, and when the customer waiting state flag is not set, the processing is moved to step S319-2. It should be noted that the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the variable display of special symbols and the special game (jackpot game) are not being executed, but the requirements include that the variable display of normal symbols and the auxiliary game are not being executed. may

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting state specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the customer waiting demonstration effect for prompting the player to play is performed.

(Main processing of production control unit)
Next, the main processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the effect control section 130m.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupt in step E10, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub-ROM 130b, flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupt in step E30, and performs sub random number update processing in step E40. Specifically, processing for updating various random values stored in the sub-RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit)
The timer interrupt processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a timer interrupt process that is executed every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs input control processing in step E130. Specifically, it determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the production button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and performs processing of setting predetermined data when there is an input.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, it determines whether or not various commands have been transmitted from the main control board 110, and stores the received commands in the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c when various commands have been transmitted. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs setting change/confirmation processing in step E170. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a setting change designation command or a setting confirmation designation command has been received. Processing for executing change notification is performed, and when the setting confirmation designation command is received, processing for executing the above-described setting confirmation notification is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a power-on designation command has been received, and if received, a process for executing power-on notification is performed. Specifically, a power-on notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 to cause the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display a power-on screen, or to output audio. For example, the device 9 is caused to output a power-on sound.

The sub CPU 130a performs power failure recovery processing in step E250. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a power restoration designation command has been received, and if received, a process for executing power failure restoration notification is performed. Specifically, a power restoration notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 to display a power restoration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), or to output audio. For example, the device 9 is caused to output a power restoration sound.

In step E300, the sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect processing. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a customer-waiting state designation command has been received, and if the command has been received, processing for performing a customer-waiting demonstration effect after a predetermined time has elapsed is performed. conduct. More specifically, a customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 to display a customer waiting demo screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), or to display a voice For example, the output device 9 outputs a customer waiting demonstration sound. Details of the customer waiting effect processing will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state update process in step E350. Specifically, the process of referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not the game state designation command has been received, and updating the game state information stored in the sub-RAM 130c when the command has been received. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending information update process in step E400. Specifically, by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, it is determined whether or not the special figure reservation number designation command or the general figure reservation number designation command is received, and if it is received, it is stored in the sub RAM 130c (grasp ) Perform processing to update the number of the first special figure reservation, the number of the second special figure reservation, the number of general figure reservations, etc.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs a look-ahead effect process. Specifically, by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, it is determined whether or not a prefetch designation command or a special figure variation pattern designation command is received, and if it is received, the icon change as a prefetch system effect Processing related to production, continuous advance notice production, and lamp change production is performed. The details of the look-ahead effect processing will be described later.

The “icon change effect” is a type of preview effect that makes the player expect that a big win game will be executed by changing the display mode of the pending icon and the icon. Note that, in the present embodiment, an icon change effect for a suspended icon may be referred to as a "suspended icon change effect", and an icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as a "pertinent icon change effect".

A “continuous advance notice effect” is a type of foreseeing advance notice effect that makes a player expect that a jackpot game will be executed by executing a predetermined effect over one or a plurality of variable effects.
"Lamp change effect" is a kind of fore-reading forewarning effect that makes a player expect a big win game to be executed by changing the lighting mode of the prize winning hole lamp over one or more variable effects.

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs a special special electric effect process. Specifically, with reference to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a special symbol stop designation command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round number designation command, and a jackpot ending designation command etc. is received, and if received, processing is performed to execute an effect corresponding to the received command.

In addition, when the special pattern designation command (first information signal) and the special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command (second information signal) as the start time command (start time signal) accompanying the start of the fluctuation display can be received normally , the variable production accompanied by the variable display of the production pattern (the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern, the second variable production corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern) will be executed. However, there is an abnormality in the special design designation command or special design variation pattern designation command (the relationship between loss and jackpot does not match, the type of special design indicated by MODE in the command does not match, the DATA side of the command is damaged If the command is changed to an impossible content, etc.), the command will be invalid and the variable effect will not be executed. In addition, the special design designation command and the special design variation pattern designation command have not been received normally (the special design designation command is not received within a predetermined time after receiving the special design designation command, the special design designation command is received Even if it receives a special figure variation pattern designation command, etc.), the command is invalidated and the variation effect is not executed. In the following description, the case where the command is abnormal and the case where the command is not received normally are referred to as "command abnormality".

In step E700, the sub CPU 130a carries out a general/universal electric presentation process. Specifically, referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, the normal design designation command, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern designation command, the normal pattern stop designation command, the opening designation command for winning, and the ending designation command for winning, etc. are received. It determines whether or not the command is present, and performs processing for executing an effect corresponding to the received command when the command is received.

In step E800, the sub CPU 130a performs effect mode update processing. Specifically, the production mode (production stage) in which the production elements (background image, production image, production sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc. are defined is updated. It is determined whether or not the conditions (change in game state, win of mode update lottery, execution of SP/SPSP ready-to-win performance where the result is lost, etc.) are satisfied, and if the update condition is satisfied, the performance mode is changed to multiple performances. Perform processing to update to one of the modes.

"Production mode" is production mode A to C set in the normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state), production mode D to E set in the probability variable game state (high probability short-time game state), and time saving There is provided an effect mode F that is set in the game state (low-probability short-time game state). It should be noted that when the power is turned on and the normal game state is controlled (for example, after changing the settings, after clearing the RWM, after confirming the settings, etc.), the effect mode that is set first is always the effect mode A, and the power is turned on. The performance mode that is set first when controlled to the variable probability game state at the time of ON is always the performance mode D, and the performance mode that is first set when controlled to the time-saving game state at the time of power ON. is always in production mode F.

In addition, in the production modes A to C, the production pattern 70a is composed of numbers (identification characters) + characters corresponding to the numbers (decoration part) + pattern effect images (decoration part) that decorate the background of the numbers and characters, Designs of numbers and characters are different between production modes. In the production modes D to G, the production pattern 70a is composed only of numbers (identification characters), and the design of the numbers is common among the production modes. Also, in the production modes A to G, the background image corresponding to each production mode scrolls left and right (reciprocating motion).

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command has been received, and if received, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error designation command is performed. and end the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation designation command.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E900. Specifically, a process of outputting a signal such as predetermined data and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150 is performed.

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

(Customer waiting effect processing of the effect control unit)
The customer waiting effect processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the customer waiting effect processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E300-1. If the customer waiting state designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step E300-4, and if the customer waiting state designation command has been received, in step E300-2, until the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect. selects the demonstration waiting time determination table (see FIG. 16) for determining the waiting time of Details of the demonstration standby time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the demonstration standby time and sets the demonstration standby timer. Specifically, referring to the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 16, one demonstration standby time is determined from a plurality of demonstration standby times based on the current gaming state and current state.

In step E300-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demonstration is on standby. Specifically, it is determined whether the demonstration standby timer is set. If it is not on standby for a demonstration, the current customer waiting effect processing is terminated assuming that the customer waiting demonstration effect is not executed, and if it is on standby for a demonstration, the demonstration standby timer is updated by -1 in step E300-5. .

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demonstration standby timer=0 in step E300-6. If the demo standby timer is not equal to 0, the customer waiting demonstration effect is not yet executed, and the current customer waiting effect processing is terminated. The command is set in the transmission buffer, and the present customer waiting effect processing is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting demonstration effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the customer waiting demonstration effect for appealing to the player to play the game is executed.

(Demonstration waiting time determination table)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a demonstration waiting time determination table referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect.

The game state, the current state, and the selected demo waiting time are associated with each other in the demonstration waiting time determination table shown in FIG. There are 4 types of demo standby time from 30 seconds to 80 seconds for the normal game mode, and 4 types of demo standby time from 35 seconds to 85 seconds for the specific game mode. is set.

A first feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. Demonstration standby time after is displayed statically, demonstration standby time after the variable display of the production pattern is finished (variation time has passed) and the production design is statically displayed, and production design after the end of the customer waiting demo production is different from the demonstration standby time after is displayed still. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the current state, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

A second feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the demonstration standby time after the time has passed and the production pattern is statically displayed is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

A third feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the demonstration standby time after static display of the effect pattern on the image display device immediately after is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

A fourth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the demo standby time after the design is statically displayed is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

A fifth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 16 is that the demonstration standby time after the performance symbol is statically displayed after the end of the customer waiting demonstration performance is the shortest. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the appeal of the game to the player, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

As the sixth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

(Prefetching effect processing of the effect control unit)
The look-ahead effect processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the look-ahead effect processing in the effect control section 130m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect and the effect mode of the icon change effect. The details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E520, the sub CPU 130a executes the icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process (changes the display mode of the already displayed pending icon or the icon). Execute processing. The details of the icon change effect execution process will be described later.

In step E530, the sub CPU 130a performs continuous announcement effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, the effect mode of the continuous announcement effect, and the like. The details of the continuous announcement effect determination process will be described later.

In step E540, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous announcement effect execution process for executing the continuous announcement effect determined to be executed in the continuous announcement effect determination process. The details of the continuous announcement effect determination process will be described later.

In step E550, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process for executing a lamp change effect (lighting the winning entrance lamp NR so as to have a light emission mode corresponding to the icon whose display mode has changed). Terminate the look-ahead effect processing. The details of the ramp change effect execution process will be described later.

(Icon change effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect determination processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing icon change effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E510-1. If the prefetch designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E510-2, and if the prefetch designation command has not been received, the current icon change effect determination process is terminated.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received pre-reading designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is during the icon change effect executable period, the process moves to step E510-4, and if it is not the icon change effect executable period, the process moves to step E510-7.

The "executable period of the icon change effect" is a case where the jackpot game is not being executed, the icon change effect is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. Any one of the above three conditions, or only two conditions may be provided. Also, if the received prefetch designation command is based on the winning of the first starting port 45, the game state is normal, and the received prefetching designation command is based on the winning of the second start port 47. In the case, it may be provided that it is in a specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state).

In step E510-4, sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determination random value for determining the final display mode of an icon to be additionally displayed on first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-5. , selects an icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 19) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the final display mode of the icon in step E510-6. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. One icon final display mode is determined from among the icon final display modes.

In step E510-7, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is the display mode (special icon) for executing the icon change effect. If it is the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-9, and if it is not the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-12.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a selects the change scenario determination table (see FIG. 17) for determining the change scenario of the icon change effect. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the pending icon to the disappearance thereof.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 17, a plurality of One change scenario is determined from among the change scenarios.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and selects the icon of the winning icon. The display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination processing is terminated. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , a predetermined sound effect is output.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the suspended icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), A predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the final icon display mode.

In the icon final display mode determination table, the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the icon final display mode to be selected are associated with each other. The type of notification sound when the icon is generated for each type is described.

The final icon display mode includes a white icon as a normal icon, and a blue icon, a red icon, and a rainbow icon as special icons that indicate the possibility of a big win (a big win game is executed). It is

The degree of expectation for winning a big win related to the special icon increases in the order of (white icon<) blue icon<red icon<rainbow icon, and the rainbow icon is an icon that confirms a big win.

Then, when the white icon is displayed on the image display device, the first generated notification sound is output, when the blue icon is displayed, the second generated notification sound is output, and when the red icon is displayed, , the third generated notification sound is output, and when the rainbow icon is displayed, the fourth generated notification sound is output.

Here, as a main feature of the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 19, the selection rate of the final icon display mode is varied according to the planned variation pattern. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the scheduled variation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, the special icon is selected at a higher rate than when the scheduled variation pattern is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not result in reach. It seems to be

In the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 19, the normal icon (white icon) is not selected as the final icon display mode in the case of a big win, but it may be selected. .

In the present embodiment, different notification sounds are set for a plurality of icon display modes (four types). There may be two types of change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow icon, or when the white icon is generated, the notification sound is not output, and the notification sound is output only when the icon changes in one of the modes. may Also, for the rainbow icon that is determined to be a big hit, a dedicated notification sound may be provided to provide three types.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table referred to when determining a change scenario.

In the change scenario determination table, the final display mode of the icon, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected are associated. The advance change in each change scenario and the update mode of the icon in the change are described.

"Advance variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specified command. "The variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the change (the icon change effect is executed). Scenarios (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and icon display modes change during execution of prior variation (suspended icon change effect is executed) but do not change during execution of the change (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, scenario 02, etc.) that are not executed), and icon display modes change during execution of prior variation and during execution of the variation (suspended icon change effect and icon change effect are executed ) scenarios (for example, scenario 15, etc.) are set.

In addition, in the change scenario determination table of the present embodiment, the scenario in which the display mode of the icon is changed is determined regardless of whether or not the ready-to-win effect (it may be a ready-to-reach effect other than the normal reach effect) is executed in the advance change. However, the display mode of the icon is changed according to a change scenario determination table in which whether or not a ready-to-win effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot game being executed in advance fluctuation is executed is a determination factor. You may make it determine the scenario to which it makes. When such a change scenario determination table is used, there is no change in the display mode of the icon during the execution of the advance variation in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the icon display mode does not change during the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. It is preferable to set various scenarios so that changes in the display mode occur. In addition, a change in the display mode of the icon occurs during the execution of the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is executed and the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. Various scenarios may be set so that the change in the display mode of the icon occurs at a higher rate during the execution of the advance variation in which the change is not executed.

(Icon change effect execution processing of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect execution processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing icon change effect execution processing in the effect control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a special figure variation pattern designation command from the main control board 110 in step E520-1. When the special figure variation pattern specification command is received, the process is moved to step E520-2, and when the special figure variation pattern specification command is not received, the current icon change effect execution processing is terminated.

In step E520-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. Determine whether there is an icon. If there is a pending icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-4, and if there is no pending icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-7.

In step E520-4, sub CPU 130a selects the change pattern determination table for pending icon (see FIG. 22) for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the pending icon to be changed. The details of the pending icon change pattern determination table will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines a pending icon change pattern in step E520-5. Specifically, referring to the pending icon change pattern determination table shown in FIG. , determines one pending icon change pattern.

In step E520-6, sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined pending icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and displayed on the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the pending icon change pattern and the change stage of the change timing. The display mode of the on-hold icon is changed, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) is output.

In step E520-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a scenario (change scenario, non-change scenario) of the icon is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the scenario of the icon is stored, the process moves to step E520-8, and if the scenario of the icon is not stored, the scenario is cleared from the prefetch information storage area. The scenario is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area due to the inability to normally receive the winning command (special figure hold number designation command as a winning signal, look-ahead designation command) associated with winning a prize Step assuming that a command error has occurred Processing is transferred to E520-11.

In step E520-8, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). If there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process proceeds to step E520-9, and if there is no icon whose display mode is to be changed, the current icon change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E520-9, the sub CPU 130a selects from among a plurality of change pattern determination tables for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed, the A change pattern determination table (see FIG. 23) for the icon is selected according to the change stage in which the icon changes. Details of the change pattern determination table for the icon corresponding to the change stage will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-10. Specifically, referring to the change pattern determination table for the selected icon, a plurality of the icons are selected based on the mode of change of the icon in the current variation effect and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern. One icon change pattern is determined from the change patterns.

In step E520-11, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect as compensation for the icon change effect that may not have been executed due to power restoration or command abnormality. Select the corresponding icon change pattern determination table (FIG. 24) for The details of the icon change pattern determination table for abnormal conditions will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-12. Specifically, referring to the icon change pattern determination table for the selected abnormality, based on the variation pattern indicated by this special figure variation pattern specification command and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, One icon change pattern is determined from the plurality of icon change patterns, and the final display mode of the icon is also determined.

Sub CPU 130a determines in step E520-13 whether or not the icon change pattern is a change pattern that changes the display mode of the icon. If it is a changing pattern, the process proceeds to step E520-14, and if it is not a changing pattern (it is a non-changing pattern), the current icon change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E520-14, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect execution process. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and displayed on the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage of the change timing. The display mode of the icon that is displayed changes, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) is output.

As described above, according to the icon change effect execution process shown in FIG. 21, when the power supply is restored or a command error (prefetching designation command is not received, etc.) occurs, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) may be executed again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction associated with the icon change effect not being executed due to the restoration of the power source or the occurrence of command abnormality, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, according to the icon change effect execution processing shown in FIG. 21, the icon change effect is executed again in the fluctuation effect newly started after the power is restored (the special icon was changed to the special icon by the suspended icon change effect, but the normal icon is displayed by the power recovery). Even if the icon change effect is executed for the icon that has returned to the icon), the change scenario before the power restoration ( It is not executed from the continuation of the stage that was suggested before the power supply was stopped. Therefore, it is possible to execute an icon change effect in accordance with the contents of the current variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the power supply is restored or the command abnormality occurs during the execution of the icon change effect, the suspended memory (special figure The icon change effect is not executed in the variable effect corresponding to the pending memory (special figure determination information) before the judgment information), and the icon change effect is performed in the variable effect corresponding to the pending memory that triggered the execution of the icon change effect. It may be executable.

(Change pattern determination table for hold icon)
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for pending icons referred to when determining a change pattern for pending icons.

The pending icon change pattern determination table is associated with the mode of pending icon change in the current variable effect, the selection rate (%) of each pending icon change pattern, and the pending icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the pending icon change effect generation timing and change stages in each pending icon change pattern are described.

As for the hold icon change pattern, normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shift-displayed (at the start of fluctuation) in response to the disappearance of the icon. , a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes while fluctuating with the output of a sound effect, and when a character appears, an action effect that acts on the icon is performed with the character as the starting point, and the icon is displayed. A character effect change pattern 01 in which the mode changes and a change notification pattern indicating that the display mode of the icon changes as a result of the variable effect are temporarily stopped and displayed, and an effect effect acting on the reserved icon starting from the change notification pattern. is set to change the display mode of the pending icon.

The change effect generation timing of the pending icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable effect, and when the variable effect is started (at the start of the variable effect), during the execution of the variable effect (during fluctuation), and the effect pattern When 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

In the stage of change of the pending icon, there is a 1UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a blue icon, or a change from a blue icon to a red icon) in which the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot changes to a display mode one level higher, and a degree of expectation for winning a jackpot. 2UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a red icon) is set to change the display mode to a two-step higher display mode.

Although the above-described three timings are used as the timings for generating the change effect of the pending icon, the timings are not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it is possible to provide a state during execution of a variable effect until a reach is established (during fluctuation), during execution of a normal reach, during execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the icon to be referenced when determining the change pattern of the icon. FIG. FIG. 23B is a table to be referred to when changing the display mode of the icon by two stages.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of change of the icon in the current variable effect, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the change effect generation timing and change stage of the icon in each icon change pattern are described.

The icon change patterns include a normal change pattern 01 in which the display state of the hold icon changes at the start of fluctuation accompanied by the output of a sound effect, and a normal change pattern 01 in which the display state of the hold icon changes during fluctuation accompanied by the output of a sound effect. There are set a change pattern 02 and a character action change pattern 01 in which when a character appears, an action effect acting on the icon is performed with the character as a starting point, and the display mode of the icon changes.

The timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon is classified in relation to the state of progress of the change effect. When 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

The change stage of the icon includes a 1UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a blue icon, a change from a blue icon to a red icon) in which the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot is changed to a display mode one step higher, and a degree of expectation for winning a jackpot. 2UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a red icon, a change from a blue icon to a rainbow icon, etc.) is set to change the display mode two steps higher.

Although the pattern effect change pattern 01 is not selected in the change pattern determination table for the icon of the present embodiment, it may be selected. For example, in the variation effect for performing the pseudo-continuous effect, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed when the effect symbol 70a before the pseudo-variation is temporarily stopped and displayed.

"Pseudo continuous effect" is a variable display of the effect pattern as if it were multiple times for the big hit determination based on the winning (entering the ball) to the starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) once. In order to make it look as if it was executed, all within the special figure fluctuation time determined for winning (entering the ball) to one starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) It is a variable display of a special effect design in which a re-variation display for starting a change again after the effect design 70a is temporarily stopped is executed once or a plurality of times.

Although the above-mentioned two timings are used as the timings for generating the change effect of the icon, the timings are not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it is possible to provide a state during execution of a variable effect until a reach is established (during fluctuation), during execution of a normal reach, during execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Relevant icon change pattern determination table for abnormal times)
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an icon change pattern determination table for an abnormal situation, which is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon.

In the icon change pattern determination table for abnormal times, the change pattern indicated by the special figure change pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of the icon change pattern, the icon change pattern to be selected, and the icon to be selected , and for reference, the change effect generation timing and change stage of the icon in each icon change pattern are described.

Note that the icon change pattern includes a non-change pattern in which the icon change effect is not executed. Since it is the same as that explained in the change pattern determination table for icon, the explanation here is omitted.

(Continuous notice effect determination processing of effect control unit)
Continuous advance notice effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing continuous announcement effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E530-1. When the prefetching designation command is received, the processing is shifted to step E530-2, and when the prefetching designation command is not received, the current continuous announcement effect determination processing is ended.

In step E530-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E530-3, it is determined whether or not the current period is the period during which the continuous announcement effect can be executed. If it is the period during which the continuous notice effect (prefetching action effect, the prefetch effect effect, the prefetch vibration effect, the prefetch zone effect) can be executed, the process is shifted to step E530-4, and if the continuous notice effect is not executable, , the process proceeds to step E530-16 assuming that the continuous announcement effect based on the prefetch designation command received this time is not executed.

In the "predictive action effect", a special game is executed by executing an actuation effect (announcement effect) for operating the second movable member 74 in a predetermined manner at the timing immediately after the start of the variable effect in one or more variable effects. It is a production that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation to be.

"Look-ahead effect production" is a special game by executing an effect production (advance production) for displaying an effect image of a predetermined color around the production pattern 70a at the timing immediately after the start of the fluctuation production in one or more fluctuation productions. It is a production that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation that will be executed.

"Forecast vibration effect" is the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by executing a vibration effect (announcement effect) in which the effect button 17 is vibrated in a predetermined manner at the timing immediately after the start of the variable effect in one or more variable effects. It is a production that intermittently suggests.

“Foreseeing zone effect” means continuously suggesting the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by executing a zone effect (notice effect) that displays a zone image from a predetermined timing in one or more variable effects. It is a production to do.

The ``executable period of the continuous notice effect'' means that there is no precedent reservation in which the continuous notice effect is executed, that the jackpot game is not being executed, and that the prefetch designation command based on the winning to the first start port 45 is received. In that case, it is a normal game state, and when a prefetch designation command based on the winning to the second start port 47 is received, it is a specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state) etc. mentioned.

The sub CPU 130a selects the continuous announcement type determination table (see FIGS. 26 and 27) corresponding to the current effect mode in step E530-4, and refers to the continuous announcement type determination table in step E530-5. A notice type (whether or not to execute a continuous notice effect, the type of the continuous notice effect to be executed) is determined. Details of the continuous announcement type determination table will be described later.

In step E530-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is the continuous announcement type for executing the continuous announcement effect. If the continuous announcement effect is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-16, and if the continuous announcement effect is to be executed, in step E530-7, a continuous announcement scenario determination table (Fig. 28 , see FIG. 29). Details of the continuous announcement scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E530-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous announcement type for executing the look-ahead action rendering has been determined. If the look-ahead action effect is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-10, and if the look-ahead action effect is to be executed, the continuous notice scenario determination table is referred to in step E530-9, and the prediction scenario of the look-ahead action effect is determined. is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E530-10 whether or not the continuous announcement type for executing the look-ahead effect rendering has been determined. If the look-ahead effect rendering is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-12, and if the look-ahead effect rendering is to be executed, in step E530-11, the continuous announcement scenario determination table is referred to and the preview scenario for the look-ahead effect rendering is determined. is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous announcement type for executing the anticipatory vibration effect has been determined. If the pre-reading vibration effect is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-14, and if the pre-reading vibration effect is to be executed, in step E530-13, the continuous notice scenario determination table is referred to and the pre-reading vibration effect notice scenario is determined. is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E530-14 whether or not the continuous announcement type for executing the look-ahead zone effect has been determined. If the look-ahead zone effect is not to be executed, the current continuous notice effect determination processing is terminated. If the look-ahead zone effect is to be executed, the continuous notice scenario determination table is referred to in step E530-15 to determine the look-ahead zone effect. The announcement scenario is determined and set in the pre-reading information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and the current continuous announcement effect determination processing is terminated.

In step E530-16, the sub CPU 130a determines the non-notice scenario of the continuous announcement effect (notice scenario indicating that the continuous announcement effect is not executed), sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and sets the current continuous announcement effect. End decision processing.

The advance notice scenario or non-advanced scenario set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to in the continuous notice effect execution processing of step E540 described above, and the processing for executing the continuous notice effect or the continuous notice effect is executed. A process will be performed to prevent this.

Thus, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. The second movable member 74 operates (operates) more when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed than when the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed. It's getting easier. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is possible to enhance the production effect related to the variable display (variation production) of the first special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. Vibration performance is more likely to be executed when the variable display (variation performance) of the first special symbol is executed than when the variable display (variation performance) of the special symbol is executed. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is possible to enhance the production effect related to the variable display (variation production) of the first special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. The second movable member 74 is easier to operate (operate) when the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol is executed than when the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol is executed. ing. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the variable display (variation performance) of the second special symbol in the specific game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. Vibration performance is more likely to be executed when the second special symbol variable display (variable performance) is executed than when the special symbol variable display (variable performance) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the variable display (variation performance) of the second special symbol in the specific game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Continuous notice type determination table)
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a continuous notice type determination table referred to for determining the continuous notice type in production modes A to C (normal game state), and FIG. ) is a diagram showing a continuous announcement effect determination table referred to in order to determine the continuous announcement type.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the continuous announcement type determination table is associated with the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each continuous announcement type, and the selected continuous announcement type. , The continuous notice type includes "non-execution" that does not execute the continuous notice effect, "prefetching action effect", "prefetching effect effect", and "prefetching vibration effect" that executes one of a plurality of types of continuous notice effects. , ``read-ahead zone presentation'', and ``read-ahead effect presentation & look-ahead vibration presentation'' and ``read-ahead motion presentation & look-ahead zone presentation'' in which two kinds of a plurality of kinds of continuous announcement performances are executed are provided.

For example, if the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern) is a loss and the SP reach effect is executed, 85% determines "non-execution", 5% determines "look-ahead effect effect", 4% decides "look-ahead action effect", 3% decides "look-ahead vibration effect", 2% decides "look-ahead zone effect", 1% decides "look-ahead effect effect & look-ahead vibration effect" be done.

(Consecutive notice production scenario decision table)
FIG. 28 shows a continuous announcement scenario determination table for production modes A to C (normal game state), and FIG. 29 shows a continuous announcement scenario determination table for production modes D to G (specific game state). It is a diagram.

In the continuous notice scenario decision table, the number of reserved special symbols, the prefetch designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each notice scenario, and the notice scenario to be selected are associated. The prior fluctuations (before 4 fluctuations, before 3 fluctuations, before 2 fluctuations, before 1 fluctuation), and the production mode of the continuous advance notice production in the fluctuations are described.

"Advance variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specified command. "The variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

The “weak notice” has different effects depending on the type of continuous notice, and in the case of the look-ahead action effect, the second movable member 74 performs a weak action by emitting light in blue, and a weak action effect sound is output. In the case of the look-ahead effect production, a blue effect image is displayed around the production pattern 70a, and the blue effect sound is output. In the case of the look-ahead vibration production, the production button The vibrator for vibrating 17 weakly vibrates for one second and the production button 17 blinks in white, and in the case of the look-ahead zone production, a blue zone image is displayed and a zone effect sound is output. It is to be done.

The "strong notice" has different effects depending on the type of continuous notice, and in the case of the look-ahead action effect, the second movable member 74 performs a strong action by emitting red light, and a strong action effect sound is output. In the case of the look-ahead effect production, a red effect image is displayed around the production pattern 70a, and the red effect sound is output.In the case of the look-ahead vibration production, the production button The vibrator for vibrating the 17 strongly vibrates for only 3 seconds, and the effect button 17 flashes red. In the case of the look-ahead zone effect, a red heat zone image is displayed and a heat zone sound effect is displayed. is output.

The continuous notice production scenario includes a scenario in which a weak notice and a strong notice are not executed during the advance change and a weak notice or a strong notice is executed during the change (for example, scenario 11), and a scenario during the change and the change. A scenario (for example, scenario 22) in which a weak notice or a strong notice is executed is set therein.

As a first feature of the various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. However, there is a point that the expectation of the jackpot is high. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

As a second feature of various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. The point is that the continuous advance notice effect is likely to be executed (the execution ratio is high), that is, the degree of expectation for the big win is low when the continuous notice effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

Instead of differentiating the execution ratio of the continuous announcement effect between the production modes A to C and the production modes D to G, for example, the continuous announcement production is executed more in the production mode B than in the production mode A. For example, the performance mode E may make it easier to execute the continuous announcement performance than the performance mode D. For example, the execution ratio of the continuous announcement effect may be changed between the effect modes D to G. By doing so, the degree of expectation for the big win of the continuous advance notice effect changes between the effect modes, so it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a third feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. Also, in the production modes D to G (specific game state), when the normal reach production is scheduled to be executed (prefetch result), the continuous notice production (here, the prefetch effect production, the prefetch operation production) is more likely to be executed. points. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation production from becoming monotonous in the specific game state in which the (super) shortened fluctuation tends to be more frequent than in the production modes A to C (normal game state), thereby improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

As a fourth feature of various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. Than, in the production mode D ~ G (specific game state), if the SP reach production is scheduled to be executed (read-ahead result), continuous notice production (here look-ahead effect production, look-ahead operation production, look-ahead zone production) can be easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation production from becoming monotonous in the specific game state in which the (super) shortened fluctuation tends to be more frequent than in the production modes A to C (normal game state), thereby improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

As a fifth feature of various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. Than, in the production mode D ~ G (specific game state), if the SPSP reach production is scheduled to be executed (prefetching result), continuous notice production (here, prefetching effect production, prefetching operation production, prefetching zone production) can be easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation production from becoming monotonous in the specific game state, which tends to have more super-shortening fluctuations than in the production modes A to C (normal game state), and to improve the interest of the game. Become.

As the sixth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), the full rotation ready-to-win effect is scheduled to be executed (forecast result). In the production mode D ~ G (specific game state) than the case, continuous notice production (here, look-ahead operation production, look-ahead zone production) in the case where all rotation reach production is scheduled to be executed (read-ahead result) is easy to execute. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation production from becoming monotonous in the specific game state, which tends to have more super-shortening fluctuations than in the production modes A to C (normal game state), and to improve the interest of the game. Become.

As the seventh feature of various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, production modes A to C (normal game state) are more Prefetching vibration production (vibration production not accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17 or the display of the operation promotion image) is likely to be executed (high execution ratio = different degree of expectation for big win). Therefore, in the performance modes A to C (normal game state) in which the stay period is likely to be longer than in the performance modes D to G (specific game state), the player can easily experience the anticipatory vibration performance, thereby making the game interesting. can be improved. In addition, in production modes D to G (specific game states), in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shorter than in production modes A to C (normal game states), it is possible to add rarity to the anticipatory vibration effects, thereby improving the interest of the game. It is possible to

Note that the performance modes D to G may be easier to execute the look-ahead vibration performance (execution rate may be higher) than the performance modes A to C. In addition, in the normal game state, the performance mode A makes it easier to execute the look-ahead continuous performance than the performance mode B or C, so that the execution ratio of the look-ahead vibration performance is increased between the performance modes A to C. It may be different, and if it is a specific game state, it is easier to execute the anticipation vibration effect in the effect mode D than in the effect mode E to G, so that the anticipation vibration is performed between the effect modes D to G. You may vary the execution ratio of production|presentation. By doing so, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for a big win when the anticipatory vibration effect is executed between the effect modes, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the eighth feature of various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, specific reach effects (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) ) is scheduled to be executed (prefetch result), in production modes D to G (specific game state), a specific reach production (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production) is scheduled to be executed ( A look-ahead result) is more difficult to execute the look-ahead vibration effect (execution rate is low). Therefore, in production modes D to G (specific game state), where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than in production modes A to C (normal game state), it is possible to make the look-ahead vibration effect rarer and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to

As the ninth feature of various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are more One of the points is that the look-ahead action effect is easily executed (execution rate is high). Therefore, in production modes D to G (specific game state), where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than in production modes A to C (normal game state), it is possible to make the look-ahead vibration effect rarer and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to

As a tenth feature of various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. Than, when the continuous notice effect that ends with one fluctuation effect in the effect mode D to G (specific game state) is executed, the reach effect (normal reach effect , SP reach effect, SP SP reach effect) are difficult to execute (performed rate is low). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the eleventh feature of various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. Than, when the continuous notice effect that ends with two fluctuation effects in production modes A to C (normal game state) is executed, the reach effect (normal reach effect , SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) can be easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a twelfth feature of the various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. In production modes D to G (specific game state), the continuous notice effect of only one variable effect is performed than when the continuous notice effect of only one variable effect is executed in modes A to C (normal game state). When it is executed, the ready-to-win effect (normal ready-to-win effect, SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect) is less likely to be executed in the variable effect that is the target of the announcement of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the thirteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. , In production modes A to C (normal game state), when the continuous notice effect over 3 times of fluctuation effects is executed, the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect) , SPSP ready-to-win effects) are likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a 14th feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, in the production modes A to C (normal game state) , In the production mode D ~ G (specific game state), when the continuous notice effect over three times of the fluctuation effect is executed, the reach effect with high expectations for the big hit in the fluctuation effect that is the target of the notice of the continuous notice effect (for example , SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) can be easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the fifteenth feature of various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. (Second movable member 74) can be used to execute the look-ahead action effect, but the look-ahead action effect can be performed in production modes A to C (normal game state) and production modes D to G (specific game state). There is a difference in the degree of expectation of the jackpot when executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 16th feature of various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. In this case, the ratio (100%) of operating the second movable member 74, which is not used in the final effect, is higher than the ratio (0%) of operating the first movable member 73, which is used in the final effect, which will be described later. is mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding that a big win has occurred just because the look-ahead action effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the first movable member 73 may be operated instead of the second movable member 74 in the strong advance notice of the look-ahead motion effect. Even in this case, when executing the look-ahead action effect in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the ratio of operating the first movable member 73 , the ratio of operating the second movable member 74 should be higher.

As the 17th feature of various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. In this case, the ratio (0%) of the production button 17 in the normal state is higher than the ratio (0%) of the production button 17 in the protruded state. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the effect button 17 projecting (projecting only in a decided effect, which will be described later), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the strong notice of the anticipatory vibration effect, the effect button 17 may be vibrated in a protruding state instead of being vibrated in the normal state. Even in this case, when executing the look-ahead vibration effect in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state), the ratio of the effect button 17 to the projecting state , the ratio of the normal state should be higher.

As the eighteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. high-speed fluctuation period), a weak notice of the look-ahead action production (weak action of the first movable member 73 + blue light emission) and a weak notice of the look-ahead effect production (display of a blue effect image around the production pattern 70a) are executed. The degree of expectation for the big win is higher when the weak notice of the look-ahead vibration effect (weak vibration of the effect button 17 for 1 second) executed without displaying the operation promotion image is executed than when the operation prompting image is displayed. is mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player by using the operation means that the player can operate, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 19th feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. During the high-speed fluctuation period), strong notice of the look-ahead action production (strong action of the first movable member 73 + red light emission) and strong notice of the look-ahead effect production (display of a red effect image around the production pattern 70a) are executed. When the strong notice of the look-ahead vibration effect (strong vibration of the effect button 17 for 3 seconds) is executed, the expectation of the big win is higher than when the game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player by using the operation means that the player can operate, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Continuous notice effect execution processing of effect control unit)
Continuous advance notice effect execution processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing continuous advance notice effect execution processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a special figure variation pattern designation command from the main control board 110 in step E540-1. When the special figure variation pattern designation command is received, the process is moved to step E540-2, and when the special figure variation pattern designation command is not received, the current continuous notice performance execution processing is terminated.

In step E540-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the announcement scenario of the continuous announcement effects (prefetching action effect, prefetch effect effect, prefetch vibration effect, prefetch zone effect) stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. At E540-3, it is determined whether or not the advance notice scenario of the continuous advance notice effect is stored. If the advance notice scenario is stored, the process proceeds to step E540-4. If the advance notice scenario is not stored, the scenario is cleared from the look-ahead information storage area. As a time signal, the special figure pending number designation command, prefetch designation command) cannot be received normally, so the scenario is not stored in the prefetch information storage area.

In step E540-4, the sub CPU 130a determines the notice pattern (type of continuous notice effect, weak notice, strong notice) to be executed in the current variable effect according to the notice scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. Then, in step E540-5, a continuous announcement effect command corresponding to the determined announcement pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the continuous announcement effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the continuous announcement effect corresponding to the determined announcement pattern is executed. When this process ends, the current continuous announcement effect execution process ends.

In step E540-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute the alternative notice effect as compensation for the continuous notice effect that may not be executed due to the power restoration or the occurrence of the command abnormality. A determination table (see FIG. 31) is selected to determine an advance notice pattern. Specifically, referring to the selected alternative notice pattern determination table, one alternative notice pattern is selected from among multiple alternative notice patterns based on the selection rate (%) of this variable effect pattern and each alternative notice pattern. decide. The details of the alternative notice pattern determination table will be described later.

"Alternative notice effect" is a effect to compensate for the continuous notice effect that may not be executed due to the power supply restoration or the occurrence of a command abnormality, and the image display device shows which of the multiple mini characters with different expectations for big wins. It is a kind of advance notice effect that makes the player expect that a big win game will be executed by displaying .

In step E540-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined alternative notice pattern is for executing the alternative notice effect. If the alternative notice effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to step E540-8, and if the alternative notice effect is not to be executed, the current continuous notice effect execution process is terminated.

In step E540-8, the sub CPU 130a sets an alternative notice effect command corresponding to the alternative notice pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the alternative notice effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the alternative notice effect is executed.

According to the continuous notice effect execution process shown in FIG. 30, when the effect scenario of the continuous notice effect is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area due to the power supply recovery or the occurrence of a command error (such as failure to fetch the look-ahead designation command), the process starts from now. It is possible to execute an alternative notice effect different from the continuous notice effect without executing the continuous notice effect in the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction associated with not executing the continuous announcement performance due to the restoration of the power supply or the occurrence of command abnormality, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice effect execution processing shown in FIG. 30, when the power supply recovery (power failure) occurs during execution of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect is not restarted in the variable effect started after the power recovery. In addition, it is possible to execute an alternative notice effect different from the continuous notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the continuous announcement effect due to the occurrence of power restoration (power failure), and to improve the interest of the game.

(Alternative notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an alternative notice pattern determination table referred to when deciding an alternative notice pattern.

The alternative notice pattern determination table is associated with the type of variation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command, the selection rate (%) of each alternative notice pattern, and the selected alternative notice pattern. The effect mode in the alternative notice pattern is described.

The alternative notice patterns include a pattern 00 in which no alternative notice effect is executed, a pattern 01 in which the mini character A is displayed on the image display device, a pattern 02 in which the mini character B is displayed on the image display device, and a mini character C is displayed on the image display device. A pattern 03 is set in which a mini-character D is displayed on the image display device.

The degree of expectation for winning a big win related to mini-characters is higher in the order of mini-character A<mini-character B<mini-character C<mini-character D, and mini-character D is a mini-character that is sure to win a big win.

A first feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 31 is that an alternative notice effect is executed in a variation pattern with a high expectation of winning a jackpot rather than a variation pattern with a low expectation of winning a jackpot. One reason is that the pattern is easily determined. Therefore, the more likely the continuous announcement effect was executed before the power supply was restored or the command abnormality occurred, the more likely the alternative announcement effect was executed, thereby reducing the dissatisfaction associated with the termination of the continuous announcement effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a second feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 31, the case where the variable effect corresponding to the suspension that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect is executed is the execution trigger of the continuous notice effect. The alternative notice pattern for executing the alternative notice performance is more likely to be determined than when the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that does not trigger the execution of the continuous notice performance prior to the suspension is executed. Therefore, after the power supply is restored or the command abnormality occurs, it becomes easy to grasp which variable performance is the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that triggered the execution of the continuous notice performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

In addition, in the variable effect that is executed after the power supply is restored or the command abnormality occurs, it is decided whether or not to execute the big hit notice effect (dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, etc.), which will be described later. Alternatively, the alternative notice performance may not be executed by increasing the execution probability of the big hit notice performance more than usual.

Even in this case, the case where the variable effect corresponding to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect is executed is the execution trigger of the continuous notice effect before the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect. It is preferable to make it easier to execute the big hit announcement performance than when the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that is not set is executed. In this way, after the power supply is restored or the command abnormality occurs, it becomes easy to grasp which variable performance is the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that triggered the execution of the continuous notice performance, and the interest in the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

(Lamp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit)
The lamp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing a lamp change effect execution process in the effect control section 130m.

In step E550-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not an icon change scenario is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the icon change scenario is stored, the process proceeds to step E550-2 assuming that the icon change effect is to be executed. The scenario is not stored in the pre-reading information storage area due to power recovery or winning command (special figure hold number designation command as winning signal, pre-reading designation command) can not be received normally Command abnormality has occurred. The process moves to step E550-6.

In step E550-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is time to change the icon. If it is the icon change timing, the process proceeds to step E550-3, and if it is not the icon change timing, the current lamp change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E550-3, the sub CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command corresponding to the color after the icon change in the transmission buffer. As a result, a lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and the lamp change effect is executed by changing the light emission mode (light emission color, lighting/blinking) of the prize winning entrance lamp NR corresponding to the color change of the icon. It will be.

In step E550-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag indicating that the lamp changing effect is being executed is set in the sub RAM 130c. When the ramp changing flag is set, the current ramp changing effect execution processing is terminated, and when the ramp changing flag is not set, the ramp changing flag is set and the ramp changing effect is executed this time. End the execution process.

In step E550-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process proceeds to step E550-7, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the current ramp change effect execution process is terminated.

At step E550-7, the sub CPU 130a clears the lamp changing flag set in the sub RAM 130c, at step E550-8 sets a ramp effect end command in the transmission buffer, and executes the current ramp change effect execution process. finish. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and the lamp change effect being executed is terminated.

As described above, according to the lamp change effect execution processing shown in FIG. It is designed to perform a performance. Therefore, synergistic effect with the icon change effect can enhance the performance effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 32, unlike the icon change effect and the continuous advance notice effect, even if the power is restored during the execution of the lamp change effect, the lamp change effect is executed again. or not to execute the alternative notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to secure the rarity of the lamp change effect while reducing the control burden, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when power restoration occurs like the icon change production, the lamp change production may be executed again in the fluctuation production started after the power is restored. In this case, it is preferable to execute the lamp change effect so as to correspond to the icon change effect that starts after the power is restored.

Further, instead of executing the lamp change performance corresponding to the icon change performance, the final light emission mode of the winning entrance lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the previous change to the relevant change, etc. are determined by lottery, and the lamp change performance is executed. You may do so.

(Variation production pattern determination processing of production control unit)
Fluctuation effect pattern determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the jackpot announcement effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m, and this process is executed in the above-described special figure special electric effect process.

First, in step E610-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received variation pattern designation command, and in step E610-2 selects a variation pattern determination table (FIGS. 34 and 35) corresponding to the current presentation mode. . The details of the variation effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E610-3, the sub CPU 130a refers to the selected variable effect pattern determination table, determines one variable effect pattern from a plurality of variable effect patterns, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E610-4, the sub CPU 130a sets the variable effect pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and terminates the current variable effect pattern determination process. As a result, the variable effect pattern instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed.

(Variation production pattern judgment table)
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a variable effect pattern determination table for the effect modes A to C referred to for determining the variable effect pattern in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), and FIG. It is a diagram showing a variable effect pattern determination table for the effect modes D~G (specific game state) referred to in order to determine the variable effect pattern in D~G.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the variable effect pattern determination table is associated with a special figure variable pattern designation command, a selection rate (%) of each variable effect pattern, and a selected variable effect pattern. , the effect configuration in each variable effect pattern is described.

"Variation" in the column of effect configuration indicates that the normal variable display is executed in which the ready-to-win state by the effect pattern 70a is not formed.
"Shortened variation" indicates that a shortened variation display is performed in which the reach state is not formed for a shorter period of time than the normal variation display.
"L fluctuation" indicates that the long fluctuation display is executed in which the reach state is not formed for a longer time than the normal fluctuation display.

"Pseudo-failure" means that after temporarily stopping the effect symbol 70a during one time of variable display of the special symbol, the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed or not. It shows that a pseudo consecutive failure effect is executed as a result of not being performed.
"Pseudo-success" indicates that after performing an effect inciting whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed, the pseudo-continuous success effect is executed as a result of the pseudo-continuous effect being performed.
“(Variation → Pseudo-success) x 2” is an effect in which a pseudo-continuous success effect is executed as a result of performing a pseudo-continuous effect after performing a stimulating effect to incite whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. is set as one set, and two sets of the effect are performed.
“(Variation → Pseudo-success) x 3” is an effect in which a pseudo-continuous success effect is executed as a result of performing a pseudo-continuous effect after performing a stimulating effect to incite whether or not a pseudo-continuous effect is to be executed. is set as one set, and three sets of the effect are performed.

"N reach" indicates that the above-described normal reach effect is executed.
“N “7” ready-to-win” indicates that the above-described normal ready-to-win effect is executed in a state where the ready-to-win state is formed by the effect symbol 70a of “7”.
"SP reach" indicates that the above-described SP reach effect is executed.
"Special SP reach" indicates that the above-described special SP reach effect is executed.
"SPSP ready-to-win" indicates that the above-described SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed.
"Full rotation reach" indicates that the above-described full rotation reach effect is executed.

"SP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that an SP ready-to-win effect will be executed.
"SPSP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that an SPSP ready-to-win effect will be executed.
“Full spin development” indicates that a development effect suggesting full spin reach is executed.

"CI" indicates that one of a plurality of cut-in effects with different degrees of expectation for big wins is executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period or the elapse of the valid period.
"Decision" indicates that a decision effect suggesting whether or not a jackpot game is to be executed is executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period or the elapse of the effective period.
"Failure" indicates that a determined failure effect suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is executed as a result of the determined effect.
"Success" indicates that a determined success effect suggesting that a jackpot game is performed is executed as a result of the determined effect.

"Loss" means to temporarily stop by forming a losing dot (a mode of displaying a losing dot such as "358" or "948" different from the initial dot to be described later) by means of the production pattern 70a which is composed only of numbers and does not include characters. is shown.
"c symbol loss" means that the performance symbol 70a of the display mode including the character forms a losing dot (a false display mode such as "358" or "948" different from the initial dot to be described later) and temporarily stops. It is shown that.
"IC" indicates that an eye-catching effect is executed in which an eye-catching image suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped is displayed on the image display device.
"Pattern match" means that the game is temporarily stopped after forming a big hit result (a big hit display mode such as "222" or "777") by the effect pattern 70a which does not include characters but only numbers.
"c pattern match" indicates that the game is temporarily stopped after forming a big hit result (big win display mode such as "222" or "777") by the effect pattern 70a of the display mode including characters.

"Re-lottery" refers to whether or not the effect pattern 70a temporarily stopped in the jackpot appearance (jackpot display mode) becomes a jackpot appearance that is advantageous to the player (from the even-numbered production pattern that usually becomes a jackpot to a definite variable jackpot). (whether or not it becomes an odd-numbered performance symbol, or whether or not it becomes a “7” performance symbol for executing the most advantageous jackpot game), then promotion success performance is performed as an advantageous jackpot outcome. , indicates that a re-lottery effect is executed such as a promotion failure effect that does not result in an advantageous jackpot.

"Strong vibration 4 seconds" indicates that a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 4 seconds.
“Strong vibration for 1 second” indicates that a strong vibration effect (big win confirmation vibration effect) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second.

In the fluctuation production pattern determination table for production modes A to C (normal game state) shown in FIG. In this case, the ratio of the ready-to-win effect performed with the even-numbered effect pattern 70a is 70%, and the ratio of the ready-to-win effect performed with the odd-numbered effect pattern 70a other than "7" is 30%.
In the case of special pattern 00 (losing) and variable production patterns 07 to 11 (SP reach production or SPSP reach production), the ratio of reach production performed with even production pattern 70a is 65%, and odd numbers other than "7" 30% of the ready-to-win effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a of "7", and 5% of the ready-to-win effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a of "7".

In the case of the special symbol 01 (normal jackpot) and variable production patterns 12 to 17 (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production), the ratio of the ready-to-win production with the even production pattern 70a is 100%. .
In the case of special pattern 02 (probability variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 18 to 19 (SP reach production), the ratio of reach production performed with even number production pattern 70a is 60%, and odd production patterns other than "7". The ratio of the ready-to-win effect being performed in 70a is 40%.

In the case of the special pattern 02 (probability variable jackpot) and the variable production patterns 20 to 22 (SPSP reach production), the ratio of the reach production to be performed with the even number production pattern 70a is 6%, and the odd number production patterns other than "7". 4% of the ready-to-win production is performed in 70a, and 90% of the ready-to-win production is performed in the effect pattern 70a of "7".
In the case of special pattern 03 (probability variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 12 to 17 (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production), the ratio of reach production to be performed with even production pattern 70a is 60%, "7 , the rate of the ready-to-win effect being performed with the odd-numbered effect pattern 70a other than "" is 40%.

In the case of special symbol 10 (losing) and variable effect patterns 26-27 (special SP ready-to-win effect), the ratio of ready-to-win effect to even-numbered effect pattern 70a is 100%.
In the case of special symbols 04 (normal jackpot) & 05 (probability variable jackpot) and variable performance pattern 27 (special SP ready-to-win performance), the ratio of ready-to-win performance with even-numbered performance symbols 70a is 100%.

In the variable performance pattern determination table for the performance modes D to G (specific game state) shown in FIG. The rate at which the reach effect is performed is 100%.
In the case of special patterns 01 (normal jackpot), 02 (probability variation jackpot), 03 (probability variation jackpot) and variable production pattern 33 (special SP reach production), the proportion of reach production performed with even production pattern 70a is 100%. It has become.

In the case of the special pattern 10 (losing) and the variable production pattern 36 (normal reach production), 38 to 42 (SP reach production, SPSP reach production), the ratio of the reach production to the even number production pattern 70a is 60%. The proportion of the ready-to-win effect performed with the odd-numbered effect pattern 70a other than "7" is 40%.
In the case of the special symbol 04 (normal jackpot) and the fluctuation production patterns 43 to 48 (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production), the ratio of the reach production to the even number production pattern 70a is 100%. .

In the case of special pattern 05 (probability variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 49 to 50 (SP reach production), the ratio of reach production to be performed with even production pattern 70a is 60%, and odd production patterns other than "7". The ratio of the ready-to-win effect being performed in 70a is 40%.
In the case of special pattern 05 (probability variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 51 to 53 (SPSP ready-to-win production), the ratio of reach production to be performed with even-numbered production pattern 70a is 3%, and odd-numbered production patterns other than "7". The ratio of the ready-to-win effect is performed with 70a is 2%, and the ratio of the ready-to-win effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a of "7" is 95%.
In the case of a special pattern 05 (probability variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 54 to 55 (full rotation reach production), the ratio of reach production performed with even number production pattern 70a is 20%, and odd number production other than "7". The proportion of the ready-to-win effect being performed with the pattern 70a is 30%, and the proportion of the ready-to-win effect being performed with the effect pattern 70a of "7" is 50%.

A first feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is that there is an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect pattern 70a is stopped when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed. The point is that it is executed and the display pattern 70a including the character is restored. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with the change of the display mode of the production pattern 70a, and it is possible to suggest in advance that the production pattern 70a will be stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The second feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is that, in the case of a big hit, there is a variable performance pattern in which a winning performance is executed and the symbols are aligned, and a successful determination after the symbols are aligned. The point is that there is a variable effect pattern in which the effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect in the case of a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is that, in the variable performance pattern that results in a big hit, the performance button 17 is pressed for 4 seconds when the performance symbols 70a that do not include characters are aligned. The point is that a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) that strongly vibrates is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A fourth feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is that when the production pattern 70a including the character is pattern-matched (c pattern-matched), the production button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second. Production (jackpot confirmation vibration production) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fifth feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, a reach production (normal reach The ratio of the ready-to-win production with the even-numbered production pattern 70a (the production pattern that usually becomes a big hit by becoming a big hit) is higher than the ratio of the production, SP ready-to-win production, and SPSP ready-to-win production. mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the joy of the player when the odd-numbered performance symbol 70a other than "7" results in a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the sixth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. The ratio of reach production (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production) is lower in the production pattern 70a of "7" (the production pattern that becomes the most advantageous probability variation jackpot by becoming a jackpot). mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the joy of the player when the performance symbol 70a of "7" results in a big win, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the seventh feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the reach production (normal reach Reach production (normal reach production, SP One of the points is that the ratio of reach production, SPSP reach production) to be performed is lower. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the joy of the player when the performance symbol 70a of "7" results in a big win, and to improve the interest of the game.

As an eighth characteristic of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. When the ready-to-win effect is executed with the effect symbol 70a, the expectation for the big hit is higher. Therefore, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player as to which kind of effect pattern the ready-to-win effect is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a ninth feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, production modes D to G (specific game state) are most advantageous than production modes A to C (normal game state). In the case of a variable probability big win, the ready-to-win performance (SPSP ready-to-win performance) is likely to be executed with the performance symbol 70a of "7" (the most advantageous performance symbol to become the most advantageous variable probability big hit by becoming a big win). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the performance modes D to G (specific game state), and to improve the interest of the game.

As a tenth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), even if the ready-to-win effect is executed with the effect pattern 70a of "7", the jackpot is determined. However, in the production modes D to G (specific game state), when the ready-to-win production is executed with the production pattern 70a of "7", the jackpot is determined. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the performance modes D to G (specific game state), and to improve the interest of the game.

Although the ready-to-win performance is always executed in the variable performance pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, a variable performance pattern in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed even if the pseudo-continuous performance is executed may be provided.

Also, if you temporarily stop with a losing result after a cut-in production or a decision failure production, it will be confirmed that you will lose, but after the cut-in production or decision failure production, it will be a big hit. may be executed.

(Jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
Using FIG. 36, the jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the jackpot announcement effect determination processing in the effect control unit 130m. is executed after the process of determining

In step E650-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable effect pattern executed in the current variable effect, and in step E650-2, determines that the jackpot game is executed in the effect period (high-speed fluctuation period) before reach. A pre-reach announcement determination table (FIG. 37) for determining the announcement pattern of the pre-reach announcement effect expected by the player is selected, and the announcement pattern is determined. The details of the pre-reach announcement determination table will be described later.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice effect is to execute the dialogue notice effect. If the dialogue foretelling effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-4, and if the dialogue foretelling effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-6.

"Dialogue advance notice effect" is to generate an effective period during a variable effect (high-speed fluctuation period), and suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit on the image display device according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period or the elapse of the effective time. It is a kind of big hit announcement effect in which a dialogue image is displayed and a sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9.例文帳に追加

In step E650-4, the sub CPU 130a selects the dialog announcement pattern determination table (see FIG. 38) for determining the dialog announcement pattern of the dialog announcement effect, and determines the dialog announcement pattern. Set a speech announcement effect command corresponding to the announcement pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the dialog announcement effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the dialog announcement effect corresponding to the dialog announcement pattern is executed during the fluctuation effect (high-speed fluctuation period). The details of the dialog announcement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice effect is to execute the step-up notice effect. If the step-up notice effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-7, and if the step-up notice effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-9.

The "step-up notice effect" is a plurality of steps from the first step (first stage) to the fifth step (final stage) without generating the effective period of the effect button 17 during the variable effect (high-speed fluctuation period). It is a kind of big-hit advance notice effect in which step effects are executed in a predetermined order until one of the steps (steps) is reached.

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects the step-up notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 39) for determining the step-up notice pattern of the step-up notice effect, and determines the step-up notice pattern. At 8, a step-up notice effect command corresponding to the step-up notice pattern is set in the transmission buffer. Thereby, the step-up notice performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the step-up notice performance corresponding to the step-up notice pattern is executed during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). The details of the dialog announcement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern for executing a pseudo-continuous effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a pseudo-continuous effect, the process moves to step E650-10, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that does not execute a pseudo-continuous effect, the process moves to step E650-12.

In step E650-10, the sub CPU 130a selects a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 40) for determining the pseudo-continuous effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous effect, determines the pseudo-continuous effect pattern, and step E650-11. , a pseudo-continuous effect command corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the pseudo-continuous effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pseudo-continuous effect corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Details of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that executes a development effect (SP development effect, SPSP development effect, all-rotation development effect). If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a development performance, the process moves to step E650-13, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that executes a development performance, the process moves to step E650-15.

In step E650-13, the sub CPU 130a selects the development effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 41) for determining the development effect pattern of the development effect, determines the development effect pattern, and in step E650-14, determines the development effect pattern. A development effect command corresponding to the pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the development effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the development effect corresponding to the development effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Details of the development effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a ready-to-win effect (post-reach effect). If it is a variable performance pattern for executing a ready-to-win performance, the process is shifted to step E650-16, and if it is not a variable performance pattern for executing a ready-to-win performance, this time's jackpot announcement performance determination processing is terminated.

In step E650-16, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a cut-in effect. If it is a variable effect pattern for executing a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-17, and if it is not a variable effect pattern for executing a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-19.

In step E650-17, the sub CPU 130a selects the cut-in effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 42) for determining the cut-in effect pattern of the cut-in effect to determine the cut-in effect pattern, and step E650-18. , a cut-in effect command corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the cut-in effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the cut-in effect corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Details of the cut-in effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-19, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a determined effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a fixed effect, the process is moved to step E650-20, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a fixed effect, the process is moved to step E650-22.

In step E650-20, the sub CPU 130a selects a determined effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 43) for determining the determined effect pattern of the determined effect to determine the determined effect pattern, and in step E650-21, determines the determined effect pattern. A decision effect command corresponding to the pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the determined effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the determined effect corresponding to the determined effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. The details of the determined effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-22, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a re-lottery effect. If it is the variable performance pattern for executing the re-lottery performance, the process is shifted to step E650-23, and if it is not the variable performance pattern for executing the re-lottery performance, the process is shifted to step E650-25.

In step E650-23, the sub CPU 130a selects the re-lottery effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 44) for determining the re-lottery effect pattern of the re-lottery effect, determines the re-lottery effect pattern, and steps E650-24. , a re-lottery performance command corresponding to the re-lottery performance pattern is set in the transmission buffer. Thereby, the re-lottery effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the re-lottery effect corresponding to the re-lottery effect pattern is executed during the variation effect. The details of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-25, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern capable of executing a fixed effect (a big hit). If it is a variable performance pattern that can execute a fixed performance, the process is shifted to step E650-26, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that can execute a fixed performance, this time's jackpot announcement performance determination processing is terminated.

In step E650-26, the sub CPU 130a selects the confirmed effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 45) for determining the confirmed effect pattern of the confirmed effect to determine the confirmed effect pattern, and in step E650-27, determines the confirmed effect pattern. A fixed performance command corresponding to the pattern is set in a transmission buffer, and the current big hit notice performance determination processing is terminated. As a result, the fixed effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the fixed effect corresponding to the fixed effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Details of the fixed effect pattern determination table will be described later.

(Preliminary decision table before reach)
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a pre-reach announcement determination table referred to when determining the announcement pattern of the pre-reach announcement effect.

As shown in FIG. 37, the before-reach announcement determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variation effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each announcement pattern, and the announcement pattern to be selected.

There are 3 types of advance notice patterns: "no notice" in which the advance notice effect is not executed, "serif notice effect" in which the dialogue notice effect is executed, and "step-up notice effect" in which the step-up notice effect is executed. The type is set, and the degree of expectation for execution of the jackpot game (percentage of execution of the vibration effect associated with the matching of the symbols described above) is no notice<serif notice effect<step-up notice effect.

The first feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 37 is that the pre-reach advance notice effect is more likely to be executed in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss, and the degree of expectation for a big hit is low. When a variable performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win is determined, the before-reach announcement performance is more likely to be executed than when the variable performance pattern is determined. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a second feature of the advance notice determination table before reach shown in FIG. Pre-announcement effects (both dialogue announcement effects capable of executing vibration effects with the effective period of the effect button 17 and step-up advance notice effects capable of executing vibration effects without the effective period of the effect button 17) are executed. It is difficult (execution rate is low). Therefore, useless pre-reach announcement effects are less likely to be executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state) in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shortened, making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a third feature of the advance notice determination table before reach shown in FIG. However, when the variable production pattern is the pattern for executing the normal ready-to-win production and the pattern for executing the SP ready-to-win production, the pre-ready-to-win announcement production is difficult to execute (the execution ratio is low). Therefore, useless pre-reach announcement effects are less likely to be executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state) in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shortened, making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. When it is executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit (the ratio of executing the vibration production accompanying the pattern matching described above, the ratio of executing the vibration production in the decided production described later, etc.) is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that, than when the step-up notice effect is executed, when the serif notice effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit (the ratio of the vibration effect accompanying the matching of the above-mentioned patterns is executed, the success effect which will be described later) The rate at which the accompanying vibration effect is executed, etc.) may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the interest in the game.

(Dialogue notice pattern decision table)
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a dialog announcement pattern determination table referred to when determining the announcement pattern of the dialog announcement effect.

As shown in FIG. 38, the speech announcement pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variation effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each speech announcement pattern, and the selected speech announcement pattern. , and for reference, the production configuration (effective suggestive production, effective period, production content) of each line notice pattern is described.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the speech announcement effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the effective period column is a effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the effective period. It is an effect that displays a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column means that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a normal state that is in a non-protruding state and that emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. 17 indicates white light emission.
"Button state" indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "Normal" in the column of the button state indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude.

``Normal dialogue (black)'' in the dialog production mode column means that normal dialogue that does not suggest the possibility of a jackpot game being executed is displayed in black characters and that normal dialogue is output by voice. showing.
“Chance dialogue (black)” means that a chance dialogue with the possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in black characters and the chance dialogue is output by voice.
“Reach lines (black)” indicates that the lines for which the ready-to-win effect is to be executed are displayed in black characters, and that the lines for reach are output by voice.
“Reach lines (red)” indicates that the ready-to-win lines for which the execution of the ready-to-win effect is confirmed are displayed in red characters, and the ready-to-win lines are output by voice.

“Heat speech (red)” indicates that a heat speech that has a high possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in red characters, and that heat speech is output by voice.
“Extremely hot speech (gold)” indicates that an intensely hot speech that has a very high possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in gold letters, and that intensely hot speech is output as a voice.
“Confirmed line (rainbow)” indicates that the confirmed line that confirms the execution of the jackpot game is displayed in rainbow-colored characters, and that the confirmed line is output by voice.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the column of button vibration means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate 1 from the time the dialogue starts to be displayed (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period ends). It shows that a weak vibration production that vibrates weakly over a period of seconds is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second from the start of the display of the dialogue (=when the production button 17 is operated or the effective period ends). This indicates that a vibrating strong vibration effect is to be executed.

The expected degree of jackpot in each dialogue production mode is “normal dialogue” < “chance dialogue (black)” < “reach dialogue (black)” < “reach dialogue (red)” < “heat dialogue (red)” < “heat Dialogue (gold)” < “Confirmed dialogue (rainbow)”. In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" < "strong vibration effect".

A first feature of the speech notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 38 is that when a speech with a high degree of expectation for a big hit (a heat speech or higher) is displayed, a vibration presentation of vibrating the presentation button 17 can be executed. points. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a second feature of the dialogue forewarning pattern determination table shown in FIG. 38, the dialogue foretelling effect of intensely hot dialogue with a higher expectation for a big win than the heat dialogue is executed than when the dialogue foretelling effect of the heat dialogue is executed. Vibration effect of the effect button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high), and the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when the dialogue advance notice effect of the hot dialogue is executed. The point is that the degree of expectation for the big win is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when it is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when the dialogue forewarning effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the speech notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 38 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a speech with a high expectation of a big win (more than a hot speech) is displayed is for a relatively short time. mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature of the speech advance notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are several points. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effect executed in the speech announcement effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed, or the vibration time of the weak vibration effect may be longer than the strong vibration effect. may be lengthened.

In addition, the degree of expectation for a big hit when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed during the speech announcement performance is the same between the performance modes A to C (normal game state) and the performance modes D to G (specific game state). However, production modes A to C (normal game state) may have a higher degree of expectation for a big hit, and production modes D to G (specific game state) may have a higher degree of expectation for a big hit. can be In this way, it is possible to vary the game characteristics depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to easily increase the player's expectation in the production modes D to G that are advantageous to the player, and to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

Also, the effective period is terminated by the operation of the effect button 17 or the elapse of the effective time, and the dialogue forewarning effect is executed. You can choose not to run it.

In addition, although the effective period is generated to execute the dialogue forewarning effect, it is also possible to execute the dialogue forewarning effect without generating the effective period. Only weak vibration effect for 1 second or only strong vibration effect for 1 second may be used.

(Step-up notice pattern decision table)
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a step-up notice pattern determination table referred to when deciding the notice pattern of the step-up notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 39, the step-up notice pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each step-up notice pattern, and the step-up notice pattern to be selected. As a reference, the effect configuration (step-up (SU) effect mode, button vibration) of each step-up notice pattern is described.

"1→2" in the step-up effect mode column indicates that the first and second step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3" indicates that the 1st to 3rd step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4" indicates that the 1st to 4th step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4→5" indicates that the 1st to 5th step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→5" indicates that after the 1st to 3rd step effects are executed in order, the 4th step effect is skipped and the 5th step effect is executed.
In each step-up performance mode, the performance time of the step performance before the last step performance is 1 second, and the performance time of the last step performance is 3 seconds.

"Weak vibration (1 second) at '5'" in the column of button vibration means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 weakly vibrates for 1 second from the start of the fifth step effect. indicates that it will be executed.

The degree of expectation for the jackpot in each step-up effect mode is “1→2”<“1→2→3”<“1→2→3→4”<“1→2→3→4→5”<“1→ 2→3→5”.

A first feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 17 can be vibrated to vibrate. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 is that the vibration effect executed when the step effect (fifth step effect) with a high expectation of a big win is displayed is relatively short. There is a point. Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

As a third feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39, the vibration mode (vibration intensity, vibration There is only one type of preset time (weak vibration (1 second)). Therefore, in the step-up notice performance in which the player does not operate the performance button 17 and it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration performance, it is possible to suppress the complication of the performance mode and improve the interest of the game. becomes possible.

As a fourth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the step-up notice effect with low expectation is difficult to execute (execution rate is low). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. , weak vibration effects are easily executed (execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the expectation of a big hit is high when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 without the effective period (the display of the operation promoting image) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that production modes A to C (normal game state) are more effective than production modes D to G (specific game state), and the effect button 17 without an effective period (display of operation promotion image) in the step-up notice effect The degree of expectation for a big win may be increased when the vibration presentation is executed. To improve the amusement of a game by making it possible to vary the game performance according to the type of the performance mode even in this case, and to easily increase the expectation of the player in the performance modes D to G which are advantageous to the player. becomes possible.

(Pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 40, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variation effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each pseudo-continuous effect pattern, and the pseudo-continuous effect pattern to be selected. As a reference, the effect configuration (effective suggestive effect, valid period, effect content) of each pseudo-continuous effect pattern is described.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the pseudo continuous effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the effective period column is a effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the effective period. It is an effect that displays a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column means that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a normal state that is in a non-protruding state and that emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. 17 indicates white light emission.
"Protruding button white" means that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a projecting state and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button 17 emits white light. It is shown that.

The "button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and the "normal" in the button state column means that the effect button 17 is in a normal state in which it does not protrude. , and "protrusion" indicates that the production button 17 is in a protruding state.

"Pseudo-failure" in the column of the pseudo-continuous effect mode means that the central effect symbol 70a, which suggests the execution of the pseudo-continuous, is not temporarily stopped, and the normal effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, and a failure sound effect is produced. This indicates that the pseudo consecutive failure effect to be output is executed.
"Pseudo-success" means that the central effect symbol 70a, which is a pseudo-symbol suggesting execution of a pseudo-continue, is temporarily stopped, a success effect sound is output, the second movable member 74 is weakly operated, and the pseudo-continuation effect is performed. It shows that the pseudo consecutive success effect to be performed is executed.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 is temporarily stopped in the pseudo symbol (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It shows that a weak vibration presentation is executed for one second.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second from when the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped (=when the production button 17 is operated or when the effective period ends). It shows that the strong vibration effect to be performed is executed.

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each promotion effect is "normal button white" < "protruding button white". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot in each button state is "normal" < "protruding". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" < "strong vibration effect".

A first feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that a vibration effect for vibrating the button 17 may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 40 is that the vibration effect that is executed when the pseudo-continuous success effect is performed is relatively short in a variable effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win. The point is that Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are two types of points depending on . Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fourth feature of the pseudo continuous production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 40, the same production device (production button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) can be executed (pseudo continuous success effect), but production modes D to G (specific game state) are more likely than production modes A to C (normal game state). ) has a higher expectation for a big hit when a pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect) using the same effect device (effect button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the game performance depending on the type of the performance mode, and it is possible to easily increase the expectation of the player in the performance modes D to G which are advantageous for the player, and to improve the interest of the game.

A fifth feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. There is a case where a pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect) is executed using a button vibration motor that vibrates the . Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the pseudo-continuous performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Incidentally, the effect button 17 during the effective period may be in a protruding state when the simulated consecutive success performance is performed in a variable performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, but it may not be in a protruding state.

In addition, although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effects executed in the pseudo continuous success effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed.

In addition, although the effective period is generated to execute the pseudo consecutive success effect and the pseudo consecutive failure effect, it is also possible to execute the pseudo consecutive success effect and the pseudo consecutive failure effect without generating the effective period. Often, the vibration effect to be executed in the pseudo continuous success effect may be only 3 seconds of weak vibration effect or only 3 seconds of strong vibration effect, or only 1 second of weak vibration effect or only 1 second of strong vibration effect. can be

In addition, the production modes A to C (normal game state) are simulated using the same production device (production button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) than production modes D to G (specific game state). The degree of expectation for a big hit when a continuous effect (pseudo continuous success effect) is executed may be higher, and the effect mode B or C is more likely than the effect mode A with the same effect device (effect button vibration Motor, second movable member 74, etc.) may be set so that the degree of expectation for a big hit when a pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect) is executed is high, or the effect mode D ~ is higher than the effect mode G. Even if F has a higher expectation for a big hit when a pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect) using the same effect device (effect button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. good.

Also, in the pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect), an action effect using the second movable member 74 is executed, but an action effect using the first movable member 73 may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to make the execution ratio of the motion representation using the second movable member 74 higher than that of the motion representation using the first movable member 73 .

(Development effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a development effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the development effect.

As shown in FIG. 41, the development performance pattern determination table contains performance modes, jackpot determination results, variable performance pattern types, development performance types to be determined for development performance patterns, selection rate (%) of each development performance pattern, Developed production patterns to be selected are associated with each other, and the production configuration (effective suggestive production, effective period, production content) of each developed production pattern is described for reference.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"None" in the effective suggestive production column indicates that the effective suggestive production is not executed, and "Yes (gase)" means that the effective suggestive production is executed, but the effective period does not occur after that. "Yes" indicates that the effective suggestive effect is executed and then the valid period occurs.

The 'effective period (long press for 4 seconds)' indicates that the development effect progresses step by step by pressing the effect button 17 for a long time and that the effective period of the development effect ends when 4 seconds elapse.
The "promoting effect" in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the valid period. The button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column means that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a normal state that is in a non-protruding state and that emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. 17 indicates white light emission.
"Normal button red" means that a button image that imitates the production button 17 that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque production button image described above, and the production button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.

The "button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and the "normal" in the button state column means that the effect button 17 is in a normal state in which it does not protrude. , and "protrusion" indicates that the production button 17 is in a protruding state.

"SP notification" in the column of the development mode means that as a result of the development mode, an SP development pattern is derived and displayed to suggest the development to the SP ready-to-win mode, and the SP development mode that outputs the first development effect sound is executed. Which indicates that.
"SPSP notification" means that as a result of the development production, an SPSP development pattern indicating development to the SPSP ready-to-win production is derived and displayed, and an SPSP development production that outputs a second development sound effect is executed. .
"Full spin notification" means that as a result of the development production, a full spin development pattern is derived and displayed to suggest development to a full spin reach production, and a full spin development production that outputs a third development effect sound is executed. is shown.

The "weak action" in the column of character action is a weak action production in which the second movable member 74 emits blue light and performs a weak action with a small movement width when various symbols are derived and displayed (=at the end of the effective period). is executed.
The "strong action" means that the second movable member 74 emits light in red when various symbols are derived and displayed (=at the end of the effective period), and a strong action effect with a large swing width is executed. is shown.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 is weak for 1 second from the time of derivation display of various development patterns (= the end of the valid period). It shows that a vibrating weak vibration effect is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" refers to a weak vibration effect in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second from the time various symbols are derived and displayed (= the end of the valid period). indicates that it will be executed.

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each action production is "weak action"<"strong action". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration production is "weak vibration" < "strong vibration".

A first feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. A vibrating effect may be executed in which the effective period of the button 17 is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 is that the full-rotation development effect, in which the expectation of a big win is higher than the SPSP development effect, is executed rather than the SPSP development effect. , the vibration performance of the performance button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) is easily executed (execution rate is high), and the performance button 17 is more likely to be activated than when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is not executed when the SPSP development performance is executed. When the vibration presentation is executed, the expectation for the big hit is higher. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player as to whether or not the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed when the SPSP development performance is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 is that it is a variable effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win, and is executed when a development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) with a high degree of expectation for a big win is performed. One of the points is that the vibration effect is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41, the vibration of the vibration effect that is executed when the development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed in a variable effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. There are two types of intensity depending on the degree of expectation for a big hit. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fifth feature of the development production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41, the same production device (production button vibration motor , second movable member 74, etc.) can be executed (SPSP development effect, etc.), but production modes D to G (specific game state) are more effective than production modes A to C (normal game state). There is a point that the degree of expectation for the big hit is higher when the development effect using the effect device (the effect button vibration motor, the second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the game performance depending on the type of the performance mode, and it is possible to easily increase the expectation of the player in the performance modes D to G which are advantageous for the player, and to improve the interest of the game.

Although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effects executed in the development effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed.

In addition, production modes A to C (normal game state) are more advanced than production modes D to G (specific game state) using the same production device (production button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) The degree of expectation for a big hit when a production (SPSP development production, etc.) is executed may be set to be higher, and production mode B or C may be higher than production mode A using the same production device (production button vibration motor , the second movable member 74, etc.) may be set to increase the expectation of the jackpot when the development performance using the second movable member 74 is executed, and the performance modes D to F are the same performance as the performance mode G. The degree of expectation for a big hit may be increased when a development effect using a device (the effect button vibration motor, the second movable member 74, etc.) is executed.

(Cut-in effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the cut-in effect.

As shown in FIG. 42, the cut-in effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each cut-in effect pattern, and the selected cut-in effect pattern. As a reference, the production configuration (effective suggestive production, effective period, production content) of each cut-in production pattern is described.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 4 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the cut-in effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 4 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the valid period. An opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column means that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a normal state that is in a non-protruding state and that emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. 17 indicates white light emission.
"Protruding button red" means that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a projecting state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
"Protruding button rainbow" means that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button 17 emits rainbow light. It is shown that.

"Button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and "normal" indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. "Protrusion" indicates a state in which the effect button 17 protrudes.

"Blue cut-in" in the cut-in effect mode column indicates that a cut-in image in a blue frame is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a blue cut-in effect is executed in which a first cut-in effect sound is output. It indicates that
“Green cut-in” indicates that a cut-in image in a green frame is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a green cut-in effect is executed in which a second cut-in effect sound is output. .
"Red cut-in" indicates that a cut-in image with a red frame is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a red cut-in effect is executed in which a third cut-in effect sound is output. .

"Weak vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column is when the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 starts displaying the cut-in image (=when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends) It shows that a weak vibration presentation is executed for three seconds from .
"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 lasts for 3 seconds from the time the cut-in image starts to be displayed (=when the production button 17 is operated or the effective period ends). It shows that a strong vibration effect is executed in which strong vibration is performed.

The expected degree of jackpot for each cut-in is "blue cut-in" < "green cut-in" < "red cut-in". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" < "strong vibration effect".

A first feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that when a cut-in image with a high expectation of a big win is displayed (cut-in effect is executed), the effective period of the effect button 17 is generated. The point is that a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a cut-in image with a high expectation of a big win is displayed (cut-in effect is executed) is relatively long. There are some points. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are two types of points depending on the degree. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effects executed in the cut-in effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed.

Also, although the effective period is generated and the cut-in effect is executed, the cut-in effect may be executed without generating the effective period. Only weak vibration effects for 3 seconds or only strong vibration effects for 3 seconds may be used, or only weak vibration effects for 1 second or only strong vibration effects for 1 second may be used.

(decision production pattern decision table)
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a determined effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the determined effect.

As shown in FIG. 43, the determined effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each determined effect pattern, and the determined effect pattern to be selected. , and for reference, the effect configuration (effective suggestion effect, valid period, effect content) of each determined effect pattern is described.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 5 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the final effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 5 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the valid period. An opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column means that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a normal state that is in a non-protruding state and that emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. 17 indicates white light emission.
"Protruding button red" means that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a projecting state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
"Protruding button rainbow" means that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button 17 emits rainbow light. It is shown that.

"Button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and "normal" indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. "Protrusion" indicates a state in which the effect button 17 protrudes.

"Failure" in the column of the determined effect mode means that the first movable member 73 does not operate and the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color, thereby indicating that the jackpot game is not executed. is executed.
“Success” means that the first movable member 73 operates to the maximum operating position and emits light in rainbow colors, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, so that a jackpot game is executed. It indicates that a successful production that is determined to suggest is executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the column of button vibration is determined by the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17. It shows that a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is executed in which the strong vibration is performed for 4 seconds from the hour) and then the strong vibration is performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second.

"Rainbow light emission (11 seconds)" in the column of button light emission means that the effect button LED for lighting the effect button 17 is determined from the start of the successful effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period ends). It shows that the rainbow light is emitted for 11 seconds (longer period than the effect button 17 strongly vibrates).

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each promotion effect is "normal button white" < "protruding button red" < "protruding button rainbow". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot in each button state is "normal" < "protruding".

A first feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that, when the fixed success effect is executed, a vibrating effect is executed in which an effective period is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a big winning game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the effective period of the effect button 17 generated during the variable effect is the longest. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player misses the operation of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the effect button 17 vibrates for the longest period of time as the strong vibration effect that occurs during the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of exhilaration at the time of the winning performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A fourth characteristic of the decided effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Therefore, even after the vibration of the effect button 17 ends, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that, in the decision effect (decision success effect), the action effect using the first movable member 73 is executed, but the action effect using the second movable member 74 may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to set the execution ratio of the action effect using the first movable member 73 higher than the action effect using the second movable member 74 .

(Re-lottery effect pattern decision table)
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a re-lottery effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIG. 44, the re-lottery effect pattern determination table includes the effect mode, the presence or absence of promotion (whether it is scheduled to be promoted), the selection rate (%) of each re-lottery effect pattern, and the re-lottery effect pattern to be selected. They are associated with each other, and for reference, the effect configuration (effective suggestion effect, effective period, effect content) of each re-lottery effect pattern is described.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the re-lottery effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the effective period column is a effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the effective period. Specifically, the opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position without executing the effective suggesting effect. Along with this, a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column means that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a normal state that is in a non-protruding state and that emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. 17 indicates white light emission.
"Normal button red" means that a button image that imitates the production button 17 that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque production button image described above, and the production button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
"Normal button rainbow" means that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a normal state that is in a non-protruding state and emits rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button 17 emits rainbow light. It is shown that.

The "button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and the "normal" in the button state column means that the effect button 17 is in a normal state in which it does not protrude. showing.

"Promotion failure effect" in the column of re-lottery effect mode refers to a non-promoted pattern that does not become a effect pattern that is advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery effect (for example, even number pattern → even number pattern, odd number pattern other than "7" → Odd symbols other than "7") are derived and displayed (temporarily stopped), and a non-promoting sound effect is output.
"Promotion success effect" means that the promotion pattern (for example, even number pattern → odd number pattern, odd number pattern other than "7" → "7" pattern) that becomes a production pattern that is advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery effect is derived and displayed. (temporary stop), and a promotion sound effect is output.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds from the time the promotion pattern is displayed (= the end of the valid period). It shows that the strong vibration effect to be performed is executed.

"Rainbow light emission (4 seconds)" in the column of button light emission means that the effect button LED for lighting the effect button 17 is displayed for 4 seconds (when the effect button 17 It shows rainbow emission over a longer period of time than strong oscillation.

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each promotion effect is “normal button white” < “normal button red” < “normal button rainbow”.

A first feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 44 is that when the promotion success effect is executed, a vibrating effect is executed in which the effective period is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. be done. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform the player of the fact that the pattern has been promoted to an advantageous performance symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 44 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained even after the strong-vibration presentation ends, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Note that the re-lottery performance (promotion failure performance, promotion success performance) is executed by generating the validity period, but the re-lottery performance may be executed without generating the validity period.

(Fixed production pattern decision table)
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a confirmed effect pattern determination table referred to when deciding the effect pattern of the confirmed effect.

As shown in FIG. 45, the final effect pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each final effect pattern, and the final effect pattern to be selected. The effect configuration (execution timing, effect content) of each fixed effect pattern is described.

"-" in the execution timing column indicates the timing at which the fixed effect is not executed, and "○" indicates the timing at which the fixed effect is executed.
"Determined sound" in the voice column indicates that a determined sound indicating that a jackpot game is to be executed is output.
"Handle rainbow light emission" in the column of light emission means that the handle LED for lighting the firing handle 15 emits light in rainbow colors from the time when the confirmation sound is output until the fluctuation stops (for 4 seconds or more until the production pattern stops displaying). indicates that

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the column of button vibration means that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds from the time when the confirmation sound is output. is shown.

A first feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that, when a fixed effect is executed, a vibrating effect of vibrating the effect button 17 is executed without generating an effective period. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a big winning game is to be executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the rainbow emission of the firing handle 15 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained even after the strong-vibration presentation ends, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Summary of various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45)
Here, as a first feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45, a vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second or strong vibration 1 second) is executed in the dialogue announcement effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17. Compared to the case where the effect button 17 is not accompanied by the effective period of the step-up notice effect (1 second weak vibration), the expectation of the big hit (vibration effect (strong vibration 4 second) is executed, and the ratio of vibration production (strong vibration 4 seconds → 5 seconds) is executed in the decided production, etc.) is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is executed with the dialogue notice effect with the effective period of the effect button 17 rather than the case where the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is executed with the step-up notice effect without the effective period of the effect button 17. second or strong vibration 1 second) is executed, the degree of expectation of the jackpot (the ratio of execution of the vibration production (strong vibration 4 seconds) accompanying the pattern alignment described above, the vibration production (strong vibration 4 seconds→5 seconds) may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the interest in the game.

As a second feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45, the vibration effect executed as the jackpot announcement effect has a relatively short first vibration effect with a relatively short vibration period (during the dialogue notice effect, step-up effect) Vibration performance (1 second) during notice performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, etc.) and second vibration performance (during cut-in performance, decision success performance) with a longer vibration period (performance period) than the first vibration performance There is a vibration effect (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) that is longer than 1 second, such as during a fixed effect, and after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the second effect period (normal reach effect) ) and a variable effect with a third effect period (SP/SPSP reach effect), the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed (performed at a higher rate) during the first effect period than during the second effect period. points. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation without misleading the player into thinking that the game is a big win, and to improve the interest in the game.

It should be noted that the look-ahead vibration effect is also the first vibration effect with a relatively short vibration period, but even if the look-ahead vibration effect is included, the second effect is performed after the first effect period (pre-reach effect). In a variable effect with a period (normal reach effect) and a third effect period (SP/SPSP reach effect), the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed (executed) in the first effect period than in the second effect period. high percentage). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation without misleading the player into thinking that the game is a big win, and to improve the interest in the game.

As a third feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. In the variable production with production), the first vibration production (at the time of dialogue announcement production, at the time of step-up announcement production, at the time of simulated continuous production, at the time of development production, etc.) Effect (1 second)) is easy to execute (the execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation without misleading the player into thinking that the game is a big win, and to improve the interest in the game.

As a fourth feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. , Vibration effect (1 second) during simulated continuous effect, development effect, etc.), and second vibration effect with a longer vibration period than the first vibration effect (during cut-in effect, determined success effect, fixed effect, etc.) There is a vibration effect longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)), and after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the second effect period (normal reach effect) and the third effect period ( SP/SPSP ready-to-reach production), the second vibration production is more likely to be executed (performed at a higher rate) in the second production period than in the first production period. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. production), the third production period is longer than the first production period, the second vibration production (at the time of cut-in production, at the time of successful success production, at the time of fixed production, etc. Vibration production longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)) is easily executed (the execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45, in the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the effect button 17 is set to the normal state and the first vibration effect (1 second) is executed. is higher than the ratio of executing the first vibration effect with the effect button 17 in the projecting state. Therefore, the expectation of the player is not excessively aroused during the first presentation period, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As a seventh feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45, during the third effect period (SP/SPSP ready-to-win effect), the effect button 17 is in a protruding state and the second vibration effect (3 seconds or more) is activated. The ratio of execution is higher than the ratio of executing the second vibration production with the production button 17 in the normal state. Therefore, the expectation of the player is not excessively aroused during the first presentation period, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As an eighth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45, the vibration effect executed as the big hit notice effect includes the first vibration effect with a short vibration period (at the time of the dialogue notice effect, at the time of the step-up notice effect). , Vibration effect (1 second) during pseudo continuous effect, development effect, etc.), and second vibration effect (during cut-in effect, determined success effect, confirmed There is a vibration performance (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) longer than 1 second during performance, etc., and continuous performance (pseudo-continuous performance) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). In the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, the second vibration effect is easier to execute (the execution rate is higher) when the first vibration effect is executed than when the first vibration effect is not executed. ) points. Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation of whether or not the first vibration effect will be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a ninth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45, the vibration performance executed as the jackpot announcement performance includes a second vibration performance (performance period) having a longer vibration period (performance period) than the first vibration performance ( There are vibration effects that are longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds), such as during cut-in effects, determined success effects, and confirmed effects, etc., during production modes A to C (normal game state). In the variable effect, the reach effect by the second type of effect pattern (even number pattern) is easier to execute than the reach effect by the first type effect pattern (odd number pattern other than “7”) (The execution rate is high. ), it is difficult to execute the ready-to-win effect by the third type of effect pattern (the effect pattern of “7”) than the ready-to-win effect by the second type of effect pattern (the ratio of execution is low), and the second type of effect pattern The point is that the second vibration performance is more likely to be executed (performed at a higher rate) when the ready-to-win performance by the performance pattern of the third type is executed than when the ready-to-win performance by is executed. Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for the type of effect symbol for executing the ready-to-win effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a tenth feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45, in the jackpot fluctuation effect in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, the vibration effect ( Vibration production without effective period (display of operation promotion image) during production after reach (development production, pattern matching, C pattern matching, confirmation production) than the number of times of execution ) is likely to be executed more frequently. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the sense of expectation during the post-reach performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the eleventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45, a specific reach effect (SP reach effect , SPSP ready-to-win production) is executed, the number of vibration productions (development production, pattern matching, C pattern matching, fixed production) that does not accompany the effective period during the production after reach tends to increase. are mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the big win variation presentation from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a twelfth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. The number of executions of vibration effects (forecast vibration effects, step-up notice effects, fixed effects) that do not have an effective period during the pre-reach effect is likely to be greater than the number of times the pattern is aligned, final effect) is executed. . Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win by means of a vibration effect that does not accompany an effective period, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a thirteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration performance of the performance button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution ratio is high) in the case where the post-ready notice performance (cut-in performance) with high expectation of big hit is executed (execution ratio is high), and the pre-ready notice performance. When is executed, the degree of expectation for big win is higher when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed than when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player as to whether or not the vibration performance of the performance button 17 will be executed when the pre-reach announcement performance is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a 14th feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45, production modes D to G (specific game state) are better than production modes A to C (normal game state). , the expectation for the big hit increases when the vibration effect is executed with the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that production modes A ~ C (normal game state) than the production mode D ~ G (specific game state), vibrating with the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image) in the notice production after reach The degree of expectation for a big win may be increased when the performance is executed. To improve the amusement of a game by making it possible to vary the game performance according to the type of the performance mode even in this case, and to easily increase the expectation of the player in the performance modes D to G which are advantageous to the player. becomes possible.

As a fifteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. When the production is executed, the expectation of the big hit is higher, and in the big hit variation production, regardless of whether or not the vibration production of the production button 17 is executed during the pre-reach production, the production after the reach (determined success production) Later period), the vibration production of the production button 17 (vibration production at the time of pattern matching and C pattern matching) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the game will be a big win by means of the vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

As a sixteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. One of the vibration performances such as continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, etc.) is executed in one of a plurality of types of vibration modes (weak vibration, strong vibration) with different expectations for big wins. Vibration performance (one of vibration performance such as step-up notice performance, pattern matching, C pattern matching, etc.) without effective period of performance button 17 (display of operation promotion image) executed during variable performance. is executed in one predetermined vibration mode. Therefore, when it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration mode without the effective period, it is possible to suppress the complication of the presentation mode of the vibration presentation and improve the interest of the game.

As the seventeenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45, during the pre-reach production period in the jackpot variation production, the effect period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image) is accompanied by a vibration production (dialogue notice production). When the vibration effect at the time) is executed, and when the vibration effect without the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promoting image) is executed (vibration effect at the time of the step-up notice effect), then ( The rate of execution of vibration performance (vibration performance of 3 seconds or more such as successful performance, pattern matching, C pattern matching, etc.) is executed during the performance period after reach) is different, and vibration performance without the effective period of the performance button 17 (Vibration effect at the time of step-up notice effect) is easier to execute (execution rate is higher) during the normal game state (production modes A to C) than during the specific game state (production modes D to G). are mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the vibration performance that does not accompany the effective period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As the 18th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. It is possible to change the execution mode of the vibration effect (execution or not, execution timing, etc.) in the big hit notice effect depending on the odd number pattern other than the “7” pattern), but with the execution of the determined success effect and the confirmed effect When the vibration performance is executed by , the vibration mode is the same regardless of the type of the jackpot performance pattern to be aligned (including C pattern alignment). Therefore, it is possible to uniformly congratulate the player on winning a big win while heightening the expectation for the big win by the vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a nineteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45, after executing a vibration effect (decision success effect, etc.) with an effective period (display of an operation promotion image) in the jackpot fluctuation effect, the effective period ( It is possible to execute vibration effects (symbol matching, C pattern matching, etc.) that are not accompanied by the display of the operation prompting image), and the vibration effects (decision effect, etc.) that accompany the effective period (display of the operation prompting image) can be performed by operating the effect button 17. While the timing to start vibration varies depending on the timing, the timing to start vibration is predetermined for vibration effects (symbol matching, C pattern matching, etc.) that are not accompanied by an effective period (display of operation prompting image). be done. Therefore, depending on whether or not the valid period (display of the operation prompting image) is accompanied, the vibration effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a twentieth feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45, the same movable member (second It is possible to execute a specific effect (pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, etc.) using the movable member 74), but the specific effect can be performed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). The point is that the jackpot expectations are different when is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a 21st feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. It is possible to execute a step effect that progresses to any of the stages (step-up notice effect, pseudo continuous effect, etc.), but in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state) If the step effect (step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) is the same stage (if it is a step-up notice effect, it is either the 3rd step effect, the 4th step effect, or the 5th step effect, if it is a pseudo-continuous effect, 1 time or 2 times), the big hit expectation is different. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 22nd feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. Any of the operation promotion effects can be executed, and an operation effect (any of the development effect, the cut-in effect, and the fixed effect) can be executed according to the operation of the effect button 17, and the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and production modes D to G (specific game state), the degree of expectation for a big hit when the same operation promotion effect (for example, normal button white) is executed is different, and production modes A to C (normal game state) ) and production modes D to G (specific game state), when the operation production is executed, the effective suggestion production is executed and the operation is promoted rather than the case where the operation promotion production is executed without the effective suggestion production being executed. The point is that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for whether or not the effective suggestive effect is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a twenty-third feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. There are cases where it is executed with an effective period and cases where it is executed without an effective period, but the vibration period that is executed with the jackpot announcement effect is relatively long (3 seconds or more). is executed with a validity period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect for the operation of the performance button 17, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Main processing of the integrated control unit)
Main processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing main processing of the integrated control unit 141 . This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the overall CPU 141a.

First, the supervising CPU 141a prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, CPU initialization such as setting of built-in registers, access permission to the general RAM 141c, initialization (0 clear) of all RWM areas of the general RAM 141c, CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt ), etc., and permits all interrupts in step T3.

The overall CPU 141a performs adjustment mode switching processing in step T4. Specifically, the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the audio output device 9 and the display device (first image display device 70, second Adjustment of the light amount (value) of the backlight of the image display device 71), and an adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the volume and the light amount (whether the volume can be adjusted, whether the light amount can be adjusted, the initial value of the volume value (any of 0 to 5 ), the initial value of the light intensity value (any of 0 to 5), the adjustment range of the volume value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5), and the adjustment range of the light intensity value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5)) process.

It should be noted that the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the changeover switch 22 can always be performed when the game machine 1 is in the power ON state (after the integrated control unit 141 is activated).

The supervising CPU 141a performs volume adjustment processing in step T5. Specifically, based on the detection signal (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 operable by the player, the voice output device 9 outputs the perform processing for adjusting the volume (value) of the effect sound.

The supervising CPU 141a performs light amount adjustment processing in step T6. Specifically, the display device (first image display A process for adjusting the light quantity (value) of the backlight of the device 70 and the second image display device 71) is performed.

In addition, the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the cross key 19 is regulated (restricted) at the start of the variable performance and at the end of the variable performance (stop of the performance pattern 70a). . Also, during the period from when the power is turned on until the game progress control is started (specifically, during the setting change mode, during the RWM clear preparation mode, during the setting confirmation mode, during the initial operation of the various drive sources of the board unit 500, etc.) (until the timer interrupt is started on the main control board 110), important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, illegal winning , abnormal prize winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) are regulated (restricted) even during notification (output of notification sound).

In addition, during the output of the abnormality notification sound, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various effects sounds output from the audio output device 9 (BGM, etc.) is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormal notification sound ends, the volume of various effect sounds is returned to the volume before the decrease.

The supervising CPU 141a performs eco mode control processing in step T7. Specifically, it performs processing for controlling the start and end of the eco mode for suppressing power consumption by reducing the amount of backlight of the display devices (first image display device 70 and second image display device 71).

In step T8, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not it has received an effect instruction command or a notification instruction command transmitted from the effect control section 130m. If the performance instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process proceeds to step T11, and if the performance instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process proceeds to step T9.

The supervising CPU 141a performs animation pattern setting processing in step T9. Specifically, an animation pattern is determined from the animation group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and set in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c.

The supervising CPU 141a performs a sound pattern setting process in step T10. Specifically, a process of determining a sound pattern from the type of sound group corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and setting it in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c is performed.

In step T11, the supervising CPU 141a sets in the supervising RAM 141c a frame switching flag indicating that it is time to update the display image of the display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). determine whether or not If there is a frame switching flag, the process moves to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process moves to step T4.

Note that the frame switching flag is set by the V blank signal transmitted from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every 1/30 second (the time when the drawing/display of the effect image for one frame is scheduled to be completed). is set by the V blank interrupt processing which is executed each time the is received. Therefore, the processing of steps T12 to T15 described below is executed each time the V blank interrupt processing is executed (frame update timing).

The general CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the general RAM 141c in step T12, and performs scene update processing in step T13. Specifically, referring to the scene switching counter, wait frame counter, and frame counter updated by the V-blank interrupt processing described above, the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in step T9. , the sound scene address is updated based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The supervising CPU 141a performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, it consists of a drawing control command group based on the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address according to the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs. A display list is generated, this display list is output to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and processing for instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list is performed.

As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the display image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and displays the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn in the display frame buffer on the display device ( Processing for displaying on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) is performed. In other words, the frame update timing is the start timing of various effects (image display and sound output such as pending display, variable effect, jackpot preview effect, and look-ahead effect) performed by the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. It is supposed to be the end timing.

In addition, effects directly controlled by the effect control unit 130m and the lamp control unit 150 (suspension display by the sub first suspension display 83 and the second sub suspension display 84, effects of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 operation) may or may not match the frame update timing.

The overall CPU 141a performs voice control processing in step T15. Specifically, a process of generating an audio control command from the sound information at the updated address and outputting this audio control command to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) is performed.

As a result, the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) performs processing for outputting various effects and notification sounds from the audio output device 9 based on the audio control command. When this process ends, the process moves to step T4.

Thus, at the start of the variable production and at the end of the variable production (stop of the production pattern 70a), the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the changeover switch 22 operable by the game clerk are possible, but the player can operate. Volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are regulated (restricted). Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to miss important points such as the start of the variable performance and the end of the variable performance, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, unrecoverable error, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, During the notification (output of notification sound) of the door open error), it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity with the switch 22 operable by the game clerk, but the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are possible with the cross key 19 operable by the player. are regulated (restricted). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of volume adjustment and light amount adjustment on the game parlor side while avoiding the inconvenience that a player who is trying to adjust the volume and light amount does not notice the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, during the output of the abnormality notification sound, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various effects sounds output from the audio output device 9 (BGM, etc.) is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality notification sound ends, the volume of various effect sounds is restored to the volume before the decrease. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing an abnormality notification sound due to various effects sounds, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

It should be noted that while the abnormality is being notified (output of the notification sound), setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light intensity value by the cross key 19 that the player can operate may be disabled, or the adjustment range of the volume value and the light intensity value may be disabled. may be restricted between 0 and 2, for example.

(Accessory initial processing of lamp control section)
The accessory initial processing of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 47 . FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the character object initial processing of the lamp control unit 150, and this processing is executed within the timer interrupt processing executed by the lamp control unit 150 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) has been received from the main control board 110 or not. If the power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step R102, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a executes origin return processing of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the initial processing number updated in each processing of the accessory initial processing. is set to "1".

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "1" in step R103. If the initial processing number is not "1", the processing is shifted to step R105 assuming that the character object origin return processing is not executed, and if the initial processing number is "1", the origin return processing is executed in step R104. , and the present accessory initial processing is terminated. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the return operation of the accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the origin position is executed, or the initial processing number is set. Processing such as setting to "2" is performed. Details of the origin return processing will be described later.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "2" in step R105. If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial action processing for the accessory is not executed, and the initial action processing for this time is terminated. If the initial processing number is "2", the initial action processing is performed. , terminates the initial processing of the character product. Specifically, an initial operation and initial light emission are performed to confirm whether or not the accessory operates normally, and an initial processing number is set to "0". Details of the initial operation process will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 47, the origin return processing for performing the operation of returning various accessories to the origin position, and the initial operation for performing the initial operation and initial light emission of the various accessories. It is designed not to execute the operation process at the same time. Therefore, the operation of returning various roles to the origin position and the initial operation and initial light emission of various roles are not mixed, and it is possible to separate and check the return operation and the initial operation and initial light emission. .

Further, according to the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 47, the origin return process is executed before the initial action process. Therefore, the various accessories are initially moved from the origin position, and it is possible to easily grasp whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessories.

(Origin return processing of lamp control unit)
The return-to-origin process of the lamp controller 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing origin return processing in lamp control unit 150 .

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the return-to-origin status of the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is "0". do. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is moved to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the driven object to be returned to the origin is selected as the first. 1 movable member 73, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

The ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R105-3. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is shifted to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", in step R105-4, the driving target to be returned to the origin is selected. The second movable member 74 is set, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the movable member to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that each movable member is at the origin position is determined. If the movable member to be driven is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-6, and if the movable member to be driven is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the lamp CPU 150a drives the drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven so that the movable member to be driven returns to the origin position. The board accessories abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that the return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven, and the process is moved to step R105-9. , the process moves to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets, in the lamp RAM 150c, return abnormality information (first movable member return abnormality information, second movable member return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven. , In step R105-10, clear the board accessory abnormality determination timer.

The ramp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-11. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" so that the second movable member 74 is driven. If it is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of returning the board accessories (first movable member, second movable member) to the origin.

At step R105-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the state of returning to the origin of the frame role object (production button 17) is "0". If the frame role object processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R105-13, and if the board role process number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R105-20.

At step R105-13, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the effect button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the production button 17 is at the origin position is determined. If the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-14, and if the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-19.

At step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a drives the button driving motor for moving the effect button 17 so that the effect button 17 returns to the origin position. +1 update the frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of return abnormality that does not return to the origin position.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame role object abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return error has occurred in the production button 17, and the process is moved to step R105-17. end the return-to-origin process.

In step R105-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information indicating that the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-18 clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-19. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to end the process of returning the frame accessory (production button 17) to the origin.

In step R105-20, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R105-21, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-21, the ramp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, performs the initial operation processing of the accessory to the above-described initial processing number. "2" is set, and the current origin return processing is terminated.

As described above, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 48, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are not returned to the origin positions at the same time (simultaneously), but are returned in a predetermined order (first movable member 74). member 73→second movable member 74) to return to the origin position. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not various board accessories have returned to the origin position. In addition, when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in contact with each other with difficulty in separation, it is possible to prevent the two movable members from applying loads to each other, so that both movable members are damaged at the same time. Inconvenience can be suppressed.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 48, the operation of returning the board accessories (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (the effect button 17) It is possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) execute the return operation to . Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return motion of various roles, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial motions of various roles to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 48, an upper limit is set for the time required for each accessory to return to the origin position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories never ends. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the various accessories are performing the returning motions even during the variable performance and the performance motions are not performed, and it is possible to prevent the amusement of the game from being lowered.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 48, the operation of returning the board accessories (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (the effect button 17) When both of the return operations to return to are completed, a process for shifting to the initial operation process is performed. Therefore, the returning motion of various accessories to the origin position and the initial motion of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and it is possible to separate and confirm the returning motion and initial motion of various accessories. .

The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are arranged to return to their origin positions in a predetermined order (the order of the first movable member 73→the second movable member 74). You may make it start the operation|movement which returns to. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of various characters to be executed next. becomes.

(Initial operation processing of lamp control unit)
Initial operation processing of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing initial operation processing of lamp control unit 150 .

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the board accessory is "0". When the board accessory processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R107-2, and when the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory are performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, step R107-3. In step R107-7, the board accessory processing number is set to "2" so that the initial action of the board accessory is not performed.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects the board role item initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 50) for determining the board role item initial motion pattern. The details of the board accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial motion pattern of the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, referring to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table, one initial operation pattern is determined from a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of command at power ON and the presence or absence of recovery abnormality information. do.

The ramp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-6. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R107-7. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is shifted to step R107-11, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the lamp is set in the RAM 150c The initial motion of the board accessory is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the existing board accessory.

In step R107-9, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not all steps of the initial action of the board accessory have been completed. If all steps of the initial motion of the board accessory have not been completed, the process is shifted to step R107-11, and if all steps of the initial motion of the board accessory have been completed, step R107-10 is performed on the board accessory. The processing number is updated by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the board accessory.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation state of the frame role object (effect button 17) is "0". If the frame role-playing process number is "0", the process moves to step R107-12, and if the frame role-playing process number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information of the effect button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-14 assuming that the initial action of the frame accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, the frame "2" is set to the frame role product processing number assuming that the initial action of the role product is not performed, and the process is shifted to step R107-17.

At step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects a frame role-playing object initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 51) for determining the initial motion pattern of the frame role-playing object. The details of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

At step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame role item (effect button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, with reference to the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table, one initial motion pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial motion patterns based on the type of power ON command.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-16. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "0", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the frame role-playing product.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number is "1" in step R107-17. If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process is moved to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", in step R107-18, the lamp is set in the RAM 150c. The initial motion of the frame role object is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the frame role object.

At step R107-19, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial motion of the frame role-thing has been completed. If the initial action of the frame role has not been completed in all steps, the process is shifted to step R107-21, and if the initial action of the frame role has been completed in all steps, in step R107-20, the frame role The processing number is updated by +1. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "1", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the frame role-playing.

In step R107-21, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, this initial operation process is terminated.

The ramp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the initial processing number described above in step R107-23, and ends this initial operation processing. .

Thus, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 49, the initial action of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial action of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are performed. They can be executed simultaneously (simultaneously). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial action of various accessories, and to prevent obstruction of the production actions of various accessories during the game.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 49, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 that constitute the board accessories, the first movable member 73 and The initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movable member from being completely broken down or damaged by forcibly initializing the movable member in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 49, when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 constituting the frame accessory, the initial operation of the production button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as complete breakdown or breakage of the performance button 17 by forcibly initializing the performance button 17 in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 49, even if the initial operation of the board role object in which the recovery error has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame role object in which the recovery error has not occurred is executed. Even if the initial action of the frame accessory in which the error has occurred is not executed, the initial action of the board accessory in which the recovery abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the action of the accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred.

Further, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 49, both the initial action of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial action of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are completed. The initial operation process is terminated when the Therefore, even though one of the board accessory and the frame accessory performs the initial action, the other performs the production action, and it may occur that it is unclear whether it is the initial action or the production action. Gone.

(Board accessories initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74).

Types of commands at power ON, presence/absence of recovery abnormality information, and initial operation patterns to be selected are associated with the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table. The number of steps is described.

The initial operation pattern includes patterns 01 to 03 that are determined when a power-on designation command is received, and patterns 01-03 that are determined when a first power restoration designation command indicating that the customer is waiting for a customer is received. Patterns 04 to 06 that are determined when receiving a second power restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable display or a third power restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. 07 to 09 are set.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 have no return abnormality, and the first movable member 73 moves in the order of small descent→return to origin→large descent→return to origin. , the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement→return to origin, and during that period, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up (light up) in blue and white.
The "initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and the first movable member 73 does not operate, and the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement→origin return, During that period, the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and after the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent→origin return→large descent→origin return, the second movable member 74 does not operate, and the first movable member LED lights (lights up) in blue and white during that period.

"Initial operation pattern 04" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the initial operation is performed except that the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue. Same as pattern 01.
"Initial operation pattern 05" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 except that the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 06" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and the second movable member LED does not light up in blue.

"Initial operation pattern 07" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, except that the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off. It is the same as initial operation pattern 01 or initial operation pattern 04 .
"Initial operation pattern 08" is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 or the initial operation pattern 05 except that it is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality and the second movable member 74 is turned off.
"Initial operation pattern 09" is the same as the initial operation pattern 03 or the initial operation pattern 06 except that it is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality and the first movable member 73 is turned off.

In the initial operation pattern 02, the initial operation pattern 05, and the initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described. This is because the member LED blinks in red to notify an abnormality.

In addition, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the second movable member LED is not described. This is because the member LED blinks in red to notify an abnormality.

A first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The first movable member and the second movable member have the same operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) in the initial operation. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the board accessory.

It should be noted that the operation mode of the initial operation is the same as long as the movement pattern of the board accessory is the same at least in each process, and the operation time in each process may be the same, or the operation time in each process may be the same. can be different.

Further, the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. The operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of both the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

Further, when the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and/or the second movable member 74 is to be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, the power is turned on. An operation not included in the initial operation at power restoration may be performed in the initial operation at power recovery, or an operation not included in the initial operation at power recovery may be performed in the initial operation at power on. In this way, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes possible.

A second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that the board accessories (first movable member 73, second The difference is that the initial light emission during the initial operation of the movable member 74) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

A third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Although they are the same, they are different in the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

It should be noted that the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored when the customer waiting state is restored, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is different. However, on the contrary, when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is made different, while the light emission mode of the second movable member LED is different. The light emission mode of the initial light emission may be the same.

Also, both the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED are made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored when the state is restored to the customer waiting state. good too. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

A fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply to restore the customer waiting state, the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply during the variable display of the special symbols, or during the jackpot game.

It should be noted that both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are extinguished during the variable display of the special symbols or when the power supply is restored during the jackpot game. The member LED and the second movable member LED may be lit in the same light emission manner as when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state.

A sixth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. If the movable member 74 has no return abnormality, the second movable member 74 is initialized without performing the initial movement of the first movable member 73, and if the first movable member 73 has no return abnormality, the second movable member The point is that when there is a return abnormality in 74, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is performed and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation according to the presence or absence of the recovery abnormality.

(Frame Accessory Initial Operation Pattern Decision Table)
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17).

The type of power-on command and the selected initial operation pattern are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described as a reference. ing.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when a power-on designation command is received, and the production button 17 operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin → intermittent vibration, and during that period, the production button LED Lights up (lights up) in order of red → green → blue.
"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power supply restoration designation command indicating that it is in the state of waiting for customers is received, and the production button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, During that period, the production button lights up (lights up) in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when receiving a second power restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or a third power restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress, The production button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, and the production button LED is turned off during that period.

Regarding the continuous vibration time (2.5 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2.5 seconds) of the production button 17, the vibration time of the vibration production executed during the fluctuation production Vibration effect, Vibration effect during step-up notice effect, Vibration effect during simulated continuous effect, Vibration effect during development effect, Vibration effect during cut-in effect, Vibration effect during decision effect, Vibration effect during re-lottery effect, It is a different time from the vibration production at the time of confirmation production).

The first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. (Production button 17) differs in the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

As a second feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51, the initial action of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on executes an action that is not the initial action of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. The point is that it is designed to Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

It should be noted that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 may be the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. By doing so, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame object.

A third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. is different in the light emission mode of the initial light emission. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

A fourth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

In addition, during the variable display of special symbols, or at the time of power restoration during the jackpot game, the production button LED is turned off, but it is the same as at the time of power restoration in which the production button LED is restored to the customer waiting state. You may make it light up in a light emission mode.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is the number of luminous colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on, and the luminous color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. One point is that the numbers are different. Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

Although the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, the opposite may be done.

As a sixth feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it contains an emission color that is not found in Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

It should be noted that the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power restoration may include a emission color that is not included in the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power-on.

As a seventh feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. This is different from the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates during the operation effect executed by operating the button 17. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the vibration is the initial action of the effect button 17 .

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it is executed over the initial action of the effect button 17 where the detection of is performed. Therefore, the confirmation of the operation of the performance button 17 and the confirmation of the operation of the button vibration motor can be performed at the same time, and the time required for confirmation of the operation can be shortened.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power-on with initialization of main RAM 110c.

Power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c includes power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed, and power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process. However, here, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T8, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

At the timing of T9, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T10, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with the second movable member 74 having a return abnormality, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. Operation processing is started, and initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball enters the first start port 45. When the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning prize is received, the first reservation number in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon display The first suspension icon is displayed in the area 70B, the sub-first suspension display 83 is in a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Then, the second movable member 74 starts its return operation. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball enters the first start port 45. When the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning prize is received, the first reservation number in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon display The first suspension icon is displayed in the area 70B, the sub-first suspension display 83 is in a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the production button after turning on the power)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the effect button LED blinks red ( (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission.

When the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed at timing T5, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is completed at timing T6, the initial movement process ends. Then, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and turn on during customer waiting (white lighting). When the time elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the sound becomes silent.

At the timing of T8, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 55, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without changing the setting has been described. In the case of power-on, after the initial screen is displayed, the effect control board 130 receives the setting change designation command, so that the setting change screen is displayed, and then the power-on designation command is received by the effect control board 130. By doing so, the first standby screen is displayed, and the return action and initial action of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are started. Note that the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a specific example in which there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

At the timing of T8, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with the second movable member 74 having a return abnormality, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. Operation processing is started, and initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 A winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is restored)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Then, the second movable member 74 starts its return operation. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED light up in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 A winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the production button after the power is restored)
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the effect button LED blinks red ( (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission.

When the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed at timing T5, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is completed at timing T6, the initial movement process ends. Then, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and turn on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved memory)
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and with reserved storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished, and the image display device displays a return-in-progress screen containing the characters "Please restart the game." , the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving the special figure pending number designation command (first special figure pending number = 3, second pending number = 0) as a power ON command, the image display device displays the screen during recovery. A state is maintained in which the second reserved number is not displayed in the one special figure reserved number display area 70E or the second special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the first sub-suspension display 83 has a display mode indicating "3", and the second sub-suspension display 84 has a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T5, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T7, the second When the initial motion of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial motion processing ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T8, when a special symbol stop designation command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device stops displaying the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ ( A still screen (same as the second standby screen) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs a stop sound "Don♪".

At this time, three first suspended icons are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "2". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "2".

In addition, when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and there is no pending memory, "0" is displayed on the first sub-holding display 83 at the timing of T2, and the timing of T9. The flow of the basic operation from the timing of T1 to the timing of T8 is the same, except that the variable effect is not started by receiving the customer waiting state designation command in .

(Concrete example when the power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

If the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case in which power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, the command A third case, in which the connector of the communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state), etc., will be described here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the effect control board 130 is started without power supply to the main control board 110 . At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the characters "Reading" is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed, the effect control board 130 responds to the command. It will be in a control state in which it is possible to execute the production.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for initializing the control state of the game is performed, and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 is started even though the control state is such that the performance corresponding to the command can be executed. , and the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed. Further, the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ). After that, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

Although the first standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power-on designation command, the dark display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately. The first standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the first standby screen.

(Concrete example when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

If the power restoration designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case in which the power supply (only the main power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, the command communication line There is a third case where the connector is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state), etc., but the first case will be described here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the effect control board 130 is started without power supply to the main control board 110 . At this time, as the initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the characters "Reading" is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the effect control board 130 responds to the command. It becomes a control state in which it is possible to execute the production.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed, and a power restoration specifying command for customer waiting is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command, the origin return processing is started, and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed. Also, the audio output device 9 is in a silent state.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

Although the second standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power restoration designation command, the dark display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately. The second standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the second standby screen.

In addition, although the voice output device 9 was set to be in a silent state when the power restoration designation command was received, a notification sound (alert, etc.) is output to indicate (make it possible to grasp) that the power has been turned on. You may do so. In this case, the same alarm as when the power-on designation command is received may be issued, or a different alarm may be issued.

(Concrete example when the command at power-on cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power ON command cannot be received normally, the effect control board 130 is supplied with power, but the main control board 110 is not supplied with power. There are a second case in which the command communication line to the substrate 130 is disconnected, and a third case in which the connector of the command communication line is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state). Case 3 will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the characters "reading" is displayed.

At the timing of T2, while the effect control board 130 does not receive the power ON command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110, the special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation and the second pending number = 0), the image display device maintains the state where the initial screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED turn off. maintain.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. The state is maintained, but the first sub-suspension display 83 changes to the display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the prize winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T4, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays a production symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. , And, the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (stationary display) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable effect (the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ, the movement of the reserved icon or the icon output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example 1 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 64 shows that only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in the case of resuming after stopping;

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is the case where the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then contacted due to an external factor. , the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state), and then the connector is in a connected state. mentioned.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed. A certain "753" production pattern 70a and a special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), or a second standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed. The member LED and effect button LED are lit while the customer is waiting.

In addition, when the timing of T1 is the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device , the standby screen in which the losing effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed. , Sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure The hold indicator 86) also maintains its display contents.

Even if only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is displayed (regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect), the customer waiting state designation command When the demonstration standby time elapses after the reception or after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration, the customer-waiting demonstration is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is initialized and the game control state is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays the power supply instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen. The first standby screen is displayed in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of insertion, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). It is clear." is output.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the variable performance (losing variation performance) after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and the jackpot performance (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) Timing of T4 even when only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed during the control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as being executed. The screen displayed on the image display device before receiving the power-on designation command is a variable effect screen (losing variable effect screen, jackpot variable effect screen) or a jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen ), the power supply to the main control board 110 during the customer waiting state is stopped and then restarted. 17), the return operation and the initialization operation are performed, and an initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, and the like.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will take place.

(Concrete example 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 65 shows that only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in the case of resuming after stopping.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 A case will be described where the main power supply is restarted while the main power supply is stopped and the backup power supply continues.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed. A certain "753" production pattern 70a and a special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), or a second standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed. The member LED and effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various roles, the image display device displays a failure. A standby screen in which the shown production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and displays sub-information. Device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 ) also retains the displayed content.

It should be noted that even if the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect, or When the demonstration standby time elapses (after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration effect), the customer-waiting demonstration effect is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen, the image display device displays the A second standby screen is displayed in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 becomes silent.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will take place.

(Concrete example 3 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 66 shows that the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the variation effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process is completed (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only supply is stopped and then restarted;

Here, during the execution of the variable production, which is one of the control states in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply A case in which the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At timing T1, the variable effect is being executed, the image display device displays the variable effect screen, and the audio output device 9 outputs variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during variation. In addition, the sub-first variable display 81 is performing variable display, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is displaying the pending number "1".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the variation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display content. .

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state where the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, The sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a returning screen including characters "Please restart the game." The audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first suspension display 83, sub second suspension display 84, Sub normal figure fluctuation indicator 85, sub normal figure reservation indicator 86) maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and turned off, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the second movable Initial operation of member 74 is initiated.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display is performed in the loss of the variable effect. At this time, in the image display device, the stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the production pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed). is displayed, and the stop sound "Don♪" is output from the audio output device 9. In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, the first sub-variation display 81 is in a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that there is a loss.

In addition, when the result of this time's variable performance becomes a big hit, when the performance control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command, the determination display of the big hit of the variable performance is performed. At this time, on the image display device, a confirmation screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a such as "777", which is a big hit effect symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the first sub-variation display 81 is displayed. Then, it becomes a jackpot display mode indicating that it is a jackpot.

At the timing of T11, when the variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is "0 ”, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

At the timing of T6, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED will be in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. By adopting a mode, it may be made possible to grasp that the power supply restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a recovery abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will take place.

In addition, even if the execution time of the variable production recognized by the production control board 130 has passed before receiving the special figure stop designation command, the temporary stop display and the stop display of the production pattern 70a are not performed. , the variable display on the first sub-variable display and the second sub-variable display will not end.

(Concrete example 4 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 67 shows that the power supply to the main control board 110 during execution of the jackpot effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only supply is stopped and then restarted;

Here, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is executed during the execution of the jackpot performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command. A case in which the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, and the image display device displays the jackpot effect (round effect) screen, and the right-hand hit is displayed on the upper right of the screen. A right-handed shot image MU is displayed, and a jackpot special symbol TZ ("777") is stopped (statically displayed) at the bottom right of the screen. In addition, "1" is displayed as the first reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, the sub-first variation display 81 displays the big win (lights up).

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display content. .

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, The sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for the middle of the jackpot transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the origin of the effect button 17 A return motion to the position is initiated.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a big win including characters "Please restart the game (during the big win)". While the return-in-progress screen for intermediate use is displayed and the audio output device 9 is silent, the sub information display device 80 (sub first change display 81, sub second change display 82, sub first hold display 83, Sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure holding display 86) maintains the display contents.

It should be noted that instead of displaying the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot, the same during-return screen as when the power supply (only the main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during the variation performance shown in FIG. 66 is displayed. You may do so.

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and turned off, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the second movable Initial operation of member 74 is initiated.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the big hit effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot performance (round performance) screen instead of a normal jackpot performance screen, and the jackpot special pattern TZ ("777") is not displayed.

In addition, "1" is displayed as the first reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F. Furthermore, the sound output device 9 outputs a big hit effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during the big win.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead. Then, a normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

It should be noted that when the effect control board 130 receives the ending designation command, not when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command while the special jackpot effect screen is being displayed, the normal ending effect is performed. A screen will appear.

Also, when a round number designation command is received while the special jackpot performance screen is being displayed, instead of switching to the normal jackpot performance screen, the special jackpot performance is continued until the performance control board 130 receives the ending designation command. The screen may be continued, or a special jackpot performance screen may be continued until the performance control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a variation start command after the jackpot game ends.

Also, at the timing of T6, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED go into the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but they are extinguished or set to a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. , it may be made possible to grasp that the power supply restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a recovery abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will take place.

In FIGS. 64 to 67, when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial motions of various roles may be performed without performing the return motions.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of production patterns 70a are the first combination. When the first initial effect pattern ("135") is displayed and the game control state is restored, the second initial effect pattern (" 753”) is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting resumption of power supply is performed before displaying the production pattern 70a on the image display device. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device when restoring to the customer waiting state (display of the initial screen only), and during the variable display of special symbols and without / with hold memory Restoration The display mode of the specific display (initial screen+recovery screen display) to be displayed later on the image display device is made different. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the pending icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, second pending icon display area 70D), and the sub pending display (sub first pending display It is possible to perform a pending display indicating the number of pending memories on each of the device 83 and the second sub-holding display 84), and the power supply stopped in the state where there is a pending memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, while the image display device is performing a specific display (recovery screen display) that suggests restarting the power supply, the hold display is not executed in the hold icon display area, but the hold display is executed in the sub hold display. It is possible. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. becomes.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration effect is restarted and the game control state is restored, the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen is displayed in a state in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped (still displayed). Therefore, there is no need to be conscious of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the processing load related to display control is reduced when the game control state is restored after the power supply is restarted. It becomes possible to

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the sub-variation display device (first sub-variation display device 81, second sub-variation display device 82) restarts the supply of power that was stopped during the variation effect. When the control state of the game is restored by doing, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed (the screen during recovery is displayed), the variable display ( flashing display) is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after restarting the power supply.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed (displaying the screen during recovery) when the control state of the game is restored, the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the sub-suspension display (sub-first suspension display 83, sub-second suspension display 84) displays the returning screen on the image display device. It is designed to be a display mode showing the number of reservations from when (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variation display and when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command). Therefore, the player can grasp the number of pending games immediately after the game control state is restored, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when the sub-variation display (the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82) performs a variable display (blinking display) while the recovery screen is being displayed on the image display device, In accordance with the start of this variable display, the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) may display the number of holdings. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed when the control state of the game is restored, and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as in the case, that is, at the timing when the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (timing when the initial screen ends), the return operation of various roles is performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid complicating the control related to the return operation of various character objects, and to reduce the processing load related to the return operation of various character objects.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, various accessories (first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17), the light-emitting portions of various accessories (the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, the effect button LED) are turned off. ing. Therefore, it can be distinguished from the initial motion of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the return motion is in progress.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, when there is a recovery abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light-emitting part of the accessory with the recovery abnormality flashes red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, anomaly notification is performed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the accessory having the return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, when the abnormality is notified by flashing red the light-emitting part of the character having the return abnormality, the display is continued until the next variable effect is started. The anomaly notification continues. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the role, a return operation may be performed for returning the role having the return abnormality to the origin position at the timing when the next variable effect is started. Further, in the case where the abnormality notification is performed by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device. From the timing after (when the return operation is completed immediately, the timing at which the production pattern 70a is displayed), the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) However, when the power supply stopped during the variable display of the special symbols is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the timing before the production symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (display of the screen during recovery middle) to perform the initial actions of various roles. Therefore, it is possible to perform initial actions of various roles at appropriate timing according to the state when power supply occurs.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the board components (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) are turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, and the initialization of the main RAM 110c is performed. In the case of power supply restoration without accompanying, when the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device (during the fluctuation display of the special symbol and before the display of the production symbol 70a), the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83 , and the second sub-holding display 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of holdings, and then the initial operation is performed. Therefore, the initial action of the board role can be performed after the player grasps the number of pending games (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, regarding the frame role (effect button 17), when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, , When the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device (during the variable display of the special symbol and before the display of the production symbol 70a), the sub-suspension display device (sub-first suspension display device 83, sub-second suspension display device 84 ) becomes a display mode indicating the number of pending, the initial operation is performed. Therefore, the initial action of the frame role can be performed after the player has grasped the number of reservations (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. From the same timing as when the performance design 70a is displayed on the image display device (when the return operation is completed immediately, the timing at which the performance design 70a is displayed) to the initial stage of various roles It is designed to work. Therefore, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the initial motions of various roles and reduce the processing load of the initial motions of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, even when the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the production pattern 70a is output. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, when power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the initial screen is simply displayed to restore various characters. Action, initial action, and initial light emission are not executed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that an abnormality has occurred in which the power ON command cannot be received.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, even when the initial screen is displayed due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), the effect When the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to the command, when a special figure reservation number designation command based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is received from the main control board 110, a winning sound is generated. It is designed to output. Therefore, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has entered the starting hole.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, even when the initial screen is displayed due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), the effect When the control board 130 receives a variable start command from the main control board 110 while the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect corresponding to the command, the variable effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. there is Therefore, the start of the variable performance is executed without delay, and the variable performance can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbols.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, even when the initial screen is displayed due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), the effect When a variable start command is received from the main control board 110 when the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to the command, the variable effect is performed without executing the return action or the initial action of various characters. is set to run. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect using various accessories without being hindered by a return motion or an initial motion during execution of a variable effect.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the effect control board 130 is in response to the command, such as the return operation of various characters and the customer waiting state after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed. Even during the control state in which it is possible to execute the corresponding effect, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation. When the command is received again, the return action of various characters and the initial action (including initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the production control board 130 is already in the process of changing production after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, in response to the command. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. is received again, the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, even during the jackpot game after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed, the main control board 110 If a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting only the power supply to , the return operation of various roles and the initial operation ( including initial light emission). Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, it is possible for the effect control board 130 to execute the effect according to the command, such as during the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in this state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It's like Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the effect control board 130 responds to the command during the jackpot game (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state in which it is possible to execute the effect shown above, when the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110 , the initialization notification sound is output again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the reset operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are not executed, but the initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9. You can also just output the .

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the effect control board 130 is in response to the command, such as the return operation of various characters and the customer waiting state after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed. Even during a control state in which it is possible to execute a corresponding effect, the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110. In this case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It's like Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Even in the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended or during the jackpot game, the main control board When the power supply to 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed, and the first standby screen is displayed. ing. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the production control board 130 is already in the process of changing production after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, in response to the command. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power restoration designation command When it is received, the screen during recovery is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the performance control board 130 is already in response to the command, such as during the jackpot performance after the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power restoration designation command When it is received, the initial screen is not displayed, and the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot is displayed. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, the effect control board 130 executes the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect or during the jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state in which the power supply is possible, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is displayed. The first standby screen is displayed without displaying, and when the power restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110 again, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, during the control state (customer waiting state, variable production, jackpot production) in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the production Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 stops while the power supply to the control board 130 continues, the display screen up to that point can be displayed continuously. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 52 to 67, during the control state (customer waiting state, variable production, jackpot production) in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the production Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the control board 130 is continued and then the power supply is restarted, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. . Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Modification 1 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 68 shows that only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification 1 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is performed during the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command. A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed. A certain "753" effect symbol 70a and a second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) are displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, when the timing of T1 is the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device , the standby screen is displayed in a state in which the losing effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed).

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub Information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation display device 86) also maintains the displayed content.

In addition, even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the fluctuation effect, or (after the end of the customer waiting demonstration), the customer waiting demonstration is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, instead of the second standby screen, the image display device displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are extinguished. do.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub The general pattern holding display 86) is hidden.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and instead of the initial screen, the image display device displays the initial pattern "135" when the power is turned on. A first standby screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 issues an initialization notification consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". A sound is output.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED light up in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the customer waiting demo production after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and during the execution of the fluctuation production (losing fluctuation production, jackpot fluctuation production) and the jackpot Even if only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 stops and then resumes during the performance (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 is changed. 65 to 67 except that it is a customer waiting demo production screen, a fluctuation production screen (losing fluctuation production screen, jackpot fluctuation production screen), and a jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen). It is basically the same as the example shown.

(Modification 2 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 69 shows that only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example 2 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned off during the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. A description will be given of a case where the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply is still continuing.

At the timing of T1, if there is already a waiting state for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device shows the initial pattern at the time of power restoration. A second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), or a customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and effect button LED are lit while the customer is waiting.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various roles, the image display device displays a failure. A standby screen in which the shown production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and displays sub-information. Device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 ) also retains the displayed content.

In addition, even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the fluctuation effect, or (after the end of the customer waiting demonstration), the customer waiting demonstration is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the process for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are extinguished.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub The general pattern holding display 86) is hidden.

At the timing of T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and instead of the initial screen, the image display device displays the initial pattern "753" at the time of power restoration. , and the second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) are displayed.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

In addition, during the execution of the customer waiting demo production after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and during the execution of the fluctuation production (losing fluctuation production, jackpot fluctuation production) and the jackpot Even when the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the performance (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 is changed. 65 to 67 except that it is a customer waiting demo production screen, a fluctuation production screen (losing fluctuation production screen, jackpot fluctuation production screen), and a jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen). It is basically the same as the example shown.

In FIGS. 68 and 69, when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial motions of various roles may be performed without performing the return motions.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 68 to 69, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the standby screen on which the production pattern 70a is displayed is different from the standby screen. It is designed to switch to the initial screen. Therefore, it becomes possible to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Further, according to the modifications shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed while the initial screen is being displayed. , and the production button LED is turned off. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, instead of starting the initial action of various characters from the timing when the initial screen switches to the standby screen, the various characters start at the timing when the initial screen switches to the initial screen, or between the timing when the initial screen switches to the standby screen. may be started.

In addition, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the standby screen is switched to the initial screen when the power ON command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received. You may make it switch to a screen. In this case, the initial action of each character may be started at the timing when the standby screen is switched to the initial screen, or at the timing before the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, or when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen. At the switching timing, the initial actions of various roles may be started.

Further, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the initial screen may be displayed after switching from the standby screen to the non-display state. In this case, the initial actions of various characters may be started at the timing of switching from the non-display state to the initial screen, or at the timing from the timing of switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or from the initial screen to the standby screen. At the timing of switching to , the initial actions of various roles may be started.

(Modified example in the case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a modification in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with the second movable member 74 having a return abnormality, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red to notify that the return abnormality has occurred. (Abnormality notification mode), the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed. The initial operation process ends without executing the operation.

At the timing of T6, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T7, the game ball enters the first start port 45 When the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning prize is received, the first reservation number in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon display The first suspension icon is displayed in the area 70B, the sub-first suspension display 83 is in a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display device 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED The LED and effect button LED are lit during variation, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is in a display mode showing "0".

Even if the first movable member 73 has a restoration abnormality when the power is turned on, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the restoration abnormality. , the first movable member 73, and the second movable member 74 are completed without executing the initial movement.

Further, even when the power supply is restored, if there is a restoration abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED inform the occurrence of the restoration abnormality. In order to do so, the red blinking (abnormality notification mode) is performed, and the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 .

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIG. 70, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, not only the movable member with the return abnormality but also the return abnormality occurs. The initial operation is not executed for any movable member that does not have one. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that one movable member collides with the other movable member and breaks down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable member (particularly, the movable member in which the return abnormality does not occur) from becoming inoperable during the execution of the game (fluctuation effect, jackpot game), thereby reducing the enjoyment of the game. can be prevented.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 70, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED flashes in red to notify recovery failure. Therefore, compared with the case where only the movable member LED provided for one of the movable members having the return abnormality is blinking in red, it is possible to easily recognize that the movable member has an abnormality.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 70, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member The effect button 17 that has no danger of colliding with the member 74 is designed to perform an initial action. Therefore, the operation of the effect button 17 can be confirmed, and the abnormality of the effect button 17 can be grasped.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 70, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the production button LED provided in the production button 17 is restored. Initial light emission is performed instead of red flashing for announcing an abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that the effect button 17 has not returned abnormally.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the initial action process may be terminated without executing the initial action for the presentation button 17 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may flash red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Further, when the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the initial action process may be ended without executing the initial action of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may flash red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

(Modified example of accessory initial processing of lamp control unit)
A modification of the accessory initial processing of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a modification of the accessory initial processing of the lamp control unit 150. FIG.
Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same processes as the role product initial process shown in FIG. 47, and the description thereof is omitted, and the different processes will be described.

In step R101A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not there is a power ON flag to be set in the lamp RAM 150c when power supply is started. If there is no power ON flag, the process proceeds to step R102A, and if there is a power ON flag, the power ON flag is cleared in step R101B.

In step R102A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received. , the process moves to step R102B, and if the power-on command is not received, the process moves to step R104.

In step R102B, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on. If a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds, which should have completed the restoration operation and the initial operation since the power was turned on last time) has passed, the process proceeds to step R103, and the predetermined period of time has not passed. In that case, the process moves to step R104.

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a executes origin return processing of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the initial processing number updated in each processing of the accessory initial processing. is set to "1".

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 71, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories are started. Therefore, it is not necessary to be conscious of whether the control state of the game is initialized or whether the control state of the game is restored. can be reduced.

Further, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 71, after a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started, a power-on command (power-on designation command, power recovery) When a designated command) is received, the return action of various characters and the initial action are performed again. Therefore, the main control board 110 was not started normally, and the power-on command was transmitted later than usual (abnormality occurred in the power line from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110). can be grasped.

Note that when a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received, regardless of the elapsed time since the power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started, the return operation of various characters, and , the initial operation may be performed. In this way, the player does not have to be conscious of the elapsed time since the power supply to the game machine 1 was started, and it becomes possible to simplify the processing when the power ON command is received.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 72 shows various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, assuming the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. and FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality.

Power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c includes power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed, and power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process. However, here, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change to alternately turn on red and white. Then, the lighting mode of the effect button LED changes and lights up in order of red→green→blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during customer waiting (white light). Become. At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T8, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c, assuming the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return-to-origin process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. . In addition, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of recovery abnormality.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light red and white, and the effect button LED turns red → Lights up in order of green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial motion of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial motion of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial motion processing is performed without executing the initial motion of the second movable member 74. finish.

At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c, assuming the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is finished with the return abnormality occurring in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a command when the power is turned on, which is transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the second movable member LED changes to alternately light red and white. , the light emission mode of the effect button LED changes and lights up in order of red→green→blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial action process is performed without executing the initial action of the first movable member 73. finish.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the production button after turning on the power)
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the performance button 17 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c, assuming the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the restoration operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where the production button 17 has a return abnormality, the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of recovery abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change to alternately turn on red and white. do.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At timing T4, when the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting). At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 75, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without changing the setting has been described. When the power is turned on, after the dark screen (initial screen) is displayed, the effect control board 130 receives the setting change designation command, so that the setting change screen is displayed, and then the power-on designation command is effected. When the substrate 130 receives the signal, the first standby screen is displayed, and the return action and initial action of various accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the production button 17) are started. . Note that the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power restoration)
Assuming the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 71, FIG. 76 shows various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) after power recovery without initialization of main RAM 110c. ) is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as a power-on time command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light blue and white. At the same time, the light emitting modes of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED change to light up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during customer waiting (white light). Become.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c, assuming the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. .

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return-to-origin process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. . At this time, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and turns on alternately in blue and white, producing a production The light emission mode of the button LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial motion of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial motion of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial motion processing is performed without executing the initial motion of the second movable member 74. When the process ends, the first movable member LED and the effect button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is restored)
FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c, assuming the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. .

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished.
In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is finished with the return abnormality occurring in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the second movable member LED and the effect button LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting modes of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED change and light up in blue. .

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial action process is performed without executing the initial action of the first movable member 73. When the process ends, the first movable member LED and the effect button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the production button after the power is restored)
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the performance button 17 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initializing the main RAM 110c, assuming the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the restoration operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where the production button 17 has a return abnormality, the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and turns on alternately in blue and white. 2 The light emission mode of the movable member LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At timing T4, when the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved memory)
FIG. 80 shows a modified example of the role product initial processing shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a case.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and turns on alternately in blue and white, The light emission modes of the second movable member LED and the production button LED change and light up in blue. At this time, the image display device displays a recovery-in-progress screen including characters of "Please restart the game", and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving the special figure pending number designation command (first special figure pending number = 3, second pending number = 0) as a power ON command, the image display device displays the screen during recovery. A state is maintained in which the second reserved number is not displayed in the one special figure reserved number display area 70E or the second special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode showing "3", and the second sub-suspension indicator 84 and the sub-normal figure suspension indicator 86 become a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial motion processing ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off.

At the timing of T7, when a special symbol stop designation command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device stops displaying the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ ( A stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in a static display state is displayed, and a stop sound is output from the audio output device 9 .

At this time, three first suspended icons are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "2". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "2".

(Concrete example when the power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, assuming the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG.

If the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case in which power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, the command A third case, in which the connector of the communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state), etc., will be described here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power is not supplied to the main control board 110 and power supply is started. Then, the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 is in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial motion processing is started, the initial motion of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started, and the initial motion of the effect button 17 is started. At timing T5, when the initial action of the effect button 17 is completed, and at T5 the initial action of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the time T6, the second movable When the initial action of the member 74 is finished, the initial action process is finished, and the effect control board 130 enters a control state in which the effect corresponding to the command can be executed.

At the timing of T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for initializing the control state of the game is performed and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 is started even though the control state is such that the performance corresponding to the command can be executed. , and the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

After that, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in red and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED light up in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T9, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T10, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. After that, when the initialization notification sound output period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the sound becomes silent.

Although the first standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power-on designation command, the dark display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately. The first standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the first standby screen.

(Concrete example when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, assuming the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG.

If the power restoration designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case in which the power supply (only the main power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, the command communication line There is a third case where the connector is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state), etc., but the first case will be described here.

Note that the timing from T1 to T7 is the same as the timing from T1 to T7 in FIG. 81, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T7 will be described.

At the timing of T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed and a power restoration designation command is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 is started even though the control state is such that the effect corresponding to the command can be executed. , and the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 remains silent.

After that, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED and effect button LED are lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T9, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T10, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. Lights up (lights up in white).

Although the second standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power restoration designation command, the dark display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately. The second standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds).

In addition, although the audio output device 9 is set to be in a silent state when a power restoration designation command is received, an information sound (alert, etc.) indicating that the power has been turned on (to be comprehensible) is emitted for a predetermined period. You may make it output over (for example, 30 seconds). In this case, the same alarm as when the power-on designation command is received may be issued, or a different alarm may be issued.

In FIGS. 81 and 82, when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial motions of various roles may be performed without performing the return motions.

(Concrete example when the command at power-on cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 83 shows a specific example of a case where the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, assuming the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing;

When the power supply restoration designation command cannot be received normally, the case where power is not supplied to the main control board 110, the case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, the command communication line connector is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state).

Note that the timing from T1 to T5 is the same as the timing from T1 to T5 in FIG. 81, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T5 will be described.

At the timing of T5, while the effect control board 130 does not receive the first power restoration designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number, and , second pending number=0), the image display device maintains the state where the initial screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T6, when the initial motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial motion processing ends, and the display mode of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED changes and turns off. becomes.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. However, the first sub-suspension display 83 changes to a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays a production symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. , And, the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (stationary display) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable effect (the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ, the movement of the reserved icon or the icon output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Assuming the modified example of the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 71, FIG. 84 shows the customer waiting state (main control board 110 and effect control board 130 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during power supply to the main control board 110. FIG.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is the case where the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then contacted due to an external factor. , the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state), and then the connector is in a connected state. mentioned.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the returning operation of various characters and the initial operation are completed, and the image display device displays the initial symbol "753" at the time of power restoration. 70a and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button are displayed. The LED is lit while the customer is waiting.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first 1 fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure holding display 86) also display contents maintain.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in red and white as initial light emission, the effect button LED is lit in white as initial light emission, and the image display device is powered on. The first standby screen is displayed in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of insertion, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). It is clear." is output.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the return-to-origin process ends, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the variable performance (losing variation performance) after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and the jackpot performance (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) Timing of T4 even when only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed during the control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as being executed. The screen displayed on the image display device before receiving the power-on designation command is a variable effect screen (losing variable effect screen, jackpot variable effect screen) or a jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen ), the power supply to the main control board 110 during the customer waiting state is stopped and then restarted. 17), the return operation and the initialization operation are performed, and an initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, and the like.

In addition, when there is an abnormality in various roles, as in the specific examples shown in FIGS. will be done.

(Concrete example 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 85 shows a customer waiting state (main control board 110 and effect control board 130 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during power supply to the main control board 110. FIG.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 A case will be described where the main power supply is restarted while the main power supply is stopped and the backup power supply continues.

At the timing of T1, if there is already a waiting state for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device shows the initial pattern at the time of power restoration. A second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), or a customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and effect button LED are lit while the customer is waiting.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various roles, the image display device displays a failure. A standby screen in which the shown production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 ) also retains the displayed content.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

It should be noted that even if the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect, or When the demonstration standby time elapses (after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration effect), the customer-waiting demonstration effect is started.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command as a power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, the first movable member 73, and the effect button 17. return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission, the effect button LED lights in white as initial light emission, On the image display device, instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen, the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). A second standby screen of status is displayed.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return motion of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return processing is performed. After the end, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. Lights up (lights up in white).

In addition, when there is a recovery abnormality in various roles, the initial operation and initial light emission of various roles are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

(Concrete example 3 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Assuming the modified example of the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 71, FIG. 86 shows that the variation effect is being executed after the origin return process and the initial action process are completed (main control board 110 and effect control 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during power supply to the board 130). FIG.

Here, during the execution of the variable production, which is one of the control states in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply A case in which the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At timing T1, the variable effect is being executed, the image display device displays the variable effect screen, and the audio output device 9 outputs variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during variation. In addition, the sub-first variable display 81 is performing variable display, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is displaying the pending number "1".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the variation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display content. .

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state where the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, The sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission, the effect button LED lights in white as initial light emission, On the image display device, a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game" is displayed, and the audio output device 9 is silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub The second fluctuation display 82, the first sub-suspension display 83, the second sub-suspension display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub-normal figure suspension display 86) maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T5, when the return motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the return-to-origin process ends, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off. becomes.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display is performed in the loss of the variable effect. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 is displayed. output a stop sound. In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, the first sub-variation display 81 is in a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that there is a loss.

In addition, when the result of this time's variable performance becomes a big hit, when the performance control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command, the determination display of the big hit of the variable performance is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a such as "777", which is a jackpot effect symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the first sub-variation display 81 is displayed. Then, a big win display mode is displayed to indicate that a big win has been made, and a stop sound is output from the audio output device 9 .

At the timing of T11, when the variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is "0 ”, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

Note that at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but may be extinguished or in a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. , it may be made possible to grasp that the power supply restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, as in the specific examples shown in FIGS. will be done.

In addition, even if the execution time of the variable production recognized by the production control board 130 has passed before receiving the special figure stop designation command, the temporary stop display and the stop display of the production pattern 70a are not performed. , the variable display on the first sub-variable display and the second sub-variable display will not end.

(Concrete example 4 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 87 is based on the modified example of the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 71, and the process of returning to origin and the execution of the jackpot effect after the initial operation process is completed (main control board 110 and effect control FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted while power is being supplied to the board 130;

Here, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is executed during the execution of the jackpot performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command. A case in which the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the big win effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, and the big win effect (round effect) screen is displayed on the image display device, and the big win special pattern TZ ("777") is displayed. is stopped (still displayed). In addition, "1" is displayed as the reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, the sub-first variation display 81 displays the big win (lights up).

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display content. .

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, The sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for the middle of the jackpot transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the origin of the effect button 17 A return motion to the position is initiated.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission, the effect button LED lights in white as initial light emission, On the image display device, a during-returning screen for during-jackpot including characters of "Please restart the game (during-jackpot)" is displayed, and the voice output device 9 becomes silent. In addition, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal A view hold indicator 86) maintains its display contents.

It should be noted that instead of displaying the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot, the same during-return screen as when the power supply (only the main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during the variation performance shown in FIG. 86 is displayed. You may do so.

At the timing of T5, when the return motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the return-to-origin process ends, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off. becomes.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the big hit effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot performance (round performance) screen instead of a normal jackpot performance screen, and the jackpot special pattern TZ ("777") is not displayed.

In addition, "1" is displayed as the reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F. Furthermore, the sound output device 9 outputs a big hit effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during the big win.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead. Then, a normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

It should be noted that when the effect control board 130 receives the ending designation command, not when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command while the special jackpot effect screen is being displayed, the normal ending effect is performed. A screen will appear.

Also, when a round number designation command is received while the special jackpot performance screen is being displayed, instead of switching to the normal jackpot performance screen, the special jackpot performance is continued until the performance control board 130 receives the ending designation command. The screen may be continued, or a special jackpot performance screen may be continued until the performance control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a variation start command after the jackpot game ends.

Also, at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but they are extinguished or in a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. , it may be made possible to grasp that the power supply restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, as in the specific examples shown in FIGS. will be done.

In FIGS. 84 to 87, when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial motions of various roles may be performed without performing the return motions.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of production symbols 70a are the first combination. When the first initial effect pattern ("135") is displayed and the game control state is restored, the second initial effect pattern (" 753”) is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting the restart of the power supply is performed before displaying the effect symbol 70a on the image display device. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device when restoring to the customer waiting state (display of the initial screen only), and during the variable display of special symbols and without / with hold memory Restoration The display mode of the specific display (initial screen+recovery screen display) to be displayed later on the image display device is made different. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the pending icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, second pending icon display area 70D), and the sub pending display (sub first pending display It is possible to perform a pending display indicating the number of pending memories on each of the device 83 and the second sub-holding display 84), and the power supply stopped in the state where there is a pending memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, while the image display device is performing a specific display (recovery screen display) that suggests restarting the power supply, the hold display is not executed in the hold icon display area, but the hold display is executed in the sub hold display. It is possible. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. becomes.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demo effect is restarted and the game control state is restored, the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen is displayed in a state in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped (still displayed). Therefore, there is no need to be conscious of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the processing load related to display control is reduced when the game control state is restored after the power supply is restarted. It becomes possible to

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the sub-variation display device (the first sub-variation display device 81 and the second sub-variation display device 82) resumes the supply of power that was stopped during the variation presentation. When the control state of the game is restored by doing, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed (the screen during recovery is displayed), the variable display ( flashing display) is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after restarting the power supply.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed (displaying the screen during recovery) when the control state of the game is restored, the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, for the sub-suspension displays (the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84), the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. It is designed to be a display mode showing the number of reservations from when (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variation display and when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command). Therefore, the player can grasp the number of pending games immediately after the game control state is restored, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when the sub-variation display (the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82) performs a variable display (blinking display) while the recovery screen is being displayed on the image display device, In accordance with the start of this variable display, the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) may display the number of holdings. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed when the control state of the game is restored, and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as the case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (timing when the initial screen is displayed), the return operation of various roles is performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid complicating the control related to the return operation of various character objects, and to reduce the processing load related to the return operation of various character objects.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, various accessories (first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17), the light-emitting portions of various accessories (the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, the effect button LED) are turned off. ing. Therefore, it can be distinguished from the initial motion of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the return motion is in progress.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, when there is a recovery abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light-emitting part of the accessory with the recovery abnormality flashes red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, anomaly notification is performed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the accessory having the return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, when the abnormality is notified by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the character having the return abnormality, the display is continued until the next variable effect is started. The anomaly notification continues. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the role, a return operation may be performed for returning the role having the return abnormality to the origin position at the timing when the next variable effect is started. Further, in the case where the abnormality notification is performed by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as the case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (timing when the initial screen is displayed), the initial actions of various roles are performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the initial motions of various roles and reduce the processing load of the initial motions of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the board accessories (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) are turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c and the initialization of the main RAM 110c is performed. In the case of power restoration without accompanying, the sub-suspension display (the first sub-suspension display 83, the second sub-suspension display 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of suspensions (the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device ), the initial operation is performed. Therefore, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the presentation is hindered by the initial motion of the board accessory. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, regarding the frame role (effect button 17), when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, , The initial operation is performed before the sub-suspension display (sub-first suspension display 83, sub-second suspension display 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of suspensions (the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device) It's like Therefore, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the performance is hindered by the initial motion of the frame role. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, even when the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the production pattern 70a is output. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, even when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the recovery operation, initial operation, Then, the display of the initial screen is continued while executing the initial light emission. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that an abnormality has occurred in which the power ON command cannot be received.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, even if the display of the initial screen is continued due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), When the special figure reservation number designation command based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is received from the main control board 110 when the performance control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing the performance according to the command, winning It is designed to output sound. Therefore, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has entered the starting hole.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the effect When receiving a variation start command from the main control board 110 after the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to the command, the variable effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. there is Therefore, the start of the variable performance is executed without delay, and the variable performance can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbols.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the performance control board 130, which is in the customer waiting state after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed, responds to the command. Even during the control state in which it is possible to execute the corresponding effect, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation. When the command is received again, the return action of various characters and the initial action (initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the production control board 130 is already in the process of changing production after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, in response to the command. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. is received again, the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the effect control board 130, such as during the jackpot game after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, responds to the command. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. is received again, the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. becomes possible

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, it is possible for the effect control board 130 to execute the effect according to the command, such as during the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in this state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It's like Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in this state, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 instead of executing the return operation, initial operation, and initial light emission of various characters. You can just do it.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the performance control board 130, which is in the customer waiting state after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed, responds to the command. Even during a control state in which it is possible to execute a corresponding effect, the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110. In this case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It's like Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

In addition, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as the returning operation of various roles and the variable effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed and the jackpot effect. Even in the state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed. The first standby screen is displayed. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the production control board 130 is already in the process of changing production after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, in response to the command. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power restoration designation command When it is received, the screen during recovery is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the effect control board 130 responds to the command, such as the return operation of various characters and the jackpot effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power restoration designation command When it is received, the initial screen is not displayed, and the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot is displayed. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, the effect control board 130 executes the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect or during the jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state in which the power supply is possible, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is displayed. The first standby screen is displayed without displaying, and when the power restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110 again, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, during the control state (customer waiting state, variable production, jackpot production) in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the production Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 stops while the power supply to the control board 130 continues, the display screen up to that point can be displayed continuously. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 72 to 87, during the control state (customer waiting state, variable production, jackpot production) in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the production Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the control board 130 is continued and then the power supply is restarted, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. . Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

The control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command are the customer waiting state, the variable effect, and the jackpot effect. The state of waiting for a command (for example, during display of the initial screen) may also be included in the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command.

(Concrete example when the connection state of various detection means changes)
FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b) are diagrams showing specific examples when the connection state of various detecting means changes during the customer waiting state.

Here, the wires from the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are combined into one connector, and this connector is connected to the connector of the main control board 110. and

First, FIG. 88(a) will be described.
FIG. 88(a) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first starting port detection switch 45a changes during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at the timing of T1. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the first standby screen in a state in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). .

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is half-inserted and only the first start port detection switch 45a is disconnected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a connection error. , and the effect control board 130 executes the connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays an error notification image EG containing the words "connection error detected" indicating that a connection error has occurred, and the audio output device 9 issues an alarm and a message "connection error". A connection error notification sound is output.

At timing T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the first start opening detection switch 45a returns to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the connection error has been released. However, the connection error notification continues until the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off.

Next, FIG. 88(b) will be described.
FIG. 88(b) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection states of the first starting door detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at the timing of T1. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the first standby screen in a state in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). .

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is inserted halfway and the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are disconnected, The main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error, and the performance control board 130 executes magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, and connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays the characters "Magnetic Error Detected" indicating the occurrence of a magnetic error, the characters "Radio Wave Error Detected" indicating the occurrence of a radio wave error, and the characters "Connection Error" indicating the occurrence of a connection error. An error annunciation image EG including the words "detected" is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs a magnetic error annunciation sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "Magnetic error".

At the timing of T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and the first starting port detection switch 45a return to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error have been cancelled, but various error reports continue until the game machine 1 is powered off.

In addition, when the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state, the occurrence of the connection error is not detected by the main control board 110, and the error Notification is not executed.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIG. When the sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a) change from the connected state to the disconnected state, an error is notified. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality (connector half-insertion, disconnection, fraudulent act), and to take prompt action.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, the specific detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) is non-operating. Even when the connected state returns to the connected state, the error notification of the magnetic error or the radio wave error continues until the power of the game machine 1 is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts with respect to the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, even if the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state, the error notification is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to continue the game as it is in a case where the possibility of cheating is low, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

It should be noted that even when the power supply to the game machine 1 is started while the specific detection means (the starting port detection switch, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a) connected to the main control board 110 is not connected. , During the display of the initial screen or after the end of the initial screen (at the start of display of the first standby screen or the second standby screen), various error notifications (connection error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) may be performed.

In this case, even if the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change from the unconnected state to the connected state, the error notification (magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) continues. The connection error notification may be canceled when the unconnected state changes to the connected state. By doing so, it is possible to continue the game as it is in a case where the possibility of fraudulent conduct is low, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the radio error notification sound associated with a radio wave error with a lower priority (importance) than a magnetic error and the connection error notification sound associated with a connection error with a lower priority (importance) than a radio error are If they occur at the same time, they are not output. However, it is also possible to output notification sounds related to the errors that have occurred in order.

In the magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, and connection error notification, the error notification sound may be output without displaying the error notification image EG, or the error notification image EG may be displayed and the error notification sound may be output. may not be output.

In addition, when the first starting opening detection switch 45a changes from the unconnected state to the connected state, the special figure determination information is acquired as the start winning prize is generated and the first special figure reservation number (U1) is increased, thereby special symbols (variation display of production design 70a, variation display of special design) may be executed.

(Concrete example when operating the operation unit while waiting for customers)
With reference to FIG. 89, a specific example of operating the operation unit (the effect button 17, the cross key 18) during the customer waiting state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), when shifting to a customer waiting state in which the variable effect and the jackpot effect are not executed, the effective suggestive effect (introduction effect) suggesting that the effective period may occur is not executed. Effective period during customer waiting during which operations of the production button 17 and cross key 18 are valid (Because the effective period during customer waiting is maintained until the variable production is started, it is can occur over a long period of time) is started.

At this time, in the lower right portion of the first image display device 70, a guide image AG (operation promotion image) is displayed to guide the game assistance function started by operating the effect button 17 and the cross key 18. FIG. Specifically, the first image (image imitating the effect button 17) suggesting that the menu display is performed by operating the effect button 17, and the volume can be adjusted by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key 18. and a third image suggesting that the light amount can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 18 (the left and right buttons are A light-colored image simulating the cross key 18) is displayed.

When the effect button 17 is operated in this state, as shown in FIG. 89(b), the effect button 17 does not vibrate, and the menu image MG is displayed so as to be superimposed in front of the effect pattern 70a, and the menu image MG is displayed. is output.

The menu image MG includes an "end" item for ending the menu display, a "model description" item for explaining the model, a "effect customization" item for setting the appearance rate of a predetermined effect (for example, a fixed effect, etc.), A "pachi log" item is set to manage the game history in cooperation with a mobile terminal (smartphone, etc.), and while the currently selected item is displayed in a light color, the currently unselected item is displayed in a dark color. It is now displayed.

When the effect button 17 is operated with the "End" item selected, the menu image MG is erased without vibrating the effect button 17 as shown in FIG. 89(c). Also, the sound for erasing the menu image MG is output, and the guide image AG is displayed again.

When the upper button of the cross key 18 is operated in this state, the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value is displayed without vibrating the effect button 17 or the cross key 18, as shown in FIG. 89(d). At the same time, a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 18 is operated while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value of the effect sound is updated by +1 without vibrating the effect button 17 or the cross key 18.例文帳に追加Then, the volume value image OG is updated to the volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and the confirmation sound is output with the volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses without the cross key 18 being operated in this state, the volume value image OG is erased and the guidance image AG is displayed again, as shown in FIG. 89(f). .

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 89, the production button 17 related to various advance notice effects (dialogue notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) that occurs during the variable effect. Even if the effect button 17 or the cross key 18 is operated during the customer waiting valid period that can occur over a period longer than the valid period, a vibration effect is provided to vibrate the effect button 17 (by vibrating the effect button 17). (including indirect vibration of the cross key 18 that is transmitted) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised when the performance button 17 or the cross key 18 is operated during the customer waiting state, and to avoid the inconvenience of giving the player an unpleasant feeling. becomes.

In addition, regarding the effective period of the cross key 18 related to the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment that occurs during the variable effect (variable display of special symbols) and the jackpot effect (jackpot game), various advance notice effects (lines) that occur during the variable effect It can occur over a period longer than the effective period of the advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.), but during the effective period of the cross key 18 related to volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment, , Even if the cross key 18 is operated, the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 17 (including the indirect vibration of the cross key 18 transmitted by the vibration of the effect button 17) is not executed. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised during the variable performance or the big winning performance, and to avoid the inconvenience of making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 89, regarding the valid period while waiting for a customer, the effective suggesting effect (introductory effect) suggesting that the effective period may occur before the effective period occurs is not executed. It's like Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming defensive even though the information beneficial to the player (the effect to expect the execution of the jackpot game) is not executed, and the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of giving

In addition, regarding the effective period of the cross key 18 related to the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment that occurs during the variable production (variable display of special symbols) and the jackpot production (jackpot game), the effective suggestive production (introduction production) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming defensive even though the information beneficial to the player (the effect to expect the execution of the jackpot game) is not executed, and the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of giving

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 89, during the effective period during customer waiting that can occur over a period longer than the effective period of the effect button 17 (display period of the operation prompting image) that occurs during the variable effect The effective period of the production button 17 (operation When the effect button 17 is operated during the promotion image display), the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 89, the effective period of the effect button 17 related to various advance notice effects that occur during the variable effect includes a relatively short first effective period (operation promotion related to dialog advance notice effects, etc.). There is a valid period accompanied by the display of an image) and a relatively long second valid period (valid period accompanied by the display of an operation promotion image related to a determined effect, etc.), but the effective period of the effect button 17 that occurs during the variable effect When the effect button 17 is operated during the second valid period, the effect button 17 is more likely to be operated than when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period during customer waiting, which can occur over a longer period. It is easy to execute the vibration presentation to vibrate. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

When the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period of waiting for customers, the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 17 at a predetermined rate may be executed. At a lower rate than when the production button 17 is operated during the effective period of the production button 17 related to various advance notice effects (dialogue notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) Vibration production should be executed.

(Concrete example when the variable production is started from the customer waiting state)
A specific example when the variable effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. FIG. 90 is a timing chart when the variable effect starts from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 91(a) to (f) and FIGS. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation corresponding to.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 0th frame after the start of the customer waiting state. At this timing, subtraction of the standby time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the reservation icon and the icon TI are not displayed. .

The timing of T1 is the timing (fourth frame from the start of the customer waiting state) when the first special figure pending number (U1) increases from "0" to "1". At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special pending number and the non-animated increase display of the first pending icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first generation, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated The output of the notification sound is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "0" to "1 , and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in the normal size on the first display portion 70B1. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs the first generated notification sound (beep).

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special figure pending number (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the variation effect (variation display of special symbols) by the normal variation pattern is started (start of customer waiting state 5th frame from ). At this timing, the production pattern 70a and the variable display of the special pattern TZ, the decrease display by non-animation of the first special symbol reservation number, and the change display (decrease display) by the animation of the first reservation icon to the icon concerned be started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91(c), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is changed from "1" to "0 , and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 displayed on the first display portion 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the reduced display (preparation operation) is started in a state where the effect pattern 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the output of the first generated notification sound (the 14th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91(d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first pending icon (white icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C continues, and the effect The reduced display (preparation operation) of the pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the 20th frame timing (the 25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state) after the change display (decrease display) of the first pending icon starts. At this timing, the changing display of the first pending icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and Along with the icon TI, the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 40th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 45th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91(f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the left variable display area, Scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 55th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92(g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the center variable display area, the right variable display Scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started, and the effect pattern 70a is scrolled in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 225th frame after the start of the variable effect (230th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92(h), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "3" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a state of being shaken) in the left variable display area, The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the central and right variable display areas.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 255th frame after the start of the variable effect (260th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92(i), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the variable display area on the right side, The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the central variable display area.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 285th frame after the start of the variable effect (290th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92(j), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a state of being shaken) in the central variable display area, and is lost. A combination of effect symbols 70a indicating that there is a state is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 305th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92(k), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. The combination "365", which is the same as the pattern 70a, is stopped and displayed. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the number of reserved special figures increases (changes from "0" to "1") during the customer waiting state, the incremented display of the reserved number and the reserved icon by non-animation is the shortest 1 frame Since it ends in a period of minutes (hours), it is possible to immediately shift to a variable performance (decrease display of the pending number and change display of the pending icon) so as not to delay, and improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, the generated notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending number and the pending icon is (frame Since it continues until the update) timing, the player can surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of reserved special figures decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), the decrease display of the reserved number by non-animation, and the change display of the reserved icon to the icon by animation are executed Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, since the timing of completing the decrease display of the pending number (frame update) is earlier than the timing of completing the change display of the pending icon to the icon (frame update), special figure pending While directing that the number changes, it is possible for the player to easily grasp that the number of reserved special symbols has been reduced by the reserved number, and to improve the interest of the game.

Also, until the change display of the pending icon to the icon is completed, the effect pattern does not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern is displayed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) Since the scrolling (update to the next production pattern) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the game that the variable production starts after the reserved memory is reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the number of pending special figures increases (changes from "0" to "1") during the customer waiting state, instead of executing the increasing display of the pending icon with non-animation, rather than the increasing display of the pending number Animation over a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) may be executed so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of reserved special figures, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Also, instead of starting the decreasing display of the pending number and the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon (decreasing display) at the same (frame update) timing, the timing of completing the decreasing display of the pending number (frame update) is changed. Either can be started first, as long as it is faster. By doing so, while improving the degree of freedom of display control, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special figures has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of starting the scrolling of the production pattern (update to the next production pattern) at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) (the start is delayed than usual), the change display of the pending icon You may make it start the scrolling of the production|presentation design (update to the next production|presentation design) at the (frame update) timing of a little before completion.

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during variable production)
A specific example when the number of holdings increases during the variable effect will be described using FIGS. 93 and 94. FIG. FIG. 93 is a timing chart showing an increase in the number of holdings during variable effects, and FIGS. 94(a) to (c) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (c) of FIG.

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect by the normal variation pattern. At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 94(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). In addition, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the icon (white icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 60th frame from the start of the variable production) when the number of first special figure reservations (U1) increases from "0" to "1". At this timing, the increase display by non-animation of the first special reservation number and the increase display by animation of the first reservation icon are started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started. be.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 94(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "0" to "1 , and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in a very small size on the first display portion 70B1 to start enlarged display. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs the first generated notification sound (beep).

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the increasing display of the first pending icon (the 70th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon ends, and the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 94(c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is finished and the normal size is displayed. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of reserved special figures is increased, the increase display of the reserved number by non-animation and the increased display by animation of the reserved icon are executed, so that the player can see that the number of reserved special figures has increased. It is possible to reliably recognize the game, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, since the timing at which the increase display of the pending number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the increase display of the pending icon is completed (frame update), the number of pending special figures will change. While directing that, the player can easily grasp that the number of reserved special symbols has increased by the reserved number, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of the variable effect, the increasing display of the reserved icon is executed for a longer period than when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the customer waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the pending number and the generated notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increased display of the pending icon ends in synchronization with the timing of the end of the increased display of the pending icon (frame update), so special figure pending The increase in the number can be effectively produced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, since the period (10 frames) related to the increased display of the suspended icon is shorter than the period (20 frames) related to the change display of the suspended icon, the start of the variable effect is indicated. It can be emphasized, and it becomes possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the increasing display of the pending number and the increasing display of the pending icon at the same timing (frame update), if the timing of completing the increased display of the pending number (frame update) is earlier, which may start first. By doing so, while improving the degree of freedom of display control, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of special figure pending has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of shortening the period of increasing display of the pending icon, the period of increasing display of the pending icon may be longer than the period of changing display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the special figure pending number has increased, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, instead of shortening the period for increasing display of the pending icon than the period for displaying the change of the pending icon to the icon, both periods may be the same length.

(Concrete example when the number of pending items increases immediately after decreasing)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG. FIG. 95 is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after decreasing.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 5th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96(a), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbols 70a of "4", "6", and "8" indicating failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. It has become. In addition, "2" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, a first pending icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and a first pending icon (white icon) H12 is displayed on the second display portion 70B2, and the icon TI is not displayed. state.

The timing of T1 is the timing (the 20th frame after the stop display of the effect symbol 70a) at which the variable effect (variable display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started. At this timing, the production pattern 70a and the variable display of the special pattern TZ, the decrease display by non-animation of the first special pattern reservation number, the change display by the animation of the first reservation icon to the icon, and the first reservation icon Decrease display by animation starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "2" to "1 ”. Further, the first pending icon (white icon) H11 displayed in the first display portion 70B1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second icon displayed in the second display portion 70B2 1 pending icon (white icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display portion 70B1. Furthermore, the reduction display (preparation operation) is started in a state where the effect pattern 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special figure reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 30th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special figure reservation number is started, but since the change display of the first reservation icon and the decrease display are being executed, the increase display of the first reservation icon and the icon The output of the generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when generated, is put on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96(c), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "1" to "2 , and the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the first pending icon (the 40th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the changing display and decreasing display of the first pending icon are ended. In addition, the animation display of the waiting first hold icon is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96(d), in the first image display device 70, the first suspended icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and At the same time as the icon TI, the first pending icon H12 moved from the second display portion 70B2 is positioned at the center of the first display portion 70B1, and the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a stops. In addition, the first pending icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a very small size on the second display portion 70B2 and enlarged display is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound (beep) from the audio output device 9 is started. be.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the fifth frame after the start of the increasing display of the first pending icon (the 45th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the output of the first generated notification sound are continued.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display portion 70B2 and the enlarged display is continued. At the same time, the output of the first generated notification sound (blink) from the audio output device 9 continues. Further, the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the left variable display area is started.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 10th frame after the increase display of the first pending icon is started (the 50th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon ends, and the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96(f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is finished and the normal size is displayed. Is displayed. Further, the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, when the number of special figures pending increases during the execution of the change display of the pending icon to the icon and the decrease display of the pending icon, the change display and the decrease display are completed. Even before the (frame update) timing, in order to start increasing the display of the pending number, the change display of the pending icon and the increase in the number of pending special figures even during the execution of the decreasing display can be made to recognize, and it becomes possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, if the number of special pending icons increases during the execution of the change display of the pending icon to the icon, and the decreasing display of the pending icon, wait for the increased display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound ( limit), and at the timing when the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generated notification sound are started. can be prevented from becoming difficult to grasp, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number instead of outputting the notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon executed after the increase display of the hold number. good too.

In addition, at the timing when the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed (frame update), instead of starting the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generated notification sound (the start is delayed than usual), It is also possible to start increasing the display of the pending icon and outputting the generated notification sound at a timing (frame update) slightly before the completion of the changing display and the decreasing display of the pending icon. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difficulty of grasping the transition of the special figure pending number, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, even if the number of special pending items increases during the increasing display of the pending icon, wait for the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound, just like during the change display or decrease display of the pending icon. On the other hand, the increasing display of the pending number is started, and at the timing when the increasing display of the pending icon is completed (frame update), the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound can be started.

(Specific example when the number of pending increases during specific reach production)
A specific example when the number of pending games increases during the specific reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 97 is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the specific reach effect, and FIGS. 98(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to FIGS. .

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the SP reach variation pattern. At this timing, the normal ready-to-win effect executed before the SP ready-to-win effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are continued.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the central variable display area. The variable display of 70a continues. In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, a first pending icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the icon (white icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 90th frame from the start of the normal ready-to-win effect (the 430th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development effect for developing into the SP ready-to-win effect is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect symbol 70a scrolling in the center variable display area are displayed on the screen. Movement to the upper left and reduced display are started, and the effect design 70a changes to a simple display mode in which only numbers are enlarged.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 15th frame after the development effect is started (the 445th frame after the change effect is started). At this timing, the development effect for developing into the SP reach effect continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98(b), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "75" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and The effect pattern 70a being scrolled is displayed at a position near the upper left of the screen and displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 30th frame after the development effect is started (the 460th frame after the change effect is started). At this timing, while the development effect is finished, the SP ready-to-win effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98(c), in the first image display device 70, the production pattern 70a in the left, middle, right variable display area is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and at the center of the screen. A confrontation production is started in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other. In addition, while leaving the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C, the suspended icon (here, only the first pending icon) is hidden together with the pending icon display area. Furthermore, the special symbol TZ is the same "7" symbol as the production symbol 70a, and is in the ready-to-win state.

The timing of T5 is the timing when the number of first special figure reservations (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 820th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special pending number is started, but since the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) is being executed, the increase display and icon generation of the first pending icon at this timing The generated notification sound, which is the time notification sound, is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98(d), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "1" to "2 , and the final production of the confrontation production (decision production for informing whether or not a jackpot is achieved) is being executed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 420th frame after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect (confrontation effect) (the 880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final effect (decision effect) of the confrontation effect is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98(e), in the first image display device 70, an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 defeats the enemy character C3, and an effect pattern 70a displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen is displayed. is temporarily stopped at a combination ("555") indicating a big hit (becomes in a swaying state).

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 450th frame after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect (showdown effect) (910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP ready-to-win effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the non-animated return display and increase display of the first pending icon are performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that has been displayed in reduced size at the upper left of the screen is displayed in enlarged size in the center of the screen and is temporarily stopped (shaking state). become). Also, the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the first pending icon (white icon) H12 is displayed in the normal size on the second display portion 70B2.

Then, the effect pattern 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle, right variable display area returns to the display mode composed of characters and numbers, and finally, the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the special pattern TZ is displayed. Stop display is performed at the same combination "555" as the production pattern 70a. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, if the special figure pending number increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), even before the timing of this specific effect ending (frame update), the number of pending numbers Since the increase display is started, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of reserved special figures increases during the execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), the execution of the increase display of the pending icon is put on standby (restricted), and the specific effect ends (it was displayed in a reduced size At the timing when the losing performance pattern or the jackpot performance pattern is enlarged (displayed) (frame update), the increase display of the pending icon is started, so it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to grasp the transition of the special pending number, improving the interest of the game. It is possible to

In addition, when the increase display of the pending icon starts at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the increase display of the pending icon is performed by non-animation completed in one frame, so the timing when the number of special pending numbers increases Even if there is an extreme lag between the timing of executing the increase display of the pending icon and the timing of executing the increase display, the player's sense of discomfort can be reduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon starts at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the generated notification sound is not output, so the special figure hold number increases at the timing when the specific effect ends due to the generated notification sound. It becomes difficult for the player to misunderstand that the player has done so, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special pending numbers increases during the execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), while executing the increasing display of the pending number, the execution of the increasing display of the pending icon is on standby (restricted) It is preferable that the display of the increased number of pending icons be performed collectively in one frame at the timing when the specific effect ends (frame update).

In addition, when the special figure pending number increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), instead of not outputting the generated notification sound, the generated notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the pending number. good too.

Moreover, although the SP ready-to-reach effect was exemplified as the specific effect, the specific effect may include the SPSP ready-to-win effect, or may include the full rotation ready-to-reach effect.

(Concrete example when the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state)
99 to 101, a specific example when the number of pending games increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state will be described. Figure 99 is a timing chart showing that the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state, Figures 100 (a) ~ (f) and Figures 101 (g) ~ (i) are shown in Figure 99 (a) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect corresponding to (i);

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the last (100th) variable effect in the specific game state. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100(a), "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. ing. Further, the first pending icon display area 70B is deleted, and the second pending icons (white icons) H21 to H24 are displayed in the first display section 70D1 to fourth display section 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D. and the icon TI is displayed. Furthermore, at the top of the screen, the number of variable performances that can be executed in the specific game state (here, "remaining 0 times") is displayed, and at the top right of the screen, a game ball is directed toward the right side area of the game area 5a. A right-hand shot image MU prompting the player to shoot is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 415th frame after the start of the variable production) when the number of first special figure reservations (U1) increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special figure pending number is started, but since the first pending icon display area 70B is erased, the increased display of the first pending icon and the notification sound when the icon occurs The generated notification sound is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "1" to "2 , and the effect pattern 70a continues to be scrolled.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 430th frame after the variable effect is started. At this timing, the performance symbols 70a that have been variably displayed in the left, middle, and right variability display areas are temporarily stopped at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100(c), in the first image display device 70, the production pattern 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the left, middle, and right variable display areas. A combination of performance symbols 70a indicating that the game is lost is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 15th frame after the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a (the 445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, a result display is started to show the result of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100(d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG is darkened, and "special time end" indicating the end of the specific game state and a predetermined advantageous period The number of times of the executed jackpot game "jackpot x 1" is displayed inside. Also, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the result display (the 460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100(e), on the first image display device 70, characters "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls obtained (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. additionally displayed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the result display (the 475th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen is moved to the center of the screen and stopped, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. Stop display is performed at the same combination "285" as the production pattern 70a. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

The timing of T7 is the timing (the 490th frame from the start of the variable performance) at which the last (100th) variable performance in the specific game state ends and the first variable performance in the normal game state is started. At this timing, the production pattern 70a and the variable display of the special pattern TZ, the decrease display by non-animation of the second reservation number, the change display of the second reservation icon to the icon by animation, the decrease by animation of the second reservation icon The display, the non-animated return display of the first pending icon, and the non-animated increasing display of the first pending icon are initiated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 101 (g), in the first image display device 70, the second reservation number of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3", The second pending icon (white icon) H21 displayed on the first display portion 70D1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and is displayed on the second display portion 70D2 to the fourth display portion 70D4. The second pending icons (white icons) H22 to H24 that have been displayed start moving (shifting) toward the next display section.

Further, the first pending icon display area is restored and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is restored and displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the first pending icon (white icon) H12 is displayed on the second display portion 70B2. Displayed in normal size. Furthermore, the reduction display (preparation operation) is started in a state where the effect pattern 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling. In addition, a left-hand shot image HU is displayed on the upper left of the screen to prompt the shooting of the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T8 is the 20th frame timing (the 510th frame from the start of the previous variable effect) after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon. At this timing, the change display and decrease display of the second pending icon are terminated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 101(h), in the first image display device 70, the second suspended icon H21 moved from the first display section 70D1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and Along with becoming the icon TI, the second pending icons H22 to H24 moved from the second display portion 70D2 to the fourth display portion 70D4 are positioned at the center of the adjacent display portion, and the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a is performed. Stop.

The timing of T9 is the 10th frame timing (the 520th frame from the start of the previous variable effect) after the end of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon. At this timing, the effect pattern 70a continues to scroll (downward movement).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 101(i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect symbols 70a in the left variable display area, the effect symbols 70a are displayed in the center variable display area. Scrolling (downward movement) is started.

Thus, when the first special figure pending number (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increased display of the first reserved icon is waited (restricted), while the increased display of the first special figure pending number is displayed. Since it starts, the player can be made to recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased even during execution of the specific effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the number of the first special figure pending (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the first pending icon at the timing when the specific game state (last variable effect in) ends (frame update). , even if you miss the increase display of the first special figure pending number executed before that, you can recognize that the number of the first special figure pending number has increased, and enjoy the game. can be improved.

In addition, when starting to increase the display of the first reserved icon at the timing when (the last variable effect in) the specific game state ends, to perform the increased display of the reserved icon by non-animation that is completed in one frame. Even if there is an extreme lag between the timing of increasing the number and the timing of executing the increasing display of the pending icons, the sense of incompatibility of the player can be reduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, when the increase display of the pending icon starts at the timing when the specific game state (the last fluctuation effect in) ends, the generated notification sound is not output, so the special figure at the timing when the specific game state ends due to the generated notification sound It becomes difficult to misunderstand that the number of reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, until the change display of the pending icon to the icon is completed, the effect pattern does not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern is displayed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) Since the scrolling (update to the next performance pattern) is started, it becomes easy to grasp the progress of the performance during the variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of the first special figure reservation increases during the specific game state, while executing the increase display of the reservation number, the execution of the increase display of the reservation icon is waited (restricted), At the timing when (the last variable effect in) the specific game state ends (frame update), the increased display of the reserved icons corresponding to the increase may be collectively performed in one frame.

Further, when the number of the first special figure pending increases during the specific game state, instead of not outputting the generated notification sound, the generated notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increasing display of the reserved number.

In the present embodiment, the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D are set (displayed) in the normal gaming state, but the second reserved icon display area 70D is set (displayed). ), only the first pending icon display area 70B may be set (displayed).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not the specific effects (SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect, full rotation ready-to-win effect) are being executed during the variable effect. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of the specific effect, or without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of the specific effect. The icon may be hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F were set (displayed) in the first image display device 70, but the second image display device 71 , or may be set (displayed) on a dedicated display (for example, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a dedicated LED, etc.) different from the image display device. And when setting to a dedicated LED, it is preferable to display the number of special figures pending according to the lighting color and lighting / blinking mode of the LED.

(Example of effect when look-ahead motion effect and step-up notice effect are executed)
102 and 103, an example of an effect when the look-ahead motion effect and the step-up notice effect are executed will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 102(a), the first image display device 70 is in a state in which the performance symbol 70a of "468" indicating a failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "3" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and three white icons HI are displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

When the fluctuation production (equivalent to advance fluctuation) is started from this state, as shown in FIG. One holding icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the first effect of the look-ahead action effect over three times of variable effects is started. Specifically, as a weak advance notice of the look-ahead motion effect, the second movable member 74 emits light in blue, performs a weak motion toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak motion effect sound. be done.

After that, immediately after the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, when the pending icon (the left end in the drawing) to be the announcement target of the look-ahead operation effect changes to a blue icon, as shown in FIG. After the (preparation operation) is completed, the normal size scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started, after which the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position and the first rendering of the look-ahead operation rendering is completed. Also, the winning entrance lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same blue color as the blue icon, and the lamp changing effect is started.

Then, when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 102(d), the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed with a losing number of "365", and the special symbol TZ is stopped-displayed with a losing number of "365". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production pattern has passed and the next fluctuation production (corresponding to the advance fluctuation) is started, as shown in FIG. to "1", the two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the second effect of the look-ahead motion effect is started. Specifically, as a weak advance notice of the look-ahead motion effect, the second movable member 74 emits light in blue, performs a weak motion toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak motion effect sound. be done.

After that, immediately after the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, when the pending icon targeted for advance notice of the look-ahead motion effect changes to a red icon, as shown in FIG. After that, the normal size scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started, after which the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position, and the second rendering of the look-ahead motion rendering ends. Also, the prize winning entrance lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp changing effect is continued.

Then, when the variation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 103(g), the performance symbol 70a is stop-displayed with a loss of "635", and the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a loss of "635". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production pattern has passed and the fluctuation production (corresponding to the fluctuation) to be the notice target of the look-ahead operation production is started, as shown in FIG. As the area 70E changes from "1" to "0", one pending icon HI starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the third effect of the look-ahead motion effect is started. Specifically, as a strong advance notice of the look-ahead motion effect, the second movable member 74 emits red light, performs a strong motion toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a strong motion effect sound. be done.

After that, when the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 103(i), the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a is completed, and the normal size scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started. Then, the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position, and the third performance of the look-ahead motion performance is completed.

Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the start of the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect pattern 70a, as shown in FIG. 103(j), the first step effect of the step-up notice effect is started. Specifically, the first step image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and the first step sound effect is output. After that, the second to fourth step effects are sequentially executed.

Further, when the fourth step effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 103(k), the fifth step effect is started, the fifth step image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the fifth step sound effect is displayed. is output. In addition, while the production button 17 is turned off, a weak vibration production is started in which the production button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. Although the effect sound (sound effect) is not output when the game board decoration LED is played, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) and the lamp change effect by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are continued.

After 1 second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 103(l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends, and 2 seconds later, the fifth step effect ends. Thereafter, SP ready-to-win performance is executed after normal ready-to-win performance is executed according to the variable performance pattern, or SPSP ready-to-win performance is to be executed after normal ready-to-win performance is executed.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, after the number of reservations displayed in the special figure reservation number display area decreases with the start of the variable production (production pattern 70a starts the preparation operation ) and before starting the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the production pattern 70a, the look-ahead operation production (light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the look-ahead action performance is being executed while notifying the player of the start of the variable performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, after the movement (shift) of the pending icon is started with the start of the variable production and before the movement of the pending icon is completed, the look-ahead operation effect (light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the look-ahead action performance is being executed while notifying the player of the start of the variable performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the vibration production is not executed during the first to fourth step productions of the step-up notice production, and the vibration production is executed during the fifth step production with the highest degree of expectation. It's supposed to run. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation, and to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the fifth step production (1 seconds) are shorter. Therefore, the appearance of the fifth step presentation is not overwhelmed by the vibration presentation, and the presentation effect of the step-up notice presentation can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the vibration production executed during the fifth step production does not accompany the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so the operation promotion image ( The effect sound when displaying the opaque effect button image, the gauge image) and the effect sound when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period (operation effect sound, movable member operating effect sound, etc.) are not output. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused during the vibration performance that does not involve the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

102 and 103, even during the vibration effect of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp changing effect are continued. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the performance effect by not performing processing such as pausing the performance light emission or the lamp change performance by the vibration performance accompanying the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby improving the amusement of the game. Become.

In addition, the effect button 17 is not illuminated in the vibration effect executed during the fifth step effect in the step-up notice effect, but the effect button 17 is kept in a predetermined manner (for confirming the big hit) over the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light in a color other than the rainbow color which is the luminescence color, and in a luminescence mode different from the luminescence mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as white blinking or yellow blinking. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp that the vibration effect is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during the vibration effect that does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 attracts attention by the light emission mode of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (for example, moving light emission toward the effect button 17). You may make it perform production light emission.

(Production example when anticipation vibration production and dialog announcement production are executed)
104 and 105, a description will be given of an effect example when the look-ahead vibration effect and the speech announcement effect are executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 104(a), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a of "468" indicating a failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "3" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and three white icons HI are displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

When the fluctuation production (equivalent to advance fluctuation) is started from this state, as shown in FIG. One holding icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the first performance of the look-ahead vibration performance over the three fluctuation performances is started. Specifically, as a weak notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 17 weakly vibrates for one second and the effect button 17 blinks white for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration is not accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period or the sound effect when the operation promotion image (opaque production button image, gauge image) is displayed. Although the effect sound (sound effect) is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues.

After that, immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, when the hold icon (left end in the figure) to be the notice target of the pre-reading vibration effect changes to a blue icon, as shown in FIG. (Preparation operation) is completed and scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in normal size is started, then the weak vibration and white flashing of the performance button 17 are stopped, and the first performance of the look-ahead vibration performance is completed. Also, the winning entrance lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same blue color as the blue icon, and the lamp changing effect is started.

Then, when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 104(d), the performance symbol 70a is stop-displayed with a loss of "365", and the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a loss of "365". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production design has passed and the next fluctuation production (corresponding to the advance fluctuation) is started, as shown in FIG. to "1", the two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the second look-ahead vibration effect is started. Specifically, as a weak notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 17 weakly vibrates for one second and the effect button 17 blinks white for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration is not accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period or the sound effect when the operation promotion image (opaque production button image, gauge image) is displayed. Although the effect sound (sound effect) is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

After that, immediately after the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, when the pending icon to be notified of the pre-reading vibration effect changes to a red icon, as shown in FIG. Upon completion, scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started, after which the weak vibration and white blinking of the effect button 17 are stopped, and the second effect of the look-ahead vibration effect is completed. Also, the prize winning entrance lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp changing effect is continued.

Then, when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 105(g), the performance symbol 70a is stop-displayed with a loss of "635", and the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a loss of "635". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production pattern has passed and the fluctuation production (corresponding to the fluctuation) to be the notice target of the look-ahead vibration production is started, as shown in FIG. As the area 70E changes from "1" to "0", one pending icon HI starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the third production of the look-ahead vibration production is started. Specifically, as a strong notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for three seconds, and the effect button 17 flashes red for three seconds. However, since the execution of this strong vibration is not accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period or the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque production button image, gauge image) Although the effect sound (sound effect) is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

After that, when the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. The strong notice of will continue. After that, the strong vibration and white flashing of the effect button 17 are stopped, and the third effect of the look-ahead vibration effect is completed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the third effect of the look-ahead vibration effect is completed, as shown in FIG. be done. Specifically, an operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed in the dialogue window image SW. A display sound effect is output and the production button 17 emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period elapses, as shown in FIG. , a sound (effect sound) corresponding to the hot lines is output. In addition, while the production button 17 is turned off, a weak vibration production is started in which the production button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second. The lamp change production continues.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 105(l), the weak vibration of the production button 17 stops and the weak vibration production ends. After that, a pseudo-continuous performance is executed according to the variable performance pattern, a normal reach performance is executed, an SP reach performance is executed after the normal reach performance is executed, and an SPSP reach performance is executed after the normal reach performance is executed. It will be executed.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, after the number of reservations displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area decreases with the start of the variable production (production pattern 70a is the preparation operation is started) and before the start of the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation), the look-ahead vibration effect (vibration of the effect button 17, blinking in white) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the read-ahead vibration performance is being executed while notifying the player of the start of the variable performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, after the movement (shift) of the pending icon is started with the start of the variable production and before the movement of the pending icon is completed, the anticipatory vibration effect (Vibration of production button 17, blinking in white) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the read-ahead vibration performance is being executed while notifying the player of the start of the variable performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

104 and 105, when the look-ahead vibration effect is executed, the effect button 17 is flashed white although the effective period of the effect button 17 is not accompanied. Therefore, even when the performance button 17 is not operated, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the read-ahead vibration performance is being executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the light emitting mode of the production button 17 in the anticipatory vibration production is the forewarning effect with the occurrence of the valid period It is different from the light emitting mode of the effect button 17 during the valid period in the effect, final effect, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as misunderstanding that the effective period of the effect button 17 has occurred in the look-ahead vibration effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the pre-reach forewarning effects (dialogue forewarning effects, step-up forewarning effects) are not executed until the look-ahead vibration effect is completed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that it is difficult to notice that the read-ahead vibration performance, which is difficult to judge visually, is being executed due to the pre-reach announcement performance, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the pseudo-continuous production is not executed until the look-ahead vibration production ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that it is difficult to notice that the look-ahead vibration effect which is difficult to judge visually is being executed due to the pseudo-continuous effect, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production executed during the speech announcement production is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the dialogue announcement production. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the dialogue foretelling effect without vibrating the appearance of the dialogue foretelling effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, since the vibration production executed during the look-ahead vibration production does not accompany the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image (opaque The display sound when the production button image, gauge image) is displayed and the production sound (operation effect sound, movable member operation sound effect, etc.) when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period are not output. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused during the vibration performance that does not involve the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the vibration production executed during the speech announcement production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so the operation promotion image (opaque production) button images, gauge images), and effect sounds (operation effect sounds, dialogue voices, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the speech announcement production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

104 and 105, the execution period of the vibration effect executed at the time of the speech announcement effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on whether or not the performance button 17 is operated and the operation timing, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, even during the vibration production accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17, the production light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change production are continued. there is Therefore, it is possible to maintain the performance effect by not performing processing such as pausing the performance light emission or the lamp change performance by the vibration performance accompanying the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby improving the amusement of the game. Become.

In addition, the effect button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration effect executed at the time of the dialogue announcement effect, but the effect button 17 is kept in a predetermined state (rainbow color, which is the luminescence color for confirming the big win) over the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light in a color other than the above, but in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as white flashing or yellow flashing.

Also, regarding the vibration effect executed during the dialog preview effect, the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 17 is not operated) 0.5 seconds after) (execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In addition, during the vibration effect that does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 attracts attention by the light emission mode of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (for example, moving light emission toward the effect button 17). You may make it perform production light emission.

(Production example when pseudo-continuous production is executed before reach production)
With reference to FIG. 106, an example of the effect when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed before the ready-to-win effect will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 106(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped in the left area, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the right area, In the middle region, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues. At this time, the effective period of the effect button 17 does not occur, and the pseudo continuous success effect is started. More specifically, an inciting effect is executed to incite whether or not the pseudo symbols suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous effect are temporarily stopped in the middle area. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

After that, when the fanning effect ends, the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle region, and a success effect sound is output, as shown in FIG. 106(b). In addition, as shown in FIG. 106(c), the second movable member 74 emits blue light, and performs a weak action to move toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the production pattern 70a changes again. “×2” indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations (that the stage of production has progressed) is displayed in blue.

After that, when a predetermined period of time elapses, as shown in FIG. 106(d), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped in the left area, and the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the right area. 70a is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is continued in the middle area, and a pseudo-flashing effect is executed to agitate whether or not the pseudo pattern suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuation is temporarily stopped in the middle area. At this time, an effective period of the effect button 17 occurs, and an operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image simulating the effect button 17 emitting white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed and operated. A display sound effect of the promotion image SG is output, and the production button 17 emits white light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 106(e), the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle area as a pseudo consecutive success effect, and a success effect sound is output. . In addition, the effect button 17 is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by a plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. is doing.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 106(f), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. In addition, the second movable member 74 emits red light, and performs a strong action to move toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the production pattern 70a changes again and the number of pseudo fluctuations (the stage of production progresses) "x3" indicating that the user has completed the task) is displayed in red.

After that, when the strong action time (1 second) of the second movable member 74 elapses, the simulated continuous success effect ends, and as shown in FIG. is temporarily stopped and the normal ready-to-win performance is executed, after that, the SP ready-to-win performance is executed after the normal ready-to-win performance is executed according to the variable performance pattern, or the SP ready-to-win performance is executed after the normal ready-to-reach performance is executed. It will be.

(Production example when pseudo-continuous production is executed after reach production)
With reference to FIG. 107, an example of the effect when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed after the ready-to-win effect will be described. Note that FIGS. 107(a) to (c) are the same as FIGS. 106(a) to (c), so descriptions thereof are omitted here.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the state of FIG. 107(c), as shown in FIG. 107(d), the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal ready-to-win effect is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 107(e), when the pseudo-continuation effect is started, a pseudo-influence effect is executed to prompt whether or not the pseudo-symbol suggesting execution of the pseudo-continuation is temporarily stopped in the middle area. At this time, an effective period of the effect button 17 occurs, and an opaque effect button image simulating the effect button 17 emitting white light and an operation prompting image SG composed of a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed and effected. Button 17 emits white light. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 107(f), the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle region as a pseudo consecutive success effect, and a success effect sound is output. In addition, the effect button 17 is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by a plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. is doing.

When one second has passed since then, as shown in FIG. 107(g), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. In addition, the second movable member 74 emits red light, and performs a strong action to move toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the production pattern 70a changes again and the number of pseudo fluctuations (the stage of production progresses) "x3" indicating that the user has completed the task) is displayed in red.

After that, when a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 107(h), the production pattern 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal ready-to-win production is executed. The SP ready-to-win effect is executed after the normal ready-to-win effect is executed, or the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed after the normal ready-to-win effect is executed.

106 and 107, the vibrating effect can be executed when the pseudo continuous effect is executed in which the effective period of the effect button 17 is generated in the pseudo continuous effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation, and to improve the interest in the game.

106 and 107, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the pseudo consecutive success effect is longer than the execution period (2 seconds) of the pseudo consecutive success effect. It's getting shorter. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the pseudo consecutive success presentation without the vibrating presentation being superior to the appearance of the pseudo consecutive success presentation. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the vibration production executed during the pseudo continuous production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so the operation promotion image (opaque production) A display sound effect when displaying a button image, a gauge image) and a sound effect (operation effect sound, success effect sound, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the pseudo-continuous performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

106 and 107, the execution period of the vibration effect executed in the pseudo-continuous effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on whether or not the performance button 17 is operated and the operation timing, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

106 and 107, in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed after the ready-to-win effect, the type of the effect symbol forming the ready-to-win state after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is the pseudo-continuous effect. Downgrading from the type of production pattern that formed the reach state before execution (downgrading from reach with odd-numbered patterns to reach with even-numbered patterns, reach with "7" patterns to reach with even-numbered patterns or odd-numbered patterns other than "7" downgrade). Therefore, the player will not be dissatisfied with the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the interest in the game will not be improved.

106 and 107, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporary stop of the performance light emission by the vibration performance accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the effect button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration effect that is executed during the pseudo-continuous effect, but the effect button 17 is kept in a predetermined state (rainbow color, which is the luminescence color for confirming the big win), throughout the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light in a color other than the above, but in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as white flashing or yellow flashing.

Also, regarding the vibration effect executed during the pseudo-continuous effect, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 17 is not operated). 0.5 seconds after) (execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In addition, the effective period of the production button 17 is generated during the pseudo-continuous production, and the vibration production of the production button 17 is executed. The vibration performance may be executed, or the effective period of the performance button 17 may be generated but the vibration performance may not be executed.

(Example of production when development production is executed and SP reach production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 108, an example of an effect when the development effect is executed and the SP ready-to-win effect is executed will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 108(a), the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 108(b), when the SP development effect is started, SPSP development pattern suggesting development to SPSP ready-to-win effect, SP development pattern to suggest development to SP ready-to-win effect, pseudo continuous effect A roulette performance is performed in which a plurality of special performance symbols, such as a pseudo symbol suggesting the execution of and a scrap symbol suggesting that the performance does not develop (is lost), are variably displayed in an oblique direction at a low speed. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

After that, as shown in FIG. 108(c), an effect is performed in which the SPSP developed symbols, SP developed symbols, pseudo symbols, and scrap symbols are variably displayed at high speed. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 108(d), it is notified that the SP development pattern is temporarily stopped in the middle area and the SP ready-to-win effect is developed. In addition, in the roulette effect, the type of special effect symbols that are variably displayed changes depending on the variability pattern, so the special effect symbols that are variably displayed (final special effect symbols that are not temporarily stopped and special effect symbols that are temporarily stopped) Depending on the type, it suggests whether or not it will develop into a production with a high degree of expectation for a jackpot (expectation for a jackpot).

After that, the screen is whited out and the development effect is finished, and as shown in FIG. The display is reduced in the corner and the SP ready-to-win effect is started. Note that the icon is hidden with the start of the SP ready-to-win effect.

(Example of production when development production is executed and SPSP ready-to-win production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 109, a description will be given of an effect example when the development effect is executed and the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 109(a), the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 108(b), when the SPSP development production is started, SP development pattern suggesting development to SP reach production, SPSP development pattern suggesting development to SPSP reach production, full rotation reach A roulette performance is performed in which a plurality of special performance symbols such as full-rotation symbols suggesting development to performance are variably displayed in an oblique direction at a low speed. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109(c), an effect is performed in which the SP development pattern, the SPSP development pattern, and the all-rotation pattern are variably displayed at high speed, and there is a possibility that the operation of the production button 17 will be effective. An effective suggestion production is started to suggest that. Specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are moved and displayed, and an effect is performed in which the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position at the lower right of the screen.

Then, when the translucent effect button images gather at a specific position at the bottom right of the screen, the effective period of the effect button 17 (long press for 4 seconds) occurs as shown in FIG. An operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output. , the production button 17 emits red light. It should be noted that the characters "long press" are displayed in the opaque effect button image.

After that, when the production button 17 is long pressed, the speed of the variable display of various developing patterns is slowed down step by step, and the time of the long push reaches a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) or the valid period elapses. Then, as shown in FIG. 109(e), the SPSP development pattern is temporarily stopped in the middle area, a temporary stop sound effect is output, and the first movable member 73 emits blue light to perform a strong action effect. be done. In addition, the effect button 17 is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by a plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. is doing.

After one second has passed, the weak vibration of the performance button 17 stops and the weak vibration performance ends. After that, the screen whites out and the development effect ends, and as shown in FIG. The SPSP reach effect is started. Note that the pending icon and the corresponding icon are hidden with the start of the SPSP ready-to-win effect.

108 and 109, depending on the type of special effect symbols (finally not temporarily stopped special effect symbols, temporary stop special effect symbols) that are variably displayed in the roulette effect , suggests whether or not it will develop into a production with a high degree of expectation for a jackpot (degree of expectation for a jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's expectations for the types of special effect symbols that are variably displayed in the roulette effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the effective suggestive production may be executed in the development production, so that the player's expectation for the development of the ready-to-win production with high expectation for big win is heightened. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production executed during the development production is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the development production. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the development presentation without vibrating presentation superior to the appearance of the development presentation. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, since the vibration production executed during the development production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image (opaque production button image, gauge image, etc.) and a production sound (operation sound effect, temporary stop sound effect, etc.) when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period. Therefore, the production effect of the development production can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the development production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. there is Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

108 and 109, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporary stop of the performance light emission by the vibration performance accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the production button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration production executed during the development production, but the production button 17 is kept in a predetermined mode (other than the rainbow color that is the luminescence color for confirming the big win) over the execution period of the vibration production. , but in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, for example, white flashing, yellow flashing, etc.).

In addition, the vibration effect executed during the development effect is performed at the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, from the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 17 is not operated). 0.5 seconds later) (execution period of vibration effect is variable).

In addition, the effective period of the performance button 17 is generated during the development performance and the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed, but the vibration performance is not generated during the development performance. may be executed, or the effective period of the effect button 17 may be generated but the vibration effect may not be executed.

(Example of production when a cut-in production is executed during SP reach production and a big win is achieved)
110 and 111, a description will be given of an effect example in which a cut-in effect is executed during the SP ready-to-win effect in the variable effect pattern 13 to result in a big win.

First, as shown in FIG. 110(a), the effect pattern 70a of the left area and the right area is reduced and displayed at the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen, and the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

When the SP ready-to-win effect reaches the final stage from this state, as shown in FIG. be started. Specifically, an effect is performed in which two semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are gathered from the left and right lower portions of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the translucent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. An operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 emitting red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output. At the same time, the production button 17 is in a projecting state and emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, the red cut-in effect is started as shown in FIG. 110(d). Specifically, a cut-in image with a red frame is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a third cut-in sound effect is output. In addition, the effect button 17 is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for 3 seconds, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by a plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. is doing.

After that, when one second has passed since the output of the third cut-in sound effect ended, the cut-in effect and the weak vibration effect end, and as shown in FIG. An effect is performed as to whether the design 70a is stopped or the effect design 70a of "6" is stopped.

When a predetermined period of time has passed since then, as shown in FIG. 110(f), it is temporarily stopped in a state in which three "5" production patterns 70a are aligned (symbols are aligned), and the production button 17 is pressed for four seconds. Along with the start of a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) to vibrate, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output.

When 4 seconds have passed since then, as shown in FIG. 111(g), the strong vibration effect ends, but the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 continue to emit rainbow colors. When one second elapses from there, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resumes the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is extinguished.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111(h), a re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, three "5" effect symbols 70a are aligned (symbols are aligned) and moved in the depth direction to be displayed in a reduced size, and the effective period of the effect button 17 (single hit 3 seconds) is generated, An operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque performance button image imitating a performance button 17 emitting white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of an effective period is displayed at a specific position in the center of the screen, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG. is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 111(i), promotion failure effect is started. Specifically, three of the "5" production patterns 70a that have been displayed in reduced size are aligned (symbols are aligned), and are moved to the front side of the screen to be enlarged and displayed, and a non-promoted sound effect is output. The effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the game board decoration LED continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 111(j), the performance pattern 70a is in a normal size and temporarily stopped, and the promotion failure performance ends. After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 111(k), an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three production patterns 70a.

After that, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, as shown in FIG. If there are pending numbers, the pending icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without an effective period of the effect button 17, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 are activated. It emits rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output.

When 1 second has passed from there, as shown in FIG. The symbol TZ is also permanently stopped at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. A strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output. After that, when one second elapses, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the big win game is finished, and the round game is started.

In addition, in the case of the variable effect pattern in which the re-lottery effect is not executed, the process shifts to FIG. 111(k) after FIG. 111(g), and the eye-catching effect is executed.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, there is a case where the effective suggestion production is executed in the cut-in production, so that the effective period is generated and the expectation of the big win is high. This can be suggested to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the execution period (3 seconds) of the cut-in production and the execution period (3 seconds) of the vibration production executed during the cut-in production are the same. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the cut-in production. In addition, the vibrating presentation can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, since the vibration production executed during the cut-in production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image (opaque production) A display sound effect when displaying a button image, a gauge image) and a sound effect (operation effect sound, cut-in effect sound, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the cut-in production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, when three production patterns 70a in the display mode not including characters are temporarily stopped (symbols are aligned), the vibration during the cut-in production Since the strong vibration performance (big win confirmation vibration performance) is executed over a period longer than the performance, the player can be effectively notified of the big win, and the amusement of the game is improved. It is possible to

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, when three production patterns 70a in the display mode including characters are temporarily stopped (C pattern alignment), strong vibration production (jackpot confirmation vibration effect) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player reconfirm that the jackpot has been won, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the strong vibration production (big hit confirmation vibration production, big hit confirmation Vibration effect, opening vibration effect) does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promoting image), so the display effect sound and the effective period when displaying the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) During operation of the production button 17, the production sound (operation effect sound, other effect sound, etc.) is not output. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused during the vibration performance that does not involve the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

110 and 111, the execution period of the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the effects shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, when a big win is achieved as a result of the execution of the SP ready-to-win effect, while the vibration effect is executed during the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a that becomes a big hit, Vibration presentation is not executed during this stop. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the fluctuation performance is still continuing due to the vibration performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

110 and 111, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporary stop of the performance light emission by the vibration performance accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the effect button 17 does not emit light in the vibration effect that is executed during the cut-in effect, but the effect button 17 is kept in a predetermined state (rainbow color, which is the emission color for confirming the big win), over the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light in a color other than the above, but in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as white flashing or yellow flashing.

Also, while the effective period relating to the cut-in effect is occurring, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continue to emit effect light. Until elapses, part or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs may be extinguished, and then the effect light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be resumed. In this way, the operation prompting image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 can be made conspicuous, and the player can be informed of the tense scene, thereby improving the amusement of the game. Become.

In addition, when the promotion success effect is executed, the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 is started at the same time. The rainbow light emission of the game board decoration LED may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the performance button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

In addition, when the SP ready-to-win production is executed, the production pattern 70a is actually stopped after the eye-catching production and the production of returning the production pattern 70a to the display mode including the character are executed. When the result of the ready-to-win performance results in a loss, an eye-catching performance or a performance of returning the performance pattern 70a to the display mode including the characters is executed, and then the performance pattern 70a is finally stopped, and in the case of a big win. Alternatively, the production pattern 70a may be permanently stopped in the display mode of only numbers without executing the eye-catching production or the production of returning the production pattern 70a to the display mode including characters.

In addition, regarding the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 17 is not operated) 2 seconds later) (execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In addition, although the vibration performance is executed during the cut-in performance and the promotion success performance, it may be possible to execute the vibration performance during the cut-in performance and not to execute the vibration performance during the promotion success performance, Alternatively, the vibration effect may not be executed during cut-in effect and promotion success effect.

In addition, the vibration performance is executed when the big hit is temporarily stopped by the production pattern 70a with only numbers or when the big win is temporarily stopped by the production pattern 70a including characters, but the production pattern 70a with only numbers is executed. While the vibration performance is executed when the big win is temporarily stopped, the vibration performance may not be executed when the big win is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a including the character, or vice versa, or only the numbers. Vibration performance may not be executed at the time of temporary stop of the big winning number by the production pattern 70a and at the time of temporary stop of the big winning number by the production pattern 70a including the character.

In addition, when the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed (even during the cut-in effect, the winning entrance lamp NR corresponds to the display mode of the icon). It is designed to emit light in different colors), but it may be designed to emit light and extinguish in conjunction with the light emission mode of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs.

(Production example 1 when the decision production is executed during the SPSP reach production and the jackpot is achieved)
Using FIGS. 112 and 113, an effect example 1 in the case where a big win is achieved by executing a determined effect during the SPSP ready-to-win effect in the variable effect pattern 20 will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 112(a), three production patterns 70a form a ready-to-win state and are reduced and displayed in the upper left part of the screen to execute the SPSP ready-to-win production. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

When the SPSP ready-to-win effect reaches the final stage from this state, as shown in FIG. be started. Specifically, an effect is performed in which four translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are assembled from four corners of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the translucent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. An operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 emitting red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output. At the same time, the production button 17 is in a projecting state and emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 112(d), the decided success effect is started. Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state of emitting rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70 . At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds and then strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second. The game is temporarily stopped when three "5" performance symbols 70a are aligned. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and production buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the success effect and the strong vibration effect are completed, as shown in FIG. A blessing production is started to bless the big hit while the light emission continues. Then, when the blessing effect is completed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112(f), a strong vibration effect ( When the big hit determination vibration performance is started, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output.

After 4 seconds have passed, the strong vibration effect ends, but the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 continue to emit rainbow colors. When one second elapses from there, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resumes the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is extinguished.

After that, as shown in FIG. 113(g), a re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, three "5" effect symbols 70a are aligned (symbols are aligned) and moved in the depth direction to be displayed in a reduced size, and the effective period of the effect button 17 (single hit 3 seconds) is generated, An operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque performance button image imitating a performance button 17 emitting red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of an effective period is displayed at a specific position in the center of the screen, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is displayed. is output, and the production button emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 113(h), promotion success effect is started. Specifically, the three "7" production patterns 70a switched from the "5" production pattern 70a that was displayed in reduced size are moved to the front side of the screen and enlarged and displayed in a state in which three are aligned (symbols are aligned). , the promotion sound effect is output. In addition, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors, and a strong vibration effect (elevated vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 3 seconds.

Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses after the strong vibration effect is completed after the effect pattern 70a is in a normal size and temporarily stopped, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs emit effect light (other than rainbow light emission). light emission mode) is resumed, and the production button 17 is turned off.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 113(j), an eye-catching effect suggesting stop display of the effect symbol 70a is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three production patterns 70a.

After that, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect ends, as shown in FIG. Along with being displayed, if there is a first special figure pending number, the pending icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without an effective period of the effect button 17, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 are activated. It emits rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output.

When 1 second has passed from there, as shown in FIG. The symbol TZ is also permanently stopped at "777".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. A strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output. After that, when one second elapses, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the jackpot game is finished, and the first round game is started.

(Production example 2 when the decision production is executed during the SPSP reach production and the jackpot is achieved)
114 and 115, an effect example 2 in the case where a big win is achieved by executing a fixed effect during the SPSP ready-to-win effect in the variable effect pattern 16 will be described. Note that FIGS. 114(a) to (c) are the same as FIGS. 112(a) to (c), so description thereof will be omitted here.

When the effect button 17 is operated from the state of FIG. 114(c) or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. A temporary stop effect is performed at , and a big hit is notified by the effect pattern 70a, but the strong vibration effect is not performed at this point. At this time, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) continues.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state of emitting rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70 . At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds and then strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second. The game is temporarily stopped when three "5" performance symbols 70a are aligned. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and production buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the success effect and the strong vibration effect are completed, as shown in FIG. A blessing production is started to bless the big hit while the light emission continues. Then, when the blessing effect is completed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is turned off.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 115(g), an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three production patterns 70a.

Then, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, as shown in FIG. Along with being displayed, if there is a first special figure pending number, the pending icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without an effective period of the effect button 17, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 are activated. It emits rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 115(i), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, and the effect pattern 70a is stopped at "555". The symbol TZ is also permanently stopped at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. A strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output. After that, when one second elapses, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the big win game is finished, and the round game is started.

In addition, when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period of the determined effect, or when the effective period passes and the determined failure effect is executed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate, and the second movable member 73 is turned off. A failure effect image is displayed on the one-image display device 70, and a failure effect sound is output. Furthermore, part or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are extinguished, and after that, the three effect symbols are temporarily stopped by the reach-losing result (for example, "565"). When a predetermined period elapses thereafter, an eye-catching performance suggesting stop display of the performance pattern 70a is executed, and when the eye-catching performance ends, the performance pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character and is temporarily stopped. Then, the icon is redisplayed, and if there is a first special figure reservation number, the reservation icon is redisplayed. After one second has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a is officially stopped with a reach-losing result, and the special symbol TZ is also fully-stopped with a reach-losing result.

Thus, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, there is a case where the effective suggestion production is executed in the final production, so that the effective period is generated and the expectation of the big win is high. can be suggested to the player, making it possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, there is a decided success production in which the first movable member 73 operates before the pattern matching and the first movable member 73 operates after the pattern matching. Since there is a determined success performance, the performance effect of the determined performance can be effectively improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, there is a decided success production in which the first movable member 73 operates before the pattern matching and the first movable member 73 operates after the pattern matching. In the decided success effect, the period from the operation of the effect button 17 to the execution of the vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) during the valid period is different. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of exhilaration from the beginning, or to give the player an exhilaration after stirring up the anxiety of the player, and it is possible to effectively improve the amusement of the game by the contrast effect. .

112 to 115, the operation period (10 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the decided success effect and the execution period (10 seconds) of the vibration effect executed in the determined success effect. are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the determined success production. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game is a big win by means of the vibration effect, thereby making it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the vibration production (decision success vibration production) executed during the decision production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so that the operation Display sound effect when displaying the promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and effect sound when operating the effect button 17 during the valid period (operation effect sound, success effect sound, movable member operating sound effect, etc.) ) is output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the decided success production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, when three production patterns 70a in the display mode not including characters are aligned (symbol alignment) and the temporary stop is performed, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration) is performed. Since the effect is executed, it is possible to effectively inform the player of the fact that the jackpot has been won, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, when three production patterns 70a in the display mode including characters are aligned (C pattern alignment), strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration) is temporarily stopped. production) is to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player reconfirm that the jackpot has been won, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the vibration production (opening vibration production) executed at the time of the temporary stop or the opening of the jackpot game with three production patterns 70a aligned is the production button 17 effective period (display of the operation prompting image), the display sound effect when displaying the operation prompting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period Sounds (operation sound effects, other sound effects, etc.) are not output. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused during the vibration performance that does not involve the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the execution period of the vibration production executed at the time of the determined success production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the plurality of game board decoration LEDs were designed to continue emitting light during the effective period related to the determined effect, but the effective period is determined by operating the effect button 17 immediately before or from the start of the effective period. Until the passage of time, some or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs are extinguished, and in the case of executing a successful performance determined by the operation of the performance button 17 or the elapse of the effective time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned into a rainbow. It may be made to emit light. In this way, the operation prompting image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 can be made conspicuous, and the player can be informed of the tense scene, thereby improving the amusement of the game. Become.

In addition, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the effect button 17 were designed to emit rainbow light at the time of the determined success effect. Some or all of the game board decoration LEDs may be turned off, or while the first movable member 73 emits rainbow light, some or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off. may

In addition, when executing the decided success effect, the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 is started at the same time, but the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 is started first. After the start, the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may start to emit rainbow light, or the first movable member 73 may first start to emit rainbow light and then the plurality of game board decoration LEDs. And the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started. may

In addition, after the end of the blessing effect, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is turned off. The effect light emission may be restarted before the start of the re-lottery effect, the effect light emission may be restarted before the start of the eye-catching effect, or the rainbow light emission may be performed until the actual stop of the effect pattern 70a. may be continued.

In addition, when the promotion success effect is executed, the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 is started at the same time. The rainbow light emission of the game board decoration LED may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the performance button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

Further, when the SPSP ready-to-win production is executed, the production pattern 70a is actually stopped after the eye-catching production or the production of returning the production pattern 70a to the display mode including the character is executed. When the result of the ready-to-win performance results in a loss, an eye-catching performance or a performance of returning the performance pattern 70a to the display mode including the characters is executed, and then the performance pattern 70a is finally stopped, and in the case of a big win. Alternatively, the production pattern 70a may be permanently stopped in the display mode of only numbers without executing the eye-catching production or the production of returning the production pattern 70a to the display mode including characters.

In addition, regarding the vibration effect executed at the time of the decision success effect, the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 17 is not operated) 3 seconds later) (execution period of vibration effect may be variable).

In addition, although the vibration performance is executed at the time of the decision success performance or the promotion success performance, the vibration performance may be executed at the time of the decision success performance, and the vibration performance may not be executed at the time of the promotion success performance, Conversely, the vibration performance may not be executed during the determined success performance and the promotion success performance.

In addition, a vibration effect is executed at the time of a temporary stop of a big win due to the effect pattern 70a with only numbers after the blessing effect or a temporary stop of the big win due to the effect pattern 70a including characters after the eye-catching effect. However, the vibration performance is executed at the time of temporary stop of the big winning eye by the performance pattern 70a with only numbers after the blessing performance, and the vibration performance is executed at the time of temporary stop of the big winning eye by the performance pattern 70a including the character after the eye-catching performance. It may be set so that it may not be performed, or vice versa, and at the time of temporary stop of the big hit by the performance pattern 70a with only numbers after the blessing performance and the big win by the performance pattern 70a including the character after the eye-catching performance. Vibration performance may not be executed at the time of temporary stop of .

In addition, when the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed (even during the final effect, the icon before the winning entrance lamp NR is hidden is displayed. The light is emitted in a color corresponding to the display mode), but it may be made to emit light and extinguish in conjunction with the light emission mode of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs.

(Production example when the variable mission production is executed during the jackpot)
With reference to FIG. 116, an example of an effect when a variable probability mission effect is executed to determine whether or not a variable probability game state is entered during a big hit (round game) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 116(a), when the opening effect of the jackpot game is started, the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without an effective period of the effect button 17 (opening vibration effect). ) is started, the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. After that, when one second elapses, the strong vibration performance ends, the opening performance of the jackpot game ends, and the first round game starts.

After that, when the interval period after the first round game ends and the second round game is started, as shown in FIG. is started, and the words ``Defeat the enemy and the odds change'' are displayed until the second round game is completed.

Then, when the interval period after the second round game ends and the third round game is started, as shown in FIG. The variable mission production will start. Specifically, the text "destroy" is displayed, and an operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed. , the display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light. At this time, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) continues.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, a mission success effect is started as shown in FIG. 116(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state of emitting rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70 . At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, a strong vibration effect (elevated vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds, and part or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs emit rainbow light.

After that, when the mission success effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 116(e), the characters "defeat" indicating that the mission is successful are displayed, and the effect button 17 finishes emitting rainbow light, and a plurality of game board decorations are displayed. The effect light emission of the LED is resumed, and when the third round game is completed, the characters of "defeat" are erased and the round effect is resumed.

Then, when the ninth round game is started, as shown in FIG. At least 11 seconds from the start until 5 seconds have passed) occurs, and the mode selection effect for selecting the effect mode in the variable probability game state is started. Specifically, the option image of the production mode D and the option image of the production mode E are displayed, and as the operation prompting image, "Please select the mode in which the probability is changing with the cross key and press the button!" An opaque effect button image imitating the luminous effect button 17 is displayed.

After that, when the right button of the cross key 18 is operated, as shown in FIG. 116(g), the option image of the effect mode D is selected (the option image of the effect mode E is displayed in a dark color). , the option image of the effect mode E is selected (the option image of the effect mode D is displayed in a dark color).

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. It is informed that it becomes E, and the mode selection effect is completed. After that, when the 10th round game ends, the ending effect is executed, and when the ending effect ends, the variable probability game state is started.

When the mission failure effect is executed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate, and the failure effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the failure effect sound is output. . Furthermore, the mode selection effect is not executed, and the ending effect is entered.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIG. 116, the operation period (5 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the mission success production and the execution period of the vibration production (elevation vibration production) executed during the mission success production. (5 seconds) are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the mission success production. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that the vibration effect is advantageous to the player, that is, that a variable probability state will occur, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 116, the vibration production (elevation vibration production) executed at the time of the mission success production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17, so the operation promoting image (opaque production button image, gauge image ) is output, and a presentation sound (success sound effect) is output when the presentation button 17 is operated during the valid period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the decided success production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 116, the execution period of the vibration production (elevation vibration production) executed at the time of the mission success production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 116, even if the effect button 17 or the cross key 18 is operated during the mode selection effect, the vibration effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the selected production mode has a higher expectation for a big win than the non-selected production mode, and to improve the interest of the game. becomes. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised, and to avoid the inconvenience of giving the player an unpleasant feeling.

In addition, while the valid period related to the probability variable mission effect is occurring, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are designed to continue the effect light emission. Until elapses, some or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs are extinguished, and when executing the mission success effect by operating the effect button 17 or the elapse of the effective time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off. Rainbow light may be emitted. In this way, the operation prompting image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 can be made conspicuous, and the player can be informed of the tense scene, thereby improving the amusement of the game. Become.

In addition, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the effect button 17 were designed to emit rainbow light during the mission success effect. Some or all of the game board decoration LEDs may be turned off, or while the first movable member 73 emits rainbow light, some or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off. may

In addition, when executing the mission success effect, the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 is started at the same time, but the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 is started first. After the start, the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may start to emit rainbow light, or the first movable member 73 may first start to emit rainbow light and then the plurality of game board decoration LEDs. And the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started. may

In addition, regarding the vibration effect executed at the time of the mission success effect, the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 17 is not operated) 3 seconds later) (execution period of vibration effect may be variable).

Moreover, although the vibration presentation is executed at the time of the mission success presentation, the vibration presentation may not be performed at the time of the mission success presentation.

(Example of effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect)
117 and 118, a description will be given of an example of an effect when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 117(a), when the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B, "728 ” is stop-displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. The first pending icon (white icon) displayed in the portion 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1.

Here, the display mode of the icon shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to a red icon to start the icon change effect, and along with this, the winning hole lamp NR flashes red from the state of being extinguished. By changing to the state, the lamp change effect is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117(c), while the production pattern 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right fluctuation display areas of the production pattern 70a that has been variably displayed, the central fluctuation display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect (normal reach) for variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed.

Then, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 117(d), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second The pending icon display area 70D is erased together with the pending icon.

After that, when it develops into SPSP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 117(e), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, and the icon display area 70C displaying the icon is erased together with the icon. At this time, the prize-winning lamp NR is not turned off as the icon is erased, and the lamp change effect of the prize-winning lamp NR continues.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device is hidden and the prize winning opening lamp NR is turned off as shown in FIG. 117(f).

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. maintained.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. is displayed during the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win performance (including the execution period of the re-lottery performance to determine whether the temporarily stopped jackpot performance symbols are promoted to the jackpot performance symbols of higher value for the player). However, here too, the win-win lamp NR remains turned off.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win production that becomes a loss ends (the production control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a loss), as shown in FIG. A stop screen (second standby screen) in which the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) are displayed without performing shaking fluctuation). , the variable performance ends without restarting the ramp change performance.

At this time, the same white icon as before the power supply is stopped is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but the square icon is displayed. By displaying the area image, the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which the effect image such as the background image can be displayed.

After that, when the next variable performance is started, as shown in FIG. The first pending icon (white icon) that has been displayed is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect that becomes a big hit ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a big win), as shown in FIG. ``777'' jackpot effect pattern 70a that suggests the type of the current jackpot game (here, the first jackpot game) without performing swing fluctuation/swing display) (formed the reach state before power off) A combination of production patterns different from the reach combination by the production patterns of 3 ↓ 3”), and a stop screen with the special pattern TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and a lamp change effect is displayed at the winning entrance lamp NR. The variable performance ends without restarting.

In addition to the variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, other variable performances (variation performance in which normal variation is performed, variable performance in which shortened variation is performed, variable performance in which normal reach performance is performed, SP reach performance is executed), when the power supply that was stopped during the execution is resumed and the execution period of the effect ends, the temporary stop display (shake fluctuation/swing display) of the effect symbol 70a is not performed and " 753", or a combination of the same production pattern as the ready-to-win combination by the production pattern that formed the ready-to-win state before the power was cut off, or a combination of different production patterns, which is a stop display (static display). will be

Also, with regard to the special symbol TZ, whether the control state of the game is initialized or restored, whether the state after that is the normal game state or the specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state) Regardless of whether or not there is a special symbol TZ, the same display mode (shape, design) will be stop-displayed (stationary display) with numbers that are in the same combination as the effect symbol 70a.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 118(l), information indicating the type of the jackpot game (“MAX jackpot” indicating that it is the first jackpot game) is displayed on the image display device. An opening effect is started, and the first reserved icon display area 70B, the second reserved icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

In addition, while the initial screen and/or the returning screen are displayed, the winning entrance lamp NR remains turned off, but the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot) ) to turn on the winning entrance lamp NR.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 117 to 118, the power supply stopped during the execution of the variable production that is stop-displayed after the production design 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (shake fluctuation) is restarted. After the game control state is restored, the special symbol fluctuation time has passed and the special symbol stop designation command (if the special symbol stop designation command is missed and the state is shifted to the customer waiting state after that, the customer waiting state designation command) is received, the production design 70a is stop-displayed (stationary display) without the temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation/swing display) of the production design 70a. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed (still display) after the power supply stopped during execution of the losing variation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. When it is done, the combination of the production design which is the initial design at the time of power restoration is stopped (still displayed) instead of the normal losing production design. Therefore, there is no need to perform complicated processing such as determining the stop display (static display) effect pattern by lottery. It is possible to grasp that the variable performance that has been performed has ended.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 117 to 118, the production pattern is stopped and displayed (still displayed) after the power supply stopped during execution of the big hit variation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. When there is, the combination of the jackpot production pattern is stopped and displayed (still displayed). Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the control state of the game is the restoration of the power supply, and that the variation performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped was the jackpot variation performance.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 117 to 118, after the control state of the game is restored, when the combination of the jackpot production pattern is stopped and displayed (still display), the reach state is formed before the power supply is stopped. It is possible to stop display (stationary display) a combination of big hit production patterns different from the reach combination by the production pattern that was used. Therefore, there is no need to be conscious of the jackpot performance symbols that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed before the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 117 to 118, when the execution period of the promotion production described above is included in the variable production executed when the power supply is stopped, the power supply is restarted and the control is performed. After the state is restored, the jackpot effect pattern is stopped and displayed (still displayed) without executing the promotion effect. Therefore, since no useless effect is performed until the effect pattern is stopped (stationary display), the player is immediately notified that the variable effect being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped was the big hit variable effect. It is possible to grasp the

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 117 to 118, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the losing variation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and the jackpot fluctuation production is stopped during the execution The display mode (type of display screen, display order of display screens) of the image display device after the power supply is restarted is the same as when the power supply is restarted and the game control state is restored. Therefore, simple display control can be performed without being conscious of whether the losing variation effect is being executed or the big win variation effect is being executed, and the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted. can be reduced.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 117 to 118, the special symbols TZ are displayed in the same manner as before the power supply is stopped after the power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. Then, the numbers that are the same combination as the production pattern 70a are stop-displayed (still-displayed). Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped has ended.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, when the power supply that was stopped during the display of the icon is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the display of the returning screen is finished, and then the next operation is performed. Until the variable effect (scrolling of the effect pattern 70a) is started, a rectangular area image is displayed in the icon display area 70C, so that the display space (display area) of the icon is changed to a background image or the like. The effect image is secured in a displayable state, but the icon is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, when the stopped power supply is resumed while the pending icon is being displayed and the control state of the game is restored, the display of the returning screen is finished, and then the next operation is performed. Until the variable effect starts, a rectangular area image is displayed in the suspended icon display area, so that the suspended icon display space (display area) can display the effect image such as the background image. It is now reserved and has a pending icon. Therefore, even when the power supply is stopped, it is possible to grasp that the suspended variable performance is not extinguished, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the variation production corresponding to the icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production (the lighting color (blue, red , Rainbow) When the stopped power supply is resumed during the storage of the special figure determination information to be changed to the rainbow) and the control state of the game is restored, the winning opening lamp NR is hit big without restarting the lamp change effect. It is designed to be in a notification mode (lights out or white lighted) that does not suggest the degree of winning expectation. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the ramp change effect is restarted even though the change effect is not executed.

After the end of the execution period of the big hit variation effect, the stop screen in which the big win effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped is displayed. A second standby screen may be displayed in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed).

Also, after the execution period of the big hit variation performance is over, the stop screen in which the big win performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stop-displayed is displayed, but the stop screen is not displayed and the jackpot performance pattern 70a is displayed. You may start the opening effect of the jackpot game in which is not displayed. In addition, information indicating the type of jackpot game may be displayed in the opening effect, a jackpot special pattern TZ of "777" may be displayed, or a special pattern of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, may be displayed. TZ may be displayed.

Further, after the execution period of the loss variation performance is over, the performance symbol 70a which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration and the special symbol TZ are displayed, and after the execution period of the big win variation performance is over, the big win is performed. The opening effect of the jackpot game may be started without displaying the stop screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stop-displayed.

In addition, when it is made possible to execute a specific effect of inciting whether or not the big win game is executed without displaying the ready-to-win state effect symbol 70a in the variable effect (makes people expect that the big win game is executed), the specific effect After the power supply stopped during execution of the performance is resumed and the control state is restored, the performance pattern 70a, which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, is stopped and displayed (statically displayed) in the case of a loss, and in the case of a big win. You may make it stop-display (still display) the big hit production|presentation pattern 70a.

Further, when the combination of the jackpot performance symbols is stopped (still displayed) after the game control state is recovered, one of the combinations of the plurality of jackpot performance symbols corresponding to the type of the jackpot game to be executed thereafter. may be stopped and displayed.

In this case, for example, the combination of jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the first jackpot game is “333” and “777”, and the combination of jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the second jackpot game is “222” and “ 444", "666" and "888", and the combination of the jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the third jackpot game is "111", "555" and "999".

Then, when the ready-to-win combination before the power supply is stopped is "1↓1" constituting a part of the combination of the jackpot performance symbols suggesting the execution of the third jackpot game, the jackpot game to be executed after that is the first jackpot game. In the case of a jackpot game, one of ``333'' and ``777'' (a combination of jackpot performance symbols different from the ready-to-win combination of the performance symbols forming the ready-to-win state) is stopped and displayed, and then executed. When the jackpot game is the third jackpot game, any one of ``111'', ``555'' and ``999'' (a combination of jackpot performance symbols that are the same as or different from the ready-to-win combination by the performance symbols forming the ready-to-win state) should be stopped.

In addition, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the special symbol TZ is not stopped (still displayed) with a number that is the same combination as the production pattern 70a, but is a combination different from the production pattern 70a. You may make it stop display (still display) with a number.

Further, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, when the normal game state and the customer waiting state are displayed, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still displayed), while the power supply is stopped. When the specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state) and customer waiting state are after the restart and the control state is restored, stop display (stationary display) of the production pattern 70a, The special symbol TZ may be stopped (still displayed).

(An example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect)
FIG. 119 and FIG. 120 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 119(a), the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1, the second display portion 70B2, and the third display portion 70B3 of the first pending icon display area 70B. Suppose that the losing effect symbol 70a of "728" is stop-displayed when the player is on.

After that, when the variable production that is the preliminary fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. The first pending icon (white icon) displayed in the third display portion 70B3 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, the first display portion 70B1, and the second display portion 70B2.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a that starts the variable display, so that the first effect of the look-ahead effect effect is started, and the first pending icon ( The final display mode of the icon (= red icon) is changed to a blue icon to start the pending icon change effect, and along with this, the winning entrance lamp NR changes from an off state to a blue flashing state. A change production is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119(c), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 119(d), after the performance symbol 70a indicating the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the failure performance symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stop-displayed. .

After that, when the variable production that becomes the preliminary fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. The displayed first pending icon is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a that starts the variable display, so that the second look-ahead effect effect is started, and the pending icon change effect and the lamp change effect are continued. Become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 119(f), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device becomes non-display and the winning hole lamp NR is extinguished as shown in FIG. 119(g).

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. To maintain the turned-off state without resuming the change performance.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. is displayed over the execution period of the pre-variation, but the win-win lamp NR remains turned off here as well.

After that, when the execution period of the advance fluctuation ends (the production control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a failure), as shown in FIG. Without performing, the stop screen in which the production pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) are displayed, and the lamp change production is not restarted. Fluctuation ends.

At this time, the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B displays a white icon that is not the blue icon before the power supply is stopped, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C. By displaying the rectangular area image, the display space (display area) for the icon is secured in such a manner that the effect image such as the background image can be displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. 120(k), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first 1 pending icon (white icon) is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, when a lottery for the newly executed icon change effect is won, the display mode of the icon shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to a blue icon according to the result, and the icon change is displayed. The performance begins. On the other hand, since the lottery relating to the lamp change effect is not newly executed, the lamp change effect is not restarted while the prize winning entrance lamp NR is kept turned off.

In addition, when a lottery relating to the alternative notice effect performed by restarting the power supply is won, the mini-character MCB is displayed on the image display device according to the result, and the mini-character MCB moves out of the frame to substitute. A preview effect is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120(l), the dialogue uttered by ally A is displayed in the dialogue window displayed on the image display device, and a voice corresponding to the dialogue from the audio output device 9, "Your chance has arrived!" is displayed, the dialog announcement effect is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 120(m), while the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the center variable display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect (normal reach) for variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed.

After that, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 120 (n), SP reach effect is started, effect pattern 70a is displayed in reduced size at the upper left of the screen, first pending icon display area 70B, and second The pending icon display area 70D is erased.

Then, when it develops into SPSP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 120(o), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that becomes a big hit ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a big hit), as shown in FIG. A jackpot performance pattern 70a of ``333'' suggesting the type of one jackpot game) and a special pattern TZ are temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking fluctuation), then stop-displayed, and the variable performance ends.

In addition, while the initial screen and/or the returning screen are displayed, the winning entrance lamp NR remains turned off, but the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot) ) to turn on the winning entrance lamp NR.

In addition, when the special figure stop designation command cannot be received during the fluctuation production (temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation) of the production pattern 70a), the temporary stop display (shake fluctuation) production pattern 70a is not displayed. , the temporary stop display (shake fluctuation) is continued.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 119 to 120, when the power supply stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure stored at the time of restoration It is possible to execute an alternative notice effect different from the continuous notice effect without restarting the continuous notice effect in the variable effect corresponding to the determination information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the continuous advance notice effect due to the stoppage of the power supply, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game. It should be noted that the same applies to the case where the power supply that was stopped during the execution of another continuous advance notice effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 119 to 120, the special icon is displayed (including the case where it has not changed until the final display mode and the case where it has changed until the final display mode). When the power supply stopped during icon display is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the suspended icon displayed as the special icon is displayed as the normal icon. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after resuming the power supply without being conscious of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 119 to 120, when the power supply stopped during execution of the icon change production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration In the variable effect corresponding to , the pending icon change effect is not executed, but the icon change effect can be executed again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the icon change effect due to the stoppage of the power supply, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 119 to 120, during the execution of the variation production corresponding to the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration, even if the icon change production is executed again, The continuation of the stage suggested before the power supply was cut off is no longer executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an icon change effect in accordance with the contents of the current variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the variable production corresponding to the holding icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production (the lighting color (blue, red , Rainbow) Even if the power supply stopped during the storage of the special figure determination information to be changed to the rainbow) is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the lamp change effect is not restarted. The lamp NR is set to a notification mode (extinguished or lit in white) that does not suggest the degree of expectation for winning a big win. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the ramp change effect is restarted even though the change effect is not executed.

(Specific example 1 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 1 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. FIG. FIG. 121 is a timing chart 1 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 122(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 1 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The processing for starting the variable production when the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E while the fluctuating BGM is being output changes from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode. , and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TI displayed as Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation). Also, the icon TI is in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion).

In addition, the "specific update mode" when switching the special figure reservation number (equivalent to the second reservation display) displayed in the first reservation number display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is the reservation icon This is a display mode different from the display mode when additionally displaying (increase display) or shifting display (decrease display) (corresponding to the first reserved display). Specifically, the display mode is such that the display content is switched by non-animation for one frame.

Also, the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ is performed by blinking the LED of the sub-first variable display 81, but since blinking cannot be expressed in the drawing, the variable display is represented by a double circle. It shall be. Also, the LED of the first sub-hold display 83 is represented by a double circle to indicate that it is blinking.

Next, at the timing of T1, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the winning signal, the look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), the number of the first special figure pending is changed from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased and displayed from "1" to "2" in a specific update mode, and the first A pending icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in the second position in the pending icon display area 70B in the normal addition mode, and a winning sound based on the current winning is output (see FIG. 122(a)).

Note that the "normal addition mode" when additionally displaying the pending icon is when additionally displaying the pending icon HI when a winning command (a winning signal) is received that increases the pending number by one. This is the display mode. Specifically, it is a display mode in which only one additional display is performed in an area corresponding to the number of special figures pending by animation for 10 frames so that the pending icon HI gradually increases from a minimum size.

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 122(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (extinguishing). (See FIG. 122(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The processing for starting the variable production when the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 122(d)). .

After that, at the timing of T5, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 122(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 122(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), to end the fluctuation production will not be processed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. is extended, and accordingly the output of the BGM is maintained during fluctuation (see FIG. 122(f)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, A process for starting the variable production when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "1" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the first One pending icon HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B is shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation of 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Also, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 122(g)).

Then, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (Fig. 122 ( g)).

Then, at the timing of T9, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the scrolling of the background image is continued. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 122(h)).

Next, at the timing of T10, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("962"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the icon TI continues rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 122(i)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), to end the fluctuation production will not be processed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. (See FIG. 122(i)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", so the customer waiting state (game waiting state) transition to When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m performs processing for ending the variable production.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (final stop), and the special symbols are displayed. TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode (“248”), and the first lamp pattern LZ is finally stopped in a losing mode (lights out) (see FIG. 122(j)).

At the timing of T7, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. is not normally received by the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 (command abnormality occurs), the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is transmitted by the effect control unit 130m. The same processing as when normal reception is not possible (command error occurs) is performed.

Here, although the specific example 1 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state (command abnormality has occurred), the game state is the specific game state (time reduction game state, probability variable game state) Even if a game ball wins in the second starting port 47 and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

In addition, when the connector of a predetermined detection sensor (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) is disconnected, an abnormality notification (error notification) is immediately performed, but the main control In the case of a command abnormality due to disconnection of the connector of the command line for communicating between the substrate 110 and the performance control substrate 130, the abnormality notification is not performed.

(Specific example 2 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 2 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124. FIG. FIG. 123 is a timing chart 2 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 124(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG. This is production example 1.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, A process for starting the variable production when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the winning signal, the look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), the number of the first special figure pending is changed from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "3" to "4" in a specific update mode, and the first A pending icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in a normal addition mode at the fourth place in the pending icon display area 70B, and a winning sound based on the current winning is output (see FIG. 124(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 124(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (extinguishing). (See FIG. 124(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, A process for starting the variable production when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 124(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icons is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 124(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 124(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), to end the fluctuation production will not be processed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended. Also, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained and the look-ahead zone effect continues (see FIG. 124(g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of 1 special design is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (command abnormality occurs), the first special figure pending number that the production control unit 130m memorizes (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Become. At this time, the state of FIG. 124(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), to end the fluctuation production will not be processed. At this time, the state of FIG. 124(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The processing for starting the variable production when the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "3" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "3" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the first The surplus reserved icon HI displayed third in the reserved icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (past fluctuation The production pattern 70a), which was scheduled to be stop-displayed in the production, is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 124(h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts to scroll after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation). (See FIG. 124(h)).

When the redundant reserved icons are erased and the required reserved icons are shifted and displayed, the redundant reserved icons may be left as they are and the required reserved icons may be shifted and displayed.

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 124(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the fluctuation production executed during the fluctuation display of the special design in which the first special figure reservation number becomes "0" In (Target of expectation level suggestion by prefetch zone production), normal zone production (display of prefetch zone background, display of blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is executed along with the notice scenario, and the production pattern 70a is the real one. The look-ahead zone effect ends at the point of stop.

At the timing of T7 to T9, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from (command abnormality occurs), the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m (command at stop, command at start) is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m (command abnormality occurs).

Here, at the timing of T10, the case where the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is from "3" to "1" was described, but the first special figure pending number is " 4" to "2", and when the first special figure reservation number changes from "2" to "0", that is, the number of reservations and the production control unit 130m grasped by the main control unit 110m If the divergence from the pending number is "2", the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state (command abnormality has occurred) was described specific example 2, the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, probability variable game state), the basic flow is the same as described above even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

(Specific example 3 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 3 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 125. FIG. FIG. 123 is a timing chart 2 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m, and FIGS. 125(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG. This is production example 2.

Note that FIG. 124 and FIG. 125 are different in that the look-ahead effect rendering is executed instead of the look-ahead zone rendering as the continuous announcement rendering, and the icon change rendering is executed, so the description of the common parts is omitted here. Only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Variation display of the pattern is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, A process for starting the variable production when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI (FIG. 125 ( d) see).

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed behind the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 125(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect presentation is temporarily stopped, and the icon change presentation is started. Specifically, the third pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 125(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 125(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), to end the fluctuation production will not be processed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended. Also, the blue icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 125(g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of 1 special design is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (command abnormality occurs), the first special figure pending number that the production control unit 130m memorizes (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Become. Therefore, the state of FIG. 125(g) is maintained without execution of the look-ahead effect presentation (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound).

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), to end the fluctuation production will not be processed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 125(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The processing for starting the variable production when the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "3" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "3" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the first The surplus pending icon HI displayed second in the pending icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and the thirdly displayed pending icon HI is erased by one frame of non-animation. displayed second. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 125(h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and the look-ahead effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed behind the production design 70a and an effect sound is output in accordance with the advance notice scenario. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 125(h)).

Thereafter, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased and the look-ahead effect production is temporarily stopped, and the icon change production is executed, and the production pattern 70a is displayed at high speed. to scroll. Specifically, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a red icon according to the changing scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 125(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m is in a state where various commands from the main control unit 110m can be normally received, the variation executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the number of first special symbol reservations becomes "0" A look-ahead effect presentation (display of an effect image EF, output of an effect sound) and an icon change presentation (the icon change presentation) are also executed in the presentation (target of expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead preview presentation). Then, the look-ahead effect performance ends at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed, and the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

At the timing of T7 to T9, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from (command abnormality occurs), the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m (command at stop, command at start) is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m (command abnormality occurs).

Here, at the timing of T10, the case where the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is from "3" to "1" was described, but the first special figure pending number is " 4" to "2", and when the first special figure reservation number changes from "2" to "0", that is, the number of reservations and the production control unit 130m grasped by the main control unit 110m If the divergence from the pending number is "2", the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state (command abnormality has occurred), the specific example 3 was described, but the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, probability variable game state), the basic flow is the same as described above even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 123 to 125, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, three) of pending icons (first pending information), when the production control unit 130m receives a command (signal at the start) at the start of the variable display in which the number of special figures pending is a predetermined number, the surplus pending icon of the specific number of pending icons The necessary number of pending icons (eg, the first and second pending icons) are shift-displayed without shift-displaying the third pending icon (eg, the third pending icon). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 123 to 125, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, three) of the pending icon (first pending information) that is two more than the predetermined number (eg, one) During the display, when the production control unit 130m receives the command (starting signal) at the start of the variable display where the special figure pending number is a predetermined number, the number of pending icons that is one less than the specific number is displayed. , a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 123 to 125, in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the specific number (for example, one) two more than the predetermined number ( For example, three) while displaying the number of reservations, when the production control unit 130m receives a command (signal at the start) at the start of the variable display in which the number of special figures is a predetermined number, a number that is one less than the specific number It is designed to display a predetermined number of reservations without displaying the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Specific example 4 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 4 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. FIG. 126 is a timing chart 3 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 127(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 3 of FIG. This is production example 1.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, A process for starting the variable production when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the winning signal, the look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), the number of the first special figure pending is changed from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "3" to "4" in a specific update mode, and the first A suspended icon HI is additionally displayed in the normal addition mode at the fourth position in the suspended icon display area 70B, and a winning sound based on the current winning is output (see FIG. 127(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Also, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (see FIG. 127(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (extinguishing). (See FIG. 127(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, A process for starting the variable production when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 127(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icons is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 127(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 127(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), to end the fluctuation production will not be processed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended. In addition, the zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is maintained and the prefetch zone effect continues (see FIG. 127(g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of 1 special design is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (command abnormality occurs), the first special figure pending number that the production control unit 130m memorizes (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Become. At this time, the state of FIG. 127(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), to end the fluctuation production will not be processed. At this time, the state of FIG. 127(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (command abnormality occurs), the first special figure pending number that the production control unit 130m memorizes (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Become. At this time, the state of FIG. 127(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), to end the fluctuation production will not be processed. At this time, the state of FIG. 127(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, A process for starting the variable production when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "3" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "3" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the first The surplus reserved icons HI displayed at the second and third positions in the reserved icon display area 70B are erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a ( The production pattern 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production, is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 127(h)).

Then, the required one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts to scroll after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation). (See FIG. 127(h)).

After that, at the timing of T13, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 127(i)).

After that, when the production control section 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control section 110m, the look-ahead zone production ends when the production pattern 70a actually stops.

In addition, at the timing of T7 to T11, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from (command abnormality occurs), the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m (command at stop, command at start) is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m (command abnormality occurs).

Here, at the timing of T12, the case where the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is from "3" to "0" was described, but the first special figure reservation number is " 4" to "1", that is, if the divergence between the number of reservations grasped by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations grasped by the production control unit 130m is "3", the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state (command abnormality has occurred) was described specific example 4, but the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, probability variable game state), the basic flow is the same as described above even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

(Specific example 5 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 5 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 128. FIG. FIG. 126 is a timing chart 3 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 128(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 3 of FIG. This is production example 2.

Note that FIG. 127 and FIG. 128 are different in that a look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of a look-ahead zone effect as the continuous notice effect, and an icon change effect is executed, so description of common parts is omitted here. Only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Variation display of the pattern is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, A process for starting the variable production when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI.

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed behind the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 128(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect presentation is temporarily stopped, and the icon change presentation is started. Specifically, the third pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 128(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 128(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), to end the fluctuation production will not be processed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended. Also, the blue icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 128(g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of 1 special design is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Become. Therefore, the state of FIG. 128(g) is maintained without execution of the look-ahead effect presentation (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound).

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), to end the fluctuation production will not be processed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 128(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (command abnormality occurs), the first special figure pending number that the production control unit 130m memorizes (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Become. Therefore, the state of FIG. 128(g) is maintained without execution of the look-ahead effect presentation (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound).

After that, at the timing of T11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), to end the fluctuation production will not be processed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended (see FIG. 128(g)).

After that, at the timing of T12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, A process for starting the variable production when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "3" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "3" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the first The first and second surplus pending icon HIs displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are deleted by one frame of non-animation, and the thirdly displayed pending icon HI is deleted for one frame. Appears first in non-animation. Further, all the performance patterns 70a including the performance patterns 70a displaced from the stop position (the performance patterns 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display).

Then, the required one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and the look-ahead effect performance is executed. Specifically, a red effect image EF is displayed behind and below the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 128(h)).

After that, at the timing of T13, the icon change performance is executed simultaneously with the completion of the shift display of the icon, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect performance is finished, and the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon according to the changing scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 128(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change production ends.

In addition, at the timing of T7 to T11, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from (command abnormality occurs), the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m (command at stop, command at start) is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m (command abnormality occurs).

Here, at the timing of T12, the case where the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is from "3" to "0" was described, but the first special figure reservation number is " 4" to "1", that is, if the divergence between the number of reservations grasped by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations grasped by the production control unit 130m is "3", the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state (command abnormality has occurred) was described specific example 5, but the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, probability variable game state), the basic flow is the same as described above even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 126 to 128, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, four) of pending icons (first pending information), when the production control unit 130m receives a command (starting signal) at the start of the variable display in which the special figure pending number is a predetermined number, the number of pending icons that is one less than the specific number is displayed. A predetermined number of pending icons are displayed without Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 126 to 128, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, four) of the pending icon (first pending information) three more than the predetermined number (eg, one) When the production control unit 130m receives a command (starting signal) at the start of the variable display in which the special figure pending number is a predetermined number during the display, the number of pending icons that is one less than the specific number is displayed. A number of reserved icons less than a specific number by two is displayed, and then a predetermined number of reserved icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 126 to 128, in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the specific number (for example, one) three more than the predetermined number ( For example, four) while displaying the number of reservations, when the production control unit 130m receives the command (signal at the start) of the variable display when the number of special figures reservation is a predetermined number, 1 and 2 than the specific number It is designed to display a predetermined number of holds without displaying a smaller number of holds. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Specific example 6 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 6 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. FIG. FIG. 129 is a timing chart 4 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m, and FIGS. 130(a) to (h) correspond to (a) to (h) in the timing chart 4 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, A process for starting the variable production when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the winning signal, the look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), the number of the first special figure pending is changed from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "3" to "4" in a specific update mode, and the first A pending icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in the normal addition mode at the fourth position in the pending icon display area 70B, and a winning sound based on the current winning is output (see FIG. 130(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 130(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (extinguishing). (See FIG. 130(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, A process for starting the variable production when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 130(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the icon shift display is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Also, the third pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 130(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action (effect action) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 130(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), to end the fluctuation production will not be processed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended. In addition, the zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is maintained to continue the prefetch zone effect, and the blue icon is maintained to continue the icon change effect (Fig. 130 ( g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of 1 special design is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (command abnormality occurs), the first special figure pending number that the production control unit 130m memorizes (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Become. Therefore, the state of FIG. 130(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), to end the fluctuation production will not be processed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 130(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (command abnormality occurs), the first special figure pending number that the production control unit 130m memorizes (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Become. Therefore, the state of FIG. 130(g) is maintained.

After that, at the timing of T11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), to end the fluctuation production will not be processed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 130(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of 1 special design is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (command abnormality occurs), the first special figure pending number that the production control unit 130m memorizes (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Become. Therefore, the state of FIG. 130(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T13, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), to end the fluctuation production will not be processed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 130(g) is maintained.

After that, at the timing of T14, when the stop time of the special symbols has elapsed, the game enters a customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "3" to "0 , and a process of setting a waiting timer until the customer waiting demonstration effect is started is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "3" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the first The surplus reserved icons HI displayed in the first to third positions in the reserved icon display area 70B and the icons displayed in the icon display area 70C are erased by one frame of non-animation, and icon change effect and The look-ahead zone production ends. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display). , The special symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ is finally stopped in a losing mode (lights out) (see FIG. 130(h)).

At the timing of T7 to T13, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from (command abnormality occurs), the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m (command at stop, command at start) is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m (command abnormality occurs).

Here, at the timing of T14, the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m explained the case where the customer waiting state designation command was received in the state of "3", but the first special Even when the customer waiting state designation command is received when the figure pending number is "4", "2", or "1", the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state (command abnormality has occurred) was described specific example 6, the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, probability variable game state), the basic flow is the same as described above even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 129 to 130, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the customer waiting state designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production design 70a, the predetermined All the production patterns 70a (the production patterns 70a which were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the production patterns 70a shifted from the stopped position are displayed (finally stopped) at the stop position. ing. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable effect has ended (transition to the customer waiting state), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Concrete example 7 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 7 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 and 132. FIG. FIG. 131 is a timing chart 5 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 132(a) to (h) correspond to (a) to (h) in the timing chart 5 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

129 and 131 are different only in that the command received at the timing of T14 is the customer waiting designation command or the opening designation command. Only part will be explained.

At the timing of T14, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the jackpot game (special game) is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the jackpot A process for starting the opening effect of the game is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E remains "3", and is displayed in the effect pattern 70a and the icon display area. The pending icon HI and the corresponding icon are erased, and the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are terminated. In addition, the special symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined failure mode ("248"), and the first lamp symbol LZ is permanently stopped in a failure mode (lights off), and an opening effect image is displayed (Fig. 132 ( h)).

After that, during the jackpot game or after the jackpot game is finished (time saving game state, variable probability game state), when the production control unit 130m can normally receive the first special figure reservation number designation command from the main control unit 110m , The first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is updated (increased display, decrease display).

At the timing of T7 to T13, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from (command abnormality occurs), the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m (command at stop, command at start) is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m (command abnormality occurs).

Here, at the timing of T14, the first special figure pending number that the effect control unit 130m memorizes (knows) explained the case where the opening designation command is received in a state of "3", but the first special figure pending Even when the opening specifying command is received with the number being "4", "2", or "1", the basic flow is the same as described above.

In addition, here, the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state (command abnormality has occurred) was described specific example 7, but the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, probability variable game state), the basic flow is the same as described above even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the opening designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production design 70a, the predetermined All the performance symbols 70a (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) including the performance symbols 70a deviated from the existing stop position are displayed (mainly stopped) at the stop position, and the jackpot game is performed. An opening effect image is displayed. Therefore, the opening effect is not hindered by the effect pattern, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Concrete example 8 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 8 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134. FIG. FIG. 133 is a timing chart 6 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m, and FIGS. 134(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The processing for starting the variable production when the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the icon shift display is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Also, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 134(a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this timing, the command at the time of winning transmitted from the main control unit 110m (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the signal at the time of winning, the prefetch designation command) cannot be normally received by the production control unit 130m (command abnormality has occurred) In this case, the processing for updating the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1" (see FIG. 134(b)).

After that, at the timing of T3, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 134(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), to end the fluctuation production will not be processed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended. In addition, the zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is maintained to continue the prefetch zone effect, and the blue icon is maintained to continue the icon change effect (Fig. 134 ( d) see).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of 1 special design is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. Then, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is from "1" to "1", that is, the process for starting the variable production without changing the first special figure reservation number is done.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is maintained and displayed as "1", and the second number in the first reservation icon display area 70B , a hold icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in a special addition mode. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 134(e)).

In addition, the "special addition mode" when additionally displaying (increasing display) the pending icon (equivalent to the first pending display) by receiving the start command (starting signal) means that the production control unit 130m It is a display mode when the transition of the special figure pending number that can not occur unless the command from is successfully received. Specifically, the display mode is such that the suspension icon (corresponding to the first suspension display) is additionally displayed in non-animation for one frame so that it has a normal size from the beginning. Further, the special addition modes include a special addition mode of additionally displaying one pending icon, a special adding mode of additionally displaying two pending icons at the same time, a special adding mode of simultaneously additionally displaying three pending icons, and four pending icons. There is a type of special addition mode that additionally displays two at the same time.

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (Fig. 134 ( e) see).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started. Regardless of whether or not it is additionally displayed in the additional mode, it will be in a state where the production motion is being performed in the same motion mode (see FIG. 134(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable production (SP ready-to-win production ends), the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a temporarily stop in the ready-to-win losing mode ("878"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action (effect action) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 134(g)).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (extinguishing). (See FIG. 134(h)).

After that, at the timing of T9, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, A process for starting the variable production when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "1" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One pending icon HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B is shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation of 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 134(i)).

Next, at the timing of T10, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue icon, A changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so the icon is in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (Fig. 134 (j )reference).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change production ends.

In addition, at the timing of T2 to T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (command at winning, command at stop) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from (a command abnormality occurs), the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m (command at the time of winning, command at the time of stop) is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m (command abnormality occurs).

Here, at the timing of T5, the case where the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1" was described, but the first special figure reservation number is " 0" to "0", if the first special figure reservation number is from "2" to "2", if the first special figure reservation number is from "3" to "3", that is, the main control If the number of reservations stored (grasped) by the unit 110m and the number of reservations stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m are the same, the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state (command abnormality has occurred) was described specific example 8, the game state is a specific game state (reduction game state, probability variable game state), the basic flow is the same as described above even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 133 to 134, during the display of a predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending icon (first pending information) in the pending icon display area, the special figure pending number is specified When the production control unit 130m receives the command (signal at the start) at the start of the variable display that is the number, after displaying the pending icon of one more than the predetermined number (for example, two), those pending icons is shifted to display a predetermined number of pending icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 133 to 134, while displaying the number of reservations of a predetermined number (for example, one) in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 or the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, When the production control unit 130m receives a command (starting signal) at the start of the variable display in which the figure holding number is a predetermined number, the holding number that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, two) is not displayed. , to display a predetermined number of pending numbers. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 133 to 134, the pending icon (first pending information) is not displayed in the pending icon display area, but the special figure pending number is "0" while the icon is displayed. When the production control unit 130m receives the command (signal at the start) at the start of the variable display, the number of pending icons that is one more than “0” (for example, one) is displayed, and then the pending icon is displayed. By shifting display, the pending icon is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 133 to 134, while the number of reservations of "0" is displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the special figure reservation number When the production control unit 130m receives the command (signal at the start) at the start of the variable display that becomes "0", without displaying the number of holds that is one more than "0" (for example, one), " 0” is displayed (maintained). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Specific example 9 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 8 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. FIG. FIG. 135 is a timing chart 7 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m, and FIGS. 136(a) to (f) correspond to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

First, at the timing of T0, the first special symbol holding number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "2" to "1", and the process of starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the icon shift display is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Also, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 136). (a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this timing, the command at the time of winning transmitted from the main control unit 110m (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the signal at the time of winning, the prefetch designation command) cannot be normally received by the production control unit 130m (command abnormality has occurred) In this case, the process of updating the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1" (see FIG. 136(b)).

Furthermore, at the timing of T3, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "2" to "3" by winning a game ball in the first starting port 45. At this timing, the command at the time of winning transmitted from the main control unit 110m (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the signal at the time of winning, the prefetch designation command) cannot be normally received by the production control unit 130m (command abnormality has occurred) In this case, the process of updating the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1".

After that, at the timing of T4, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 136(c)).

Next, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), processing to end the fluctuation production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended. In addition, the zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is maintained to continue the prefetch zone effect, and the blue icon is maintained to continue the icon change effect (Fig. 136 ( d) see).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of 1 special design is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. Then, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is from "1" to "2", that is, the first special figure reservation number is increased by 1 and the process of starting the variable production is performed. will be

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased and displayed from "1" to "2" in a specific update mode, and the first Suspended icons HI (white icons) are additionally displayed in a special addition manner (two at the same time) at the second and third positions in the suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 136(e)).

In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 136(e)).

Then, the necessary three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (Fig. 136 ( e) see).

After that, at the timing of T7, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are rotating (normally additionally displayed, or specially added). 136(f)).

In addition, at the timing of T2 to T5, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (command for winning, command for stopping) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from (a command abnormality occurs), the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m (command at the time of winning, command at the time of stop) is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m (command abnormality occurs).

Here, at the timing of T6, the case where the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m changes from "1" to "2", but the first special figure pending number is " 0" to "1", if the first special figure reservation number is from "2" to "3", if the first special figure reservation number is from "3" to "4", that is, the main control If the number of reservations stored (grasped) by the unit 110m is one more than the number of reservations stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m, the basic flow is the same as described above. becomes.

Specifically, when the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number command as a start time signal, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m , The first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased by "1" in a specific update mode, and the effect control unit 130m stores (grasp ), when the number of the first special figure pending changes from "2" to "3", the third and fourth of the first pending icon display area 70B, the pending icon HI (white icon) is a special additional mode (Two at the same time) will be additionally displayed. Then, the pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI.

Also, here, the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state (command abnormality has occurred) was described specific example 9, the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, probability variable game state), the basic flow is the same as described above even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

(Specific example 10 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
137 and 138, a specific example 10 in which the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described. FIG. 137 is a timing chart 8 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 138(a) to (f) correspond to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 8 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

First, at the timing of T0, the first special symbol holding number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The processing for starting the variable production when the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the icon shift display is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Also, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 138). (a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this timing, the command at the time of winning transmitted from the main control unit 110m (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the signal at the time of winning, the prefetch designation command) cannot be normally received by the production control unit 130m (command abnormality has occurred) In this case, the process of updating the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1" (see FIG. 138(b)).

After that, at the timing of T3, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this timing, the command at the time of winning transmitted from the main control unit 110m (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the signal at the time of winning, the prefetch designation command) cannot be normally received by the production control unit 130m (command abnormality has occurred) In this case, the process of updating the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1" (see FIG. 138(b)).

Next, at the timing of T4, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. . At this timing, the command at the time of winning transmitted from the main control unit 110m (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the signal at the time of winning, the prefetch designation command) cannot be normally received by the production control unit 130m (command abnormality has occurred) In this case, the process of updating the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1" (see FIG. 138(b)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 138(c)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), to end the fluctuation production will not be processed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended. In addition, the zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is maintained to continue the look-ahead zone effect, and the blue icon is maintained to continue the icon change effect (Fig. 138 ( d) see).

After that, at the timing of T7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Variable display of 1 special design is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. Then, the number of the first special figure reservation stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "1" to "3", and the process of starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased and displayed from "1" to "3" in a specific update mode, and the first Suspended icons HI (white icons) are additionally displayed in a special addition mode (three simultaneously) in the second to fourth positions in the suspended icon display area 70B. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 138(e)).

Then, the required four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (Fig. 138 ( e) see).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started. Regardless of whether or not it is additionally displayed in the additional mode, it will be in a state where the production motion is being performed in the same motion mode (see FIG. 138(f)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change production ends.

In addition, at the timing of T2 to T6, the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m (command at the time of winning, command at the time of stop, command at the time of start) was successfully received by the production control unit 130m, but based on the reception of this command Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m (command abnormality occurs), the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m (the winning command, The same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of stop, the command at the time of start (command abnormality occurs) is performed.

Here, at the timing of T7, the case where the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is from "1" to "3" was described, but the first special figure reservation number is " 0" to "2", if the first special figure reservation number is from "2" to "4", that is, the number of reservations that the main control unit 110m stores (knows) is the production control If there are two more pending numbers than the number stored (kept) by the unit 130m, the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, at the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is from "0" to "3", the first special figure reservation number is from "1" to "4 ", that is, the number of reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is three more than the number of reservations stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m. The flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, when the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number command as a start time signal, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m , The first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased and displayed to "3" in a specific update mode, and the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), when the number of the first special figure pending becomes "0" to "3", the effect control unit 130m stores (grasp) the first to fourth of the first pending icon display area 70B. When the number of the first special figure pending changes from "1" to "4", the pending icon HI (white icon) is a special addition mode (three at the same time). Then, the pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI.

Also, here, the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state (command abnormality has occurred) was described specific example 10, but the game state is a specific game state (reduction game state, variable probability game state), the basic flow is the same as described above even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 135 to 138, when receiving a command at the start (signal at the start) indicating that the number of special figures pending is one more than the number of displayed pending icons , is a special addition mode that differs from the normal addition mode (display mode in which only one additional hold icon HI is displayed in 10 frames of animation so that it gradually increases from a very small size) (so that it is normal size from the beginning) The pending icon is additionally displayed (increased display) in a display mode of additionally displaying one frame worth of non-animation. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 135 to 138, when receiving a command at the start (signal at the start) indicating that the number of special figures pending is more than the number of displayed pending icons, A special addition mode that differs from the normal addition mode (a display mode in which only one additional 10-frame animation is displayed so that the hold icon HI gradually increases from a very small size) In the non-animated additional display mode), the pending icon is additionally displayed (increased display). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 135 to 138, when receiving a command at the start (signal at the start) indicating that the number of special figures pending is larger than the number of displayed pending icons, the reception Additional display (increase display) of the number of pending icons that is one more than the number of special pending numbers received, and then shift display (decrease display) of those pending icons Number according to the number of special pending numbers received It now shows a pending icon. Therefore, it is possible to correct the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations while informing the player that the number of reservations has decreased, and to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

(Summary of specific examples shown in FIGS. 121 to 138)
As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 121 to 138, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (stop signal) during the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a (command abnormality occurs ), the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the fluctuation period of the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern LZ, and the output period of the BGM during fluctuation are extended (continued) from the normal period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period during which no effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 121 to 138, during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the scrolling of the background image, the pending icon, and the rotation of the icon are continued. ing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the boring performance with extremely no movement during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 121 to 138, even during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the pre-reading notice effect (icon change effect, pre-reading zone effect) is continued (executed). It's like Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, the pre-reading notice performance is not terminated, and the game is played by avoiding the inconvenience that the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to improve the interest of

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 121 to 138, during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the look-ahead notice effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed). Even if there is, during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the advance notice mode (icon type, zone effect type) of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not changed. As a result, the advance of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not abnormal, and the game can be more interesting by avoiding inconveniences that cause dissatisfaction of the player.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 121 to 138, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production design 70a, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (start time signal), in advance All the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the predetermined stop position (the production pattern 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display). The variable display is started from . Therefore, compared to the case where the variable display is started with the performance pattern 70a deviated from the stop position, the appearance at the start of the variable performance can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 121 to 138, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the command at the start (signal at the start), special The pattern TZ and the lamp pattern LZ are designed to continue the variable display without being stopped. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load without performing complicated processing such as stopping and displaying the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ. Further, even if the production pattern 70a is displayed at the stop position (immediately derived display), the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern LZ can inform the player that the variable production is being performed, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. can be improved.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 121 to 138, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the command at the start (signal at the start), the The icon is erased in a shorter time (1 frame of non-animation) than the normal time (10 frames of animation when the stop command is received). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the change performance to be newly executed to be hindered by the erasure of the icon, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 121 to 138, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a in which the look-ahead preview effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed), the effect control unit 130m When normally receives the command at the start (signal at the start), it is possible to execute the pre-reading notice effect even in the newly executed variable effect. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, the pre-reading notice performance is not terminated, and the game is played by avoiding the inconvenience that the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to improve the interest of

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 121 to 138, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a in which the look-ahead preview effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed), the effect control unit 130m When normally receives the start time command (start time signal), in the newly executed variable effect, it is possible to execute the effect according to the scenario of the pre-reading notice effect. Therefore, even when a command abnormality in which the performance control part 130m cannot receive the command normally occurs, the advance of the pre-reading notice performance does not become abnormal, and the inconvenience that the player is dissatisfied is avoided. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 11 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 11 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 and 140. FIG. FIG. 139 is a timing chart 9 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 140(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 9 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

First, at the timing of T0, the first special symbol holding number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "2" to "1", and the process of starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the shift display of icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this timing, the command at the time of winning transmitted from the main control unit 110m (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the signal at the time of winning, the prefetch designation command) cannot be normally received by the production control unit 130m (command abnormality has occurred) In this case, the processing for updating the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1" without being performed.

At this time, since the command at the time of winning that the first special figure reservation number is "2" has not been received, the first special that is displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The figure pending number remains "1", and the second pending icon HI corresponding to the first special figure pending number "2" in the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed (Fig. 140 (a) reference).

After that, at the timing of T3, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the winning signal, the look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), the number of the first special figure pending is changed from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased and displayed from "1" to "3" in a specific update mode, and the first A pending icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in a special additional mode in the pending icon display area 70B, and a winning sound based on the current winning (the same sound as when the pending icon is additionally displayed in a normal additional mode) is output. (See FIG. 140(b)).

It should be noted that the "special addition mode" when additionally displaying the pending icon by receiving the winning command (winning signal) is not possible unless the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the command from the main control unit 110m. It is a display mode when it becomes a transition of the number of special figures pending. Specifically, the pending icon HI for which the winning command was not normally received is not displayed, and the pending icon HI for which the winning command is received corresponds to the special figure pending number in the pending icon display area. It is a display mode in which 10 frames of animation are additionally displayed in the area so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size. In addition, the special addition mode includes a special addition mode in which the reserved icon is skipped by one (with a space of one) and additionally displayed, and a reserved icon is skipped by two (with a space of two) and added. There are types such as a special addition mode of displaying, and a special addition mode of additionally displaying by skipping three pending icons (with a space of three).

Next, at the timing of T4, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 140(c)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop time command (special figure stop designation command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("814"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (extinguishing). (See FIG. 140(d)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Loss variation display of 1 special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "3" to "2", and the process of starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "3" to "2" in a specific update mode, and the first The second pending icon HI corresponding to the first special figure pending number "2" that could not normally receive the winning command (winning signal) in the pending icon display area 70B is added with one frame of non-animation. The three displayed pending icons HI are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation of 20 frames, and the top one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 140(e)).

After that, at the timing of T7, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started. Regardless of whether or not it is additionally displayed in the additional mode, it will be in a state where the production motion) is being performed in the same motion mode (see FIG. 140(f)).

Next, at the timing of T8, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("225"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 140(g)).

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process of ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in the same losing mode ("225") as the production pattern, and the first lamp pattern LZ is in the losing mode (lights off). (See FIG. 140(h)).

After that, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "2" to "1", and the process of starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 140(i)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command (winning signal)) is a blue icon. and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, and the icon is in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (FIG. 140(j)). reference).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change production ends.

At the timing of T2, the command (winning command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. can not be normally received by the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 (a command error has occurred), the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (winning command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as in the case (command error occurs) is performed.

Here, at the timing of T3, when the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is "1", the first special figure reservation number is "3". When the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is "0", the first special figure reservation number becomes "2". When the time command (signal at the time of winning) is received, when the first special figure reservation number memorized (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is "2", the first special figure reservation number becomes "4" Winning a prize The basic flow is the same as described above even when an hour command (signal at the time of winning) is received.

Also, here, the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state (command abnormality has occurred) was described specific example 11, but the game state is a specific game state (reduction game state, probability variable game state), the basic flow is the same as described above even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Also, when the winning command based on the winning to the first start port 45 can not be normally received and the number of pending display (holding icon etc.) less than the number of the first special figure pending is performed, the second start When the winning command based on the winning to the mouth 47 can be normally received, the reservation display corresponding to the first special figure reservation number is not updated, and vice versa.

(Specific example 12 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 12 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142. FIG. FIG. 141 is a timing chart 10 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 142(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 10 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

First, at the timing of T0, the first special symbol holding number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "2" to "1", and the process of starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the shift display of icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this timing, the command at the time of winning transmitted from the main control unit 110m (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the signal at the time of winning, the prefetch designation command) cannot be normally received by the production control unit 130m (command abnormality has occurred) In this case, the process of updating the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1".

At this time, since the command (signal at the time of winning) that the first special figure reservation number is "2" has not been received, it is displayed in the sub first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first special figure reserved number remains "1", and the second reserved icon HI corresponding to the first special figure reserved number "2" in the first reserved icon display area 70B is not displayed ( See FIG. 142(a)).

Furthermore, at the timing of T3, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "2" to "3" by winning a game ball in the first starting port 45. At this timing, the command at the time of winning transmitted from the main control unit 110m (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the signal at the time of winning, the prefetch designation command) cannot be normally received by the production control unit 130m (command abnormality has occurred) In this case, the process of updating the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1".

At this time, since the command (signal at the time of winning) that the first special figure reservation number is "3" has not been received, it is displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first special figure pending number remains "1", and the pending icon HI is not displayed in the third corresponding to the first special figure pending number "3" in the first pending icon display area 70B ( See FIG. 142(b)).

After that, at the timing of T4, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the winning signal, the look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), the number of the first special figure pending is changed from "1" to "4".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased from "1" to "4" in a specific update mode, and the first A pending icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in the pending icon display area 70B in a special additional mode (skipping two), and a prize winning sound based on this winning (same sound as when the pending icon is additionally displayed in the normal additional mode) ) is output (see FIG. 142(c)).

Next, at the timing of T5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 142(d)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop time command (special figure stop designation command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in the same losing mode ("814") as the production pattern, and the first lamp pattern LZ is in the losing mode (lights off). (See FIG. 142(e)).

After that, at the timing of T7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Loss variation display of 1 special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "4" to "3", and the process of starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and the first The second and third pending icons HI corresponding to the first special figure pending numbers "2" and "3" that could not normally receive the command (signal at the time of winning) in the pending icon display area 70B are 1 Two additional frames of non-animation are displayed at the same time, and the displayed four pending icons HI are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation of 20 frames, and the top one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 142(f)).

After that, at the timing of T8, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are rotating (normally additionally displayed, or specially added). Regardless of whether or not it is additionally displayed in the mode, it is in a state where the production motion) is being performed in the same motion mode (see FIG. 142(g)).

Next, at the timing of T9, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("225"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 142(h)).

Then, at the timing of T10, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process of ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in the same losing mode ("225") as the production pattern, and the first lamp pattern LZ is in the losing mode (lights off). (See FIG. 142(i)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Loss variation display of 1 special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "3" to "2", and the process of starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "3" to "2" in a specific update mode, and the first The three pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 142(j)).

In addition, at the timing of T2 and T3, the command (winning command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot receive the production command normally (a command abnormality occurs), the production control unit 130m can receive the command (winning command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m normally. The same processing as when reception is not possible (command error occurs) is performed.

Here, at the timing of T4, when the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is "1", the first special figure reservation number is "4". When the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is "0", the first special figure reservation number becomes "3". When the time command (signal at the time of winning) is received, or when the first special figure reservation number memorized (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is "0", the first special figure reservation number becomes "4". The basic flow is the same as that described above even when a winning command (a winning signal) is received.

Also, here, although the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state (command abnormality has occurred) was described specific example 12, the game state is a specific game state state), the basic flow is the same as described above even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Also, when the winning command based on the winning to the first start port 45 can not be normally received and the number of pending display (holding icon etc.) less than the number of the first special figure pending is performed, the second start When the winning command based on the winning to the mouth 47 can be normally received, the reservation display corresponding to the first special figure reservation number is not updated, and vice versa.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when receiving a winning command (winning signal) indicating that the number of special figure pending is more than the number of pending icons displayed is a special addition mode (a display mode in which only one reserved icon is additionally displayed in the area corresponding to the number of special reserved figures) that is different from the normal additional mode (a reserved icon for which the winning command could not be received is not displayed) In addition, the reserved icon is additionally displayed (increased display) in a display mode in which only one reserved icon is additionally displayed with a space in the area corresponding to the number of special figures reserved. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to naturally additionally display the pending icon without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, the winning command (winning When the time signal) is received, the number of pending display in the sub-holding display and special figure holding number display area is increased in a specific update mode (the same mode as when the winning command is not missed). there is Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the performance control unit 130m does not display the pending icon corresponding to the time when the winning command (wining time signal) could not be normally received, the start time When the command (signal at start) is received by the effect control unit 130m, after the pending icons for which the winning command (signal at winning) could not be received are displayed in 1-frame non-animation, all the pending icons are displayed. It is designed to display the shift. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, after the effect control unit 130m fails to receive the winning command (winning signal) normally, the next winning command (winning signal) is normally received. If the command is successfully received, it is possible to execute an icon change effect for the icon corresponding to the normally received winning command (winning signal). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to the failure to normally receive the winning command (wining signal), thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, the icon for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command (signal for winning) is displayed as a pending icon. The icon change effect is not executed (limited), but the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to the failure to normally receive the winning command (wining signal), thereby improving the amusement of the game. It should be noted that the icon change effect may not be executed even while the icon is being displayed.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, by winning the game ball in the starting port, the winning command ( When a winning signal) is received, the increasing production (output of winning sound) is not executed multiple times, and the increasing production based on the winning to the start gate (holding display corresponding to the latest pending memory Winning sound output) is performed once. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the players are puzzled by overlapping effects at the time of increase a plurality of times, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, by winning the game ball in the starting port, the winning command ( When receiving a winning signal), the performance at the time of increase (output of winning sound) is executed in the same performance mode (type of sound, sound volume, length of sound) regardless of the number of increments. As a result, the player does not misunderstand that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, instead of outputting the prize-winning sound, for example, predetermined lighting means (for example, the prize-winning lamp NR) may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner, or the prize-winning sound may be output as well. A predetermined light emitting means may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner. Even in this case, it is preferable to execute the increase effect in the same effect mode (sound type, volume, sound output time, light emission color, light emission amount, light emission time) regardless of the increase in the number of pending icons.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, by winning the game ball in the starting port, the winning command ( When the winning signal) is received, the special figure reservation number will be increased by 1. Production at the time of increase in the same production mode as when receiving the winning command (winning signal) (output of winning sound) is set to run. Therefore, it is possible to execute the effect at the time of increase (output of winning sound) so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, even if the reserved icon additionally displayed in the normal addition mode or the reserved icon additionally displayed in the special addition mode, the same presentation mode is used. (Rotation center position, rotation speed, etc.), the pending icon performs a performance action. Therefore, the player does not misunderstand that the reserved icon additionally displayed in the special addition mode has a high expectation for the big win, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Modification 1 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
123 and 143, a modification of the specific example 2 described in FIGS. 123 and 124 (modification 1 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described. 143(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG.

Note that FIG. 124 and FIG. 143 are the same up to the presentation at the timings T0 to T9, so the explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Symbol loss variation display is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "3" to "1", and the process of starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "3" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the main control Inconsistency due to command abnormality between the first special figure pending number notified from the unit 110m and the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m (original deviation of 1 However, since an abnormality that is a divergence of 2 or more has occurred, the look-ahead zone effect ends.

Specifically, the look-ahead zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output (see FIG. 143(h)).

In addition, the surplus reserved icon HI displayed second in the first reserved icon display area 70B is deleted by one frame of non-animation, and the third reserved icon HI is displayed for one frame. is displayed second in the non-animation of All the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a displaced from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (Fig. 143). (h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 143(h)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 143(i)).

(Modified example 2 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
123 and 144, a modification of the specific example 3 described in FIGS. 123 and 125 (modification 2 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described. 144(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG.

Note that FIG. 125 and FIG. 144 are the same up to the presentation at the timings T0 to T9, so the explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Symbol loss variation display is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "3" to "1", and the process of starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "3" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the main control Inconsistency due to command abnormality between the first special figure pending number notified from the unit 110m and the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m (original deviation of 1 However, since an abnormality that is a divergence of 2 or more occurs, the icon change effect and the look-ahead effect effect end.

Specifically, the surplus reserved icon HI (blue icon) displayed third in the first reserved icon display area 70B is deleted by one frame of non-animation. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 144(h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 144(h)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the production pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 144(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m is in a state where various commands from the main control unit 110m can be normally received, the fluctuation production executed for the variable display of the special symbols in which the first special figure reservation number becomes "0" Also in (target of expectation degree suggestion by pre-reading preview effect), the pre-reading effect effect and the icon change effect are not executed.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 143 to 144, the first special figure pending number and the first special figure pending number that the production control unit 130m was notified from the main control unit 110m If there is an inconsistency due to command abnormality (original deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction, but deviation of 2 or more in the decreasing direction) occurs, a pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading zone effect , icon change effect, look-ahead effect effect) are terminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as the execution of the pre-reading notice effect during the execution of the variable effect which is not the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect originally, and the decrease in the interest of the game. can be suppressed.

(Modified example 3 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
133 and 145, a modification of the specific example 8 described in FIGS. 133 and 134 (modification 3 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described. 145(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of FIG.

Note that FIG. 134 and FIG. 145 are the same up to the presentation at the timings T0 to T4, so the explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Symbol loss variation display is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. Then, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is from "1" to "1", that is, the process of starting the variable production without changing the first special figure reservation number is performed. will be

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is maintained and displayed from "1" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the first A suspended icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in a special addition mode (one frame of non-animation) at the second position in the suspended icon display area 70B. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 145(e)).

In addition, inconsistency caused by command abnormality between the first special figure pending number notified from the main control unit 110m and the first special figure pending number stored by the effect control unit 130m (original decrease direction Since there is a deviation of 1 from , the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are terminated. Specifically, the pre-reading zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output. Also, the first blue icon in the first suspended icon display area 70B returns to the white icon with one frame of non-animation (see FIG. 145(e)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (Fig. 145 ( e) see).

After that, at the timing of T6, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started. Regardless of whether or not it is additionally displayed in the additional mode, it will be in a state where the production motion) is being performed in the same motion mode (see FIG. 145(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a reach-losing mode ("878"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 145(g)).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop time command (special figure stop designation command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (extinguishing). (See FIG. 145(h)).

After that, at the timing of T9, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Loss variation display of 1 special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "1" to "0" and the process of starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the first One pending icon HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B is shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation of 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 145(i)).

Next, at the timing of T10, the shift display of icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so the icon is in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (Fig. 145 (j )reference).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIG. 145, between the first special figure reservation number and the first special figure reservation number and the production control unit 130m that are notified from the main control unit 110m command If an inconsistency caused by an abnormality occurs (abnormality where the deviation is 1 but the number is the same), the pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading zone effect, icon change effect, pre-reading effect effect) is terminated. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as the execution of the pre-reading notice effect during the execution of the variable effect which is not the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect originally, and the decrease in the interest of the game. can be suppressed.

(Modification 4 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
135 and 146, a modification of the specific example 9 described in FIGS. 135 and 136 (modification 4 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described. 146(a) to (f) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG.

Note that FIG. 136 and FIG. 146 are the same up to the presentation at the timings T0 to T5, so the explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Symbol loss variation display is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. Then, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is from "1" to "2", that is, the first special figure reservation number is increased by 1 and the process of starting the variable production is performed. will be

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased and displayed from "1" to "2" in a specific update mode, and the first Suspended icons HI (white icons) are additionally displayed in the second and third positions in the suspended icon display area 70B in a special addition manner (two at the same time). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 146(e)).

In addition, inconsistency caused by command abnormality between the first special figure pending number notified from the main control unit 110m and the first special figure pending number stored by the effect control unit 130m (original decrease direction The icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are terminated because there is a deviation of 1 in the direction of increase (abnormal deviation of 1 in the increasing direction). Specifically, the pre-reading zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output. Also, the first blue icon in the first suspended icon display area 70B returns to the white icon with one frame of non-animation (see FIG. 146(e)).

Then, the necessary three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (Fig. 146 ( e) see).

After that, at the timing of T6, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are rotating (normally additionally displayed, or specially added). 146(f)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIG. 146, command between the first special figure reservation number and the first special figure reservation number and the production control unit 130m that is notified from the main control unit 110m In the event of an inconsistency caused by an abnormality (normally, the divergence of 1 in the decreasing direction, but the deviation of 1 in the increasing direction) occurs, a pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading zone effect, icon change effect , look-ahead effect production) is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as the execution of the pre-reading notice effect during the execution of the variable effect which is not the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect originally, and the decrease in the interest of the game. can be suppressed.

(Modified example 5 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
137 and 147, a modified example (modified example 5 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) of the concrete example 10 described in FIGS. 137 and 138 will be described. 147(a) to (f) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG.

138 and 147 are the same up to the presentation at the timings T0 to T6, so the description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T7, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Symbol loss variation display is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. Then, the number of the first special figure reservation stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "1" to "3", and the process of starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased and displayed from "1" to "3" in a specific update mode, and the first Suspended icons HI (white icons) are additionally displayed in a special addition mode (three simultaneously) in the second to fourth positions in the suspended icon display area 70B. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 147(e)).

In addition, inconsistency caused by command abnormality between the first special figure pending number notified from the main control unit 110m and the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m (original For example, the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are terminated because there is a deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction and an abnormality of 1 or more in the increasing direction. Specifically, the pre-reading zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output. Also, the first blue icon in the first suspended icon display area 70B returns to the white icon with one frame of non-animation (see FIG. 147(e)).

Then, the required four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (Fig. 147 ( e) see).

After that, at the timing of T8, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are rotating (normally additionally displayed, or specially added). 147(f)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIG. 147, between the first special figure reservation number and the first special figure reservation number and the production control unit 130m that is notified from the main control unit 110m command If an inconsistency caused by an abnormality (original deviation of 1 in the direction of decrease, but deviation of 2 or more in the direction of increase) occurs, a pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading zone effect, icon change production, look-ahead effect production) is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as the execution of the pre-reading notice effect during the execution of the variable effect which is not the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect originally, and the decrease in the interest of the game. can be suppressed.

(Modified example 6 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
139 and 148, a modification of the specific example 11 described in FIGS. 139 and 140 (modification 6 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described. 148(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 9 of FIG.

Note that FIG. 140 and FIG. 148 have the same effect at the timings T6 to T11, so the explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

First, at the timing of T0, the first special symbol holding number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "2" to "1", and the process of starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the shift display of icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this timing, the command at the time of winning transmitted from the main control unit 110m (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the signal at the time of winning, the prefetch designation command) cannot be normally received by the production control unit 130m (command abnormality has occurred) In this case, the process of updating the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1" (see FIG. 148(a)).

After that, at the timing of T3, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the winning signal, the look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), the number of the first special figure pending is changed from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased and displayed from "1" to "3" in a specific update mode, and the first A pending icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in a special additional mode (two simultaneous) in the pending icon display area 70B, and a prize winning sound based on this winning (same sound as when the pending icon is additionally displayed in a normal additional mode) ) is output (see FIG. 148(b)).

Specifically, one hold icon HI for which the winning command (winning signal) could not be received normally and one hold icon HI for which the winning command (winning signal) was normally received are displayed in one frame. It is additionally displayed (increased display) in non-animation (see FIG. 148(b)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are rotated (in the same operation mode regardless of whether they are additionally displayed in the normal addition mode or in the special addition mode). (see FIG. 148(c)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop time command (special figure stop designation command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is stopped in the same loss mode ("814") as the production pattern 70a, and the first lamp pattern LZ is in the loss mode (lights off). ) (see FIG. 148(d)).

In addition, when the winning command based on the winning to the first start port 45 cannot be normally received and the number of pending display (holding icon etc.) less than the number of the first special figure pending is performed, the second start When the winning command based on the winning to the mouth 47 can be normally received, the reservation display corresponding to the first special figure reservation number is not updated, and vice versa.

(Modified example 7 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
141 and 149, a modification of the concrete example 12 described in FIGS. 141 and 142 (modification 7 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described. 149(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 9 of FIG.

Note that FIG. 142 and FIG. 149 have the same presentation at the timings of T8 to T11, so here the description of the common parts will be omitted and only the different parts will be explained.

First, at the timing of T0, the first special symbol holding number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "2" to "1", and the process of starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the shift display of icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this timing, the command at the time of winning transmitted from the main control unit 110m (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the signal at the time of winning, the prefetch designation command) cannot be normally received by the production control unit 130m (command abnormality has occurred) In this case, the process of updating the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1".

At this time, since the command (signal at the time of winning) that the first special figure reservation number is "2" has not been received, it is displayed in the sub first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first special figure reserved number remains "1", and the second reserved icon HI corresponding to the first special figure reserved number "2" in the first reserved icon display area 70B is not displayed ( See FIG. 149(a)).

Furthermore, at the timing of T3, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "2" to "3" by winning a game ball in the first starting port 45. At this timing, the command at the time of winning transmitted from the main control unit 110m (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the signal at the time of winning, the prefetch designation command) cannot be normally received by the production control unit 130m (command abnormality has occurred) In this case, the process of updating the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1".

At this time, since the command (signal at the time of winning) that the first special figure reservation number is "3" has not been received, it is displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first special figure pending number remains "1", and the pending icon HI is not displayed in the third corresponding to the first special figure pending number "3" in the first pending icon display area 70B ( See FIG. 149(b)).

After that, at the timing of T4, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the winning signal, the look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), the number of the first special figure pending is changed from "1" to "4".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased from "1" to "4" in a specific update mode, and the first A pending icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in a special additional mode (three simultaneously) in the pending icon display area 70B, and a prize winning sound based on this winning (same sound as when the pending icon is additionally displayed in a normal additional mode) ) is output (see FIG. 149(c)).

Specifically, two pending icon HIs for which the winning command (winning signal) could not be received normally and a pending icon HI for which the winning command (winning signal) was normally received are displayed in one frame. It is additionally displayed (increased display) in non-animation (see FIG. 149(c)).

Next, at the timing of T5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are rotated (in the same operation mode regardless of whether they are additionally displayed in the normal addition mode or in the special addition mode). (see FIG. 149(d)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop time command (special figure stop designation command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is stopped in the same loss mode ("814") as the production pattern 70a, and the first lamp pattern LZ is in the loss mode (lights off). ) to make a final stop (see FIG. 149(e)).

After that, at the timing of T7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Loss variation display of 1 special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "4" to "3", and the process of starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 149(f)).

Here, at the timing of T4, when the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is "1", the first special figure reservation number is "4". When the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is "0", the first special figure reservation number becomes "3". When the time command (signal at the time of winning) is received, or when the first special figure reservation number memorized (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is "0", the first special figure reservation number becomes "4". The basic flow is the same as that described above even when a winning command (a winning signal) is received.

Also, here, although the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state (command abnormality has occurred) was described specific example 12, the game state is a specific game state state), the basic flow is the same as described above even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Also, when the winning command based on the winning to the first start port 45 can not be normally received and the number of pending display (holding icon etc.) less than the number of the first special figure pending is performed, the second start When the winning command based on the winning to the mouth 47 can be normally received, the reservation display corresponding to the first special figure reservation number is not updated, and vice versa.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 148 to 149, when receiving a winning command (winning signal) indicating that the special figure pending number is two more than the number of pending icons displayed , the first special addition mode (1 frame non- In a display mode in which two pending icons are additionally displayed simultaneously by animation), the pending icons are additionally displayed (increased display). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to naturally additionally display the hold icon that should have been displayed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 148 to 149, when receiving a winning command (winning signal) indicating that the number of special figure pending is 3 more than the number of pending icons displayed , A second special addition mode that is different from the normal addition mode (display mode in which only one reserved icon is additionally displayed in the area corresponding to the number of special figures pending) (1 frame non-animation so that it is normal size from the beginning In a display mode in which three pending icons are additionally displayed at the same time), pending icons are additionally displayed (increased display). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to naturally additionally display the hold icon that should have been displayed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 148 to 149, the winning command (winning When the time signal) is received, the number of pending display in the sub-holding display and special figure holding number display area is increased in a specific update mode (the same mode as when the winning command is not missed). there is Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 148 to 149, the icon for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command (signal for winning) is displayed as a pending icon. The icon change effect is not executed (limited), but the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to the failure to normally receive the winning command (wining signal), thereby improving the amusement of the game. It should be noted that the icon change effect may not be executed even while the icon is being displayed.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 148 to 149, when the game ball wins in the starting port, the winning command ( When a winning signal) is received, the increasing production (output of winning sound) is not executed multiple times, and the increasing production based on the winning to the start gate (holding display corresponding to the latest pending memory Winning sound output) is performed once. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is puzzled by overlapping effects (output of winning sound) at the time of increase a plurality of times, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of outputting the winning sound, for example, predetermined light emitting means (for example, winning entrance lamp NR) may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner as the effect at the time of increase, and the winning sound may be output. A predetermined light emitting means may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner. Even in this case, regardless of the increase in the number of pending icons, the same production mode (sound type, volume, sound output time, light emission color, light emission amount, light emission time) is executed. good too.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 148 to 149, when the game ball wins in the starting port, the winning command ( When a win-time signal) is received, regardless of the number of increments, the increase-time effect (output of winning sound) is executed in the same effect mode. As a result, the player does not misunderstand that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 148 to 149, when the game ball wins in the starting port, the winning command ( When the winning signal) is received, the special figure reservation number will be increased by 1. Production at the time of increase in the same production mode as when receiving the winning command (winning signal) (output of winning sound) is set to run. Therefore, it is possible to execute the effect at the time of increase (output of winning sound) so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, even if the reserved icon additionally displayed in the normal addition mode or the reserved icon additionally displayed in the special addition mode, the same presentation mode is used. (Rotation center position, rotation speed, etc.), the pending icon performs a performance action. Therefore, the player does not misunderstand that the reserved icon additionally displayed in the special addition mode has a high expectation for the big win, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the reserved icon is additionally displayed in the special addition mode, a plurality of reserved icons are additionally displayed at the same time with 1 frame of non-animation, but 10 frames of animation (same time as the normal addition mode). may add multiple pending icons at the same time. Alternatively, only the latest pending icon may be displayed with 10-frame animation, and the pending icon that should have been originally displayed may be displayed with 1-frame non-animation.

(Concrete example 13 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
With reference to FIG. 150, a specific example 13 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described. The upper diagram in FIG. 150 is a timing chart 11 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state, and FIGS. These are examples of effects corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at the timing of T0, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, A process for starting the first variation production when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "1" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E while the fluctuating BGM is being output changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. , and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shift-displayed (reduced display) as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation). Also, the icon TI is in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion).

Next, at the timing of T1, the auxiliary game is executed by the player hitting to the right, or the auxiliary game executed during the specific game state (time-saving game state) before entering the normal game state Second start port 47 (movable member 48) When the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 for reasons such as elimination of the ball biting generated in the part, the second special figure reservation stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m The number increases from '0' to '1'. When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the winning signal, the look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), the number of second special figure reservations being made changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-second reservation display device 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning sound based on the current winning is due to the winning of the second starting port 47 during the normal game state. is not output (see FIG. 150(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the first variable effect, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the rotating motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 150(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the first fluctuation production No termination process is performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. 150(c), and accordingly the output of the BGM during fluctuation is maintained.

After that, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the second special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2 Loss variation display of special symbols is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (command abnormality occurs), the second special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process of starting the second fluctuation production is not performed (Fig. 150(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop time command (special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol A process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the performance symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped state of losing is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Further, the first lamp pattern LZ that has been variably displayed on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped (turned off) in a failing mode (see FIG. 150(e)). In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed with the first special symbols as the object of the change display of the loss, the continuous notice effect is finished at this timing.

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special figure reservation number and the second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer It shifts to a waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "1" to "0 ”.

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-second reservation display device 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is reduced from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, waiting for customers It waits until the demonstration effect is executed or the variable display of the special symbols is newly started (see FIG. 150(f)).

At the timing of T3 and the timing of T4, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the supplied production command (command abnormality occurs), the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is produced. The same processing as when the control unit 130m cannot receive normally (a command error occurs) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting is transmitted from the main control unit 110m. When the state designation command can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, the processing for ending the first fluctuation production started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol at this timing is performed, and the production control unit The second special figure pending number that 130m stores (grasp) changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is actually stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is actually stopped at "814" which is the same as the production pattern 70a. The second special figure pending number displayed in the display area 70F is reduced from "1" to "0" in the specific update mode. In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed with the first special symbols as the object of the change display of the loss, the continuous notice effect is finished at this timing.

(Specific example 14 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 14 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIG. The upper diagram in FIG. 151 is a timing chart 12 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state, and FIGS. These are examples of effects corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at the timing of T0, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, A process for starting the first variation production when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "1" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E while the fluctuating BGM is being output changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. , and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shift-displayed (reduced display) as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started. It is in the state of performing (directing action).

Next, at the timing of T1, the auxiliary game is executed by the player hitting to the right, or the auxiliary game executed during the specific game state (time-saving game state) before entering the normal game state Second start port 47 (movable member 48) When the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 for reasons such as elimination of the ball biting generated in the part, the second special figure reservation stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m The number increases from '0' to '1'. When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the second special figure reservation number designation command as the winning signal, the look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), the number of second special figure reservations being made changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-second reservation display device 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning sound based on the current winning is the winning to the second start port 47 during the normal game state. is not output (see FIG. 151(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the first variable effect, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the rotating motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 151(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the first fluctuation production No termination process is performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. 151(c), and accordingly the output of the BGM during fluctuation is maintained.

After that, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the second special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2 Jackpot variation display of special symbols is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (second special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (command abnormality occurs), the second special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process of starting the second fluctuation production is not performed (Fig. 151(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop time command (special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol A process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the performance symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped state of losing is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that has been variably displayed on the sub first variation display 81 is stopped (turned off) in a losing mode, but the second lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the sub second variation display 82. It will be in a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 151(e)). In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed with the first special symbols as the object of the change display of the loss, the continuous notice effect is finished at this timing.

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the opening period of the jackpot game is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m performs processing for starting the opening effect.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and characters of "big win" is displayed. In addition, the second special figure reservation number "1" displayed in the sub second reservation display device 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is newly won based on the winning to the second start port 47 The command (signal at the time of winning) is normally received, or the command at the start based on the start of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (the second special symbol reservation number designation command as the signal at the start, the special symbol designation command, the special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives (see FIG. 151(f)).

In other words, a command at the time of winning based on the new winning to the first start port 45 (signal at the time of winning) and a command at the start based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (the number of the first special figure pending as the signal at the start Designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) even when the production control unit 130m receives, it is displayed in the sub-second reservation display device 84 and the second special design reservation number display area 70F The second special figure reservation number "1" is maintained.

At the timing of T3 and the timing of T4, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the supplied production command (command abnormality occurs), the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is produced. The same processing as when the control unit 130m cannot receive normally (command abnormality occurs) is performed.

Also, at the timing of T5, the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation transmitted from the main control unit 110m. When the command can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, a process of ending the first variable production started corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol at this timing and starting the opening production is performed. .

Then, the effect symbol 70a in the losing mode temporarily stopped and the special symbol TZ that was displayed in a variable manner are not stopped and displayed, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is displayed as non-display for one frame. The opening image is displayed without being erased as an animation (substantially, effects other than the opening effect are terminated).

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 150 to 151, in the normal game state, during the execution of the first variation performance started corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol When a stop time command (stop time signal) of the second special symbol variable display started after the end of the variable display is received, the first variable performance is ended. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the first variable performance ends at the timing of receiving the stop command, it is possible to end the first variable performance without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 150 to 151, in the normal game state, during the execution of the first variation performance started corresponding to the loss variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol When the stop command (stop signal) of the second special symbol jackpot variation display started after the end of the variation display is received, the first variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a, special symbol TZ ) is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to perform processing such as switching the performance pattern from the losing mode to the big hit mode, and to end the first variation performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 150 to 151, in the normal game state, during the variable display of the first lamp symbol LZ started corresponding to the loss variable display of the first special symbol, the first special When a stop command (stop signal) of the second special symbol jackpot variation display started after the end of the symbol variation display is received, the sub-first variation display 81 stops displaying the losing mode (extinguishing). Then, the second sub-variation display 82 does not stop displaying the lamp pattern LZ of the jackpot mode (lighting). Therefore, it is possible to dispense with processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a losing mode (extinguishing) to a big winning mode, and to terminate the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 150 to 151, in the normal game state, during the display of the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) of the variable display of the second special symbols started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. Further, since the icon is erased at the timing of receiving the stop command, the icon can be erased without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 150 to 151, in the normal game state, the variation of the first special symbol during the display of the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol When the display stop command (stop signal) is received, and during the display of the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the command when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped The icon is erased in the same manner as when the (stop signal) is received. Therefore, it is possible to naturally erase the icon without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 150 to 151, in the normal game state, the second special figure pending number displayed in the sub second pending display device 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F When receiving a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the special figure pending number is "0" when it is not "0", it is displayed on the sub second pending display device 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F The second special figure pending number is displayed to be reduced to "0". Therefore, the player will not have doubts that the variable performance is not executed even though the second special figure pending number is not "0".

In addition, in the normal game state, during the execution of the first variation performance started corresponding to the big hit variation display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol that is started after the end of the variation display of the first special symbol is lost. When a variable display stop time command (stop time signal) is received, the first variable performance (variation display of the performance symbol 70a, variation display of the special symbol TZ) may be terminated in a jackpot manner.

(Specific example 15 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 15 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIG. 152 . The upper diagram in FIG. 152 is a timing chart 13 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state, and FIGS. These are examples of effects corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at the timing of T0, it becomes a normal game state from the specific game state (time saving game state), and the second special figure reservation number stored in the main control unit 110m during the specific game state is from "1" to "0". , the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (second special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "1" to "0", and the process of starting the second fluctuation production is performed.

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F while the fluctuating BGM is being output changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Further, since the second suspended icon display area 70D is not displayed, the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C without shift display (reduction display) of the suspended icon from the second suspended icon display area 70D. It is displayed as a 10-frame animation. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. It is in the state of performing (directing action).

Next, at the timing of T1, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "0" to "1" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the winning signal, the look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), the number of the first special figure pending is changed from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the first A suspended icon HI is additionally displayed (increasedly displayed) in a normal addition manner in the first display portion 70B1 of the suspended icon display area 70B, and the prize is won based on the prize this time because the prize is won to the first start port 45 during the normal game state. A sound is output (see FIG. 152(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the rotating motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 152(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the second fluctuation production The processing to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ are extended. 152(c), and accordingly the output of the BGM during fluctuation is maintained.

After that, at the timing of T4, when the special symbol stop time passes, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Loss variation display of 1 special symbol is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (command abnormality occurs), the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process of starting the first fluctuation production is not performed (Fig. 152(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop time command (special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol A process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the performance symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped state of losing is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Further, the second lamp pattern LZ that has been variably displayed on the second sub-variable display 82 is stopped (turned off) in a failing manner (see FIG. 152(e)). In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed with the second special symbol as the object of the change display of the loss, the continuous notice effect is finished at this timing.

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special figure reservation number and the second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer It shifts to a waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0 ”.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and is waiting for customers. It waits until the demonstration effect is executed or the variable display of the special symbols is newly started (see FIG. 152(f)).

At the timing of T3 and the timing of T4, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the supplied production command (command abnormality occurs), the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is produced. The same processing as when the control unit 130m cannot receive normally (a command error occurs) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting is transmitted from the main control unit 110m. When the state designation command can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, the process of ending the second fluctuation production started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol at this timing is performed, and the production control unit The first special figure pending number that 130m stores (grasp) changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is actually stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is actually stopped at the same "814" as the production pattern 70a. The first special figure pending number displayed in the display area 70E is reduced from "1" to "0" in the specific update mode. In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed with the first special symbols as the object of the change display of the loss, the continuous notice effect is finished at this timing.

(Concrete example 16 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 16 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIG. The upper diagram in FIG. 153 is a timing chart 14 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state, and FIGS. These are examples of effects corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at the timing of T0, it becomes a normal game state from the specific game state (time saving game state), and the second special figure reservation number stored in the main control unit 110m during the specific game state is from "1" to "0". , the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (second special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "1" to "0", and the process of starting the second fluctuation production is performed.

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F while the fluctuating BGM is being output changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Further, since the second suspended icon display area 70D is not displayed, the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C without shift display (reduction display) of the suspended icon from the second suspended icon display area 70D. It is displayed as a 10-frame animation. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. It is in the state of performing (directing action).

Next, at the timing of T1, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "0" to "1" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the winning signal, the look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), the number of the first special figure pending is changed from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the first A hold icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in a normal addition manner in the first display portion 70B1 of the hold icon display area 70B, and the prize is won based on the prize this time because the prize is won in the first start port 47 during the normal game state. A sound is output (see FIG. 153(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the second variable effect, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the rotating motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 153(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the second fluctuation production No termination process is performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ are extended. 153(c), and accordingly the output of the BGM during fluctuation is maintained.

After that, at the timing of T4, when the special symbol stop time passes, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The big hit variation display of 1 special symbol is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (command abnormality occurs), the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process of starting the first fluctuation production is not performed (Fig. 153(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in the jackpot manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop time command (special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol A process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the performance symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped state of losing is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that has been variably displayed on the second sub-variation display 82 is stopped (turned off) in a losing mode, but the first lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the first sub-variation display 81. It will be in a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 153(e)). In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed with the second special symbol as the object of the change display of the loss, the continuous notice effect is finished at this timing.

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the opening period of the jackpot game is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m performs processing for starting the opening effect.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and characters of "big win" is displayed. In addition, the first special figure reservation number "1" displayed in the sub first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is newly won based on the winning to the first start port 45 The command (signal at the time of winning) is normally received, or the command at the start based on the start of the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol (1st special figure pending number designation command as the signal at the start, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives (see FIG. 153(f)).

In other words, a command at the time of winning based on the new winning to the second start port 47 (signal at the time of winning) and a command at the start based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (second special figure pending number as the signal at the start Designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) even when the production control unit 130m receives, it is displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special design reservation number display area 70E The first special figure reservation number "1" is maintained.

At the timing of T3 and the timing of T4, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the supplied production command (command abnormality occurs), the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is produced. The same processing as when the control unit 130m cannot receive normally (command abnormality occurs) is performed.

Also, at the timing of T5, the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation transmitted from the main control unit 110m. When the command is normally received by the production control unit 130m, a process of ending the second variable production started corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol at this timing and starting the opening production is performed. .

Then, the effect symbol 70a in the losing mode temporarily stopped and the special symbol TZ that was displayed in a variable manner are not stopped and displayed, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is displayed as non-display for one frame. The opening image is displayed without being erased as an animation (substantially, effects other than the opening effect are terminated).

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 152 to 153, in the normal game state, during the execution of the second variation effect started corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) of the variable display of the first special symbol started after the end of the variable display is received, the second variable performance is ended. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the second variable effect is terminated by receiving the stop command, the second variable effect can be terminated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 152 to 153, in the normal game state, during the execution of the second variation performance started corresponding to the loss variation display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol When the stop command (stop signal) of the first special symbol jackpot variation display started after the end of the variation display is received, the second variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a, special symbol TZ ) is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to perform processing such as switching the performance pattern from the losing mode to the big hit mode, and to end the second variation performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 152 to 153, in the normal game state, during the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ started corresponding to the loss variable display of the second special symbol, the second special When receiving a stop time command (stop time signal) of the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol started after the end of the variation display of the symbols, the sub-second variation display 82 stops displaying the losing mode (extinguishing). However, the first sub-variation display 81 is designed not to stop and display the lamp pattern LZ of the jackpot mode (lighting). Therefore, it is possible to dispense with processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a losing mode (turning off) to a big hit mode, and to terminate the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 152 to 153, in the normal game state, during the display of the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) of the variable display of the first special symbol started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. Further, since the icon is erased at the timing of receiving the stop command, the icon can be erased without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 152 to 153, in the normal game state, during the display of the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol When the display stop command (stop signal) is received, and when the icon (second running information) corresponding to the second special symbol variable display is displayed, the first special symbol variable display stop command The icon is erased in the same manner as when the (stop signal) is received. Therefore, it is possible to naturally erase the icon without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 152 to 153, in the normal game state, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E When receiving a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the special figure reservation number is "0" when it is not "0", it is displayed on the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The number of the first special figure pending is displayed to be reduced to "0". Therefore, the player does not have doubts that the variable performance is not executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

In addition, in the normal game state, during the execution of the second variation performance started corresponding to the big hit variation display of the second special symbol, the loss of the first special symbol started after the end of the variation display of the second special symbol When a variable display stop time command (stop time signal) is received, the second variable performance (variation display of the performance symbol 70a, variation display of the special symbol TZ) may be terminated in a jackpot manner.

(Concrete example 17 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 17 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIG. The upper diagram in FIG. 154 is a timing chart 15 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m in the specific game state, and FIGS. These are examples of effects corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at the timing of T0, the game ball enters the first starting port 45 by hitting left, or during the normal game state before becoming a specific game state (time-saving game state, probability variable game state) As the number of first special figure reservations stored in the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0" due to reasons such as winning a game ball in the 1 start port 45, the first special symbol Loss variation display is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, A process for starting the first variation production when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "1" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E while the fluctuating BGM is being output changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Further, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C without shift display (reduction display) of the pending icon from the first pending icon display area 70B. It is displayed as a 10-frame animation. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started. It is in the state of performing (directing action).

Next, at the timing of T1, the second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1" by winning the game ball in the second starting port 47. . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the second special figure reservation number designation command as the winning signal, the look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), the number of second special figure reservations being made changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-second reservation indicator 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the second A hold icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display portion 70D1 of the hold icon display area 70D, and a winning sound based on the current winning is output as a winning to the second start port 47 during the specific game state. (See FIG. 154(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the rotating motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 154(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the first fluctuation production No termination process is performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. 154(c), and accordingly the output of the BGM during fluctuation is maintained.

After that, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the second special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2 Loss variation display of special symbols is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (second special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (command abnormality occurs), the second special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process of starting the second fluctuation production is not performed (Fig. 154(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop time command (special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol A process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the performance symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped state of losing is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Further, the first lamp pattern LZ, which has been variably displayed on the sub-first variable display 81, is stop-displayed (turned off) in a failing manner (see FIG. 154(e)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special figure reservation number and the second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer It shifts to a waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "1" to "0 ”.

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-second reservation display device 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is reduced from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, waiting for customers It waits until the demonstration effect is executed or the variable display of the special symbols is newly started (see FIG. 154(f)).

At the timing of T3 and the timing of T4, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the supplied production command (command abnormality occurs), the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is produced. The same processing as when the control unit 130m cannot receive normally (a command error occurs) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting is transmitted from the main control unit 110m. When the state designation command can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, the process of ending the fluctuation production started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol at this timing is performed, and the production control unit 130m The number of the second special figure pending stored (grasped) changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is actually stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is actually stopped at "814" which is the same as the production pattern 70a. The second special figure pending number displayed in the display area 70F is reduced from "1" to "0" in the specific update mode.

(Concrete example 18 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 18 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIG. The upper diagram in FIG. 155 is a timing chart 16 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m in the specific game state, and FIGS. These are examples of effects corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at the timing of T0, the game ball enters the first starting port 45 by hitting left, or during the normal game state before becoming a specific game state (time-saving game state, probability variable game state) As the number of first special figure reservations stored in the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0" due to reasons such as winning a game ball in the 1 start port 45, the first special symbol Loss variation display is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The processing for starting the first variation production when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m becomes "0" from "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E while the fluctuating BGM is being output changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Further, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C without shift display (reduction display) of the pending icon from the first pending icon display area 70B. It is displayed as a 10-frame animation. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started. It is in the state of performing (directing action).

Next, at the timing of T1, the second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1" by winning the game ball in the second starting port 47. . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the second special figure reservation number designation command as the winning signal, the look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), the number of second special figure reservations being made changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-second reservation indicator 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the second A suspended icon HI is additionally displayed (increasedly displayed) in a normal addition manner in the first display portion 70D1 of the suspended icon display area 70D, and the winning is based on the winning of this time because it is the winning of the second starting port 47 during the specific game state. A sound is output (see FIG. 155(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, the production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, the rotating motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 155(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the first fluctuation production No termination process is performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. 155(c), and accordingly the output of the BGM during fluctuation is maintained (see FIG. 155(c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the second special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2 Jackpot variation display of special symbols is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (second special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (command abnormality occurs), the second special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process of starting the second fluctuation production is not performed (Fig. 155(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop time command (special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol A process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the performance symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped state of losing is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that has been variably displayed on the sub first variation display 81 is stopped (turned off) in a losing mode, but the second lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the sub second variation display 82. It will be in a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 155(e)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the opening period of the jackpot game is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m performs processing for starting the opening effect.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and characters of "big win" is displayed. In addition, the second special figure reservation number "1" displayed in the sub second reservation display device 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is newly won based on the winning to the second start port 47 The command (signal at the time of winning) is normally received, or the command at the start based on the start of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (the second special symbol reservation number designation command as the signal at the start, the special symbol designation command, the special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives (see FIG. 155(f)).

In other words, a command at the time of winning based on the new winning to the first start port 45 (signal at the time of winning) and a command at the start based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (the number of the first special figure pending as the signal at the start Designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) even when the production control unit 130m receives, it is displayed in the sub-second reservation display device 84 and the second special design reservation number display area 70F The second special figure reservation number "1" is maintained.

At the timing of T3 and the timing of T4, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the supplied production command (command abnormality occurs), the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is produced. The same processing as when the control unit 130m cannot receive normally (a command error occurs) is performed.

Also, at the timing of T5, the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation transmitted from the main control unit 110m. When the command can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, at this timing, processing for ending the variable production started corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and starting the opening production is performed.

Then, the effect symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped losing mode and the special symbol TZ that was displayed in a variable manner are not stopped and displayed, and the icon TI (normal icon, special icon) displayed in the icon display area 70C is displayed. ) as non-animation for one frame, the opening image is displayed (substantially, effects other than the opening effect are finished).

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 154 to 155, in the specific game state, during the execution of the first variation performance started corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol When a stop time command (stop time signal) of the second special symbol variable display started after the end of the variable display is received, the first variable performance is ended. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the first variable effect is terminated by receiving the stop command, the first variable effect can be terminated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 154 to 155, in the specific game state, during execution of the first variation performance started corresponding to the loss variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol When the stop command (stop signal) of the second special symbol jackpot variation display started after the end of the variation display is received, the first variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a, special symbol TZ ) is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to perform processing such as switching the performance pattern from the losing mode to the big hit mode, and to end the first variation performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 154 to 155, in the specific game state, during the variable display of the first lamp symbol LZ started corresponding to the loss variable display of the first special symbol, the first special When receiving a stop time command (stop time signal) of the second special symbol jackpot variation display started after the end of the symbol variation display, the sub first variation display 81 and the sub second variation display 82 In any case, the lamp pattern LZ of the jackpot mode (lighting) is not stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to dispense with processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a losing mode (extinguishing) to a big winning mode, and to terminate the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 154 to 155, in the specific game state, during the display of the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) of the variable display of the second special symbols started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. Further, since the icon is erased at the timing of receiving the stop command, the icon can be erased without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 154 to 155, in the specific game state, the variation of the first special symbol during the display of the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol When the display stop command (stop signal) is received, and during the display of the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the command when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped The icon is erased in the same manner as when the (stop signal) is received. Therefore, it is possible to naturally erase the icon without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 154 to 155, in the specific gaming state, the second special figure pending number displayed in the sub second pending indicator 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F When receiving a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the special figure pending number is "0" when it is not "0", it is displayed on the sub second pending display device 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F The second special figure pending number is displayed to be reduced to "0". Therefore, the player will not have doubts that the variable performance is not executed even though the second special figure pending number is not "0".

In addition, in the specific game state, during the execution of the first variation performance started corresponding to the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol that is started after the end of the variation display of the first special symbol is lost. When a variable display stop time command (stop time signal) is received, the first variable performance (variation display of the performance symbol 70a, variation display of the special symbol TZ) may be terminated in a jackpot mode.

(Specific example 19 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 19 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIG. The upper diagram in FIG. 156 is a timing chart 17 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m in the specific game state, and FIGS. These are examples of effects corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at the timing of T0, the second special symbol holding number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". be done. At the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (second special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal) When the production control unit 130m receives, The second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "1" to "0", and the process of starting the second fluctuation production is performed.

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F while the fluctuating BGM is being output changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Also, one pending icon HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D is shift-displayed (reduced display) as an animation of 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the second lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation). Also, the icon TI is in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion).

Next, at the timing of T1, the game ball enters the first starting port 45 due to reasons such as the player hitting to the left, so that the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is It increases from '0' to '1'. When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command as a winning signal, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), the number of the first special figure pending is changed from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increase displayed), and the winning sound based on the current winning is the winning to the first start port 45 during the specific game state. is not output (see FIG. 156(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, the production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Also, the rotation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 156(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the first fluctuation production No termination process is performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. 156(c), and the BGM output is maintained during fluctuation.

After that, at the timing of T4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Loss variation display of 1 special symbol is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (command abnormality occurs), the first special figure pending number that the production control unit 130m stores (knows) remains "1", and the process of starting the first fluctuation production is not performed (Fig. 156(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop time command (special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol A process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the performance symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped state of losing is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that has been variably displayed on the second sub-variable display 82 is stopped (turned off) in a failing manner (see FIG. 156(e)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol reservation number and the second special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer It shifts to a waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0 ”.

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-second reservation display device 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is reduced from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, waiting for customers It waits until the demonstration effect is executed or the variable display of special symbols is newly started (see FIG. 156(f)).

At the timing of T3 and the timing of T4, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command (command abnormality occurs), the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. The same processing as when the control unit 130m cannot receive normally (a command error occurs) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting is transmitted from the main control unit 110m. When the state designation command can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, the process of ending the fluctuation production started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol at this timing is performed, and the production control unit 130m The number of the first special figure reservations that are stored (grasped) changes from "1" to "0".

Although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is actually stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is actually stopped at the same "814" as the production pattern 70a. The first special figure pending number displayed in the display area 70E is reduced from "1" to "0" in the specific update mode. In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed with the second special symbol as the object of the change display of the loss, the continuous notice effect is finished at this timing.

(Specific example 20 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 20 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIG. The upper diagram in FIG. 157 is a timing chart 18 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the specific game state, and FIGS. 157(a) to (f) are ( These are examples of effects corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at the timing of T0, the second special symbol holding number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". be done. At the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (second special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal) When the production control unit 130m receives, The second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "1" to "0", and the process of starting the second fluctuation production is performed.

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F while the fluctuating BGM is being output changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Also, the pending icon HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D is displayed as the icon TI by shifting display (reduction display) as an animation of 20 frames in the icon display area 70C. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. It is in the state of performing (directing action).

Next, at the timing of T1, the game ball enters the first starting port 45 due to reasons such as the player hitting to the left, so that the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is It increases from '0' to '1'. When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the winning signal, the look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), the number of the first special figure pending is changed from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increase displayed), and the winning sound based on the current winning is the winning to the first start port 45 during the specific game state. is not output (see FIG. 157(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, the production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, the rotating motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 157(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the second fluctuation production is terminated No action is taken to make it work.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. 157(c), and accordingly the output of the BGM during fluctuation is maintained (see FIG. 157(c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The big hit variation display of 1 special symbol is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (command abnormality occurs), the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process of starting the variable production is not performed (Fig. 157 ( d) see).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a jackpot manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop time command (special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol A process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the performance symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped state of losing is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that has been variably displayed on the second sub-variation display 82 is stopped (turned off) in a losing mode, but the first lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the first sub-variation display 81. It will be in a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 157(e)). In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed with the second special symbol as the object of the change display of the loss, the continuous notice effect is finished at this timing.

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the opening period of the jackpot game is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m performs processing for starting the opening effect.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and characters of "big win" is displayed. In addition, the first special figure reservation number "1" displayed in the sub first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is newly awarded based on the winning to the first start port 45 The command (signal at the time of winning) is normally received, or the command at the start based on the start of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (the first special symbol reservation number designation command as the signal at the start, the special symbol designation command, the special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives (see FIG. 157(f)).

In other words, the command at the time of winning (signal at the time of winning) based on the new winning to the second start port 47, the command at the start based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (second special figure pending number as the signal at the start Designated command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) even if the production control unit 130m receives, it is displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first special figure reservation number "1" is maintained.

At the timing of T3 and the timing of T4, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command (command abnormality occurs), the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. The same processing as when the control unit 130m cannot receive normally (a command error occurs) is performed.

Also, at the timing of T5, the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation transmitted from the main control unit 110m. When the command is successfully received by the production control unit 130m, a process of ending the second variable production started corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol at this timing and starting the opening production is performed. .

Then, the effect symbol 70a in the losing mode temporarily stopped and the special symbol TZ being variably displayed are not stopped and displayed, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is displayed as non-display for one frame. The opening image will be displayed without erasing it as an animation (substantially, effects other than the opening effect will end).

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 156 to 157, in the specific game state, during the execution of the second variation production started corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol When a stop time command (stop time signal) of the variable display of the first special symbol started after the end of the variable display is received, the second variable performance is ended. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the second variable performance ends at the timing of receiving the stop command, it is possible to end the second variable performance without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 156 to 157, in the specific game state, during the execution of the second variation effect started corresponding to the second special symbol loss variation display, the second special symbol When the stop command (stop signal) of the first special symbol jackpot variation display started after the end of the variation display is received, the second variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a, special symbol TZ ) is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the processing such as switching the production pattern from the losing mode to the big hit mode, and to end the second variation performance without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 156 to 157, in the specific game state, during the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ started corresponding to the loss variable display of the first special symbol, the second special When receiving a stop time command (stop time signal) of the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol started after the end of the symbol variation display, the sub first variation display 81 and the sub second variation display 82 In either case, the lamp pattern LZ in the jackpot mode (lighting) is not stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to dispense with processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a losing mode (extinguishing) to a big hit mode, and to terminate the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 156 to 157, in the specific game state, during the display of the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) of the variable display of the first special symbols started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. Further, since the icon is erased by receiving the stop command, the icon can be erased without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 156 to 157, in the specific game state, during the display of the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol When the display stop command (stop signal) is received, and when the icon (second running information) corresponding to the second special symbol variable display is displayed, the first special symbol variable display stop command The icon is erased in the same manner as when the (stop signal) is received. Therefore, it is possible to naturally erase the icon without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 156 to 157, in the specific gaming state, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub first pending indicator 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E When receiving a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the special figure reservation number is "0" when it is not "0", it is displayed on the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The number of the first special figure pending is displayed to be reduced to "0". Therefore, the player will not have doubts that the variable performance is not executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

In addition, in the specific game state, during the execution of the second variation performance started corresponding to the big hit variation display of the second special symbol, the loss of the first special symbol started after the end of the variation display of the second special symbol When a variable display stop command (stop signal) is received, the second variable performance (variable display of performance symbol 70a, variable display of special symbol TZ) may be terminated in a jackpot manner.

(Second embodiment)
A second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that an effect lever device 23 is provided in addition to the effect button 17 as an operation means that can be operated by the player.

First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 158 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment. Note that description of the same parts as in the first embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 158, a production lever device 23 functioning as an input device is provided on the central bottom side of the upper plate 11 so as to form the front and back of the production button device 16 .
The performance lever device 23 is provided on the central bottom surface side of the upper plate 11 so as to form the front and back of the performance button device 16, and the performance lever 24 that the player can pull toward the front side and the performance lever 24. and a lever vibration motor (not shown) for vibrating the effect lever 24 are provided. Predetermined information can be input to 1.

Since the effect button device 16 and the effect lever device 23 are provided on the upper plate 11, when the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 is driven, the vibrations of the upper plate 11 serve as a transmission member. It is transmitted to the production lever 24 via. On the other hand, when the lever vibration motor for vibrating the production lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the production button 17 via the upper plate 11.例文帳に追加In other words, when the player is operating one of the operation parts by hand, the other operation part is vibrated (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut When the vibration effect with/without the validity period of the operation unit related to the in effect, the final effect, the re-lottery effect, the confirmed effect, etc.) is executed, the vibration is transmitted to the player's hand via the other operation part. It is designed to be

In addition, since the effect button device 16 and the effect lever device 23 are provided on the upper plate 11 attached to the glass frame 4, when the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 is driven, the vibration acts as a transmission member. It is also transmitted to the firing handle via the upper plate 11 and the glass frame 4 that fulfill the function. Furthermore, when a lever vibration motor for vibrating the effect lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 17 via the upper plate 11 and the glass frame 4. - 特許庁

(decision production pattern decision table)
FIG. 159 is a diagram showing a determined effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a determined effect pattern in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 159, the determined effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each determined effect pattern, and the determined effect pattern to be selected. , and for reference, the effect configuration (effective suggestion effect, valid period, effect content) of each determined effect pattern is described.

"Valid suggestion effect" is an introduction effect that suggests that the effective period may occur. This is an effect in which the transparent effect lever image is moved and displayed on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button image and the semi-transparent effect lever image are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 5 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the final effect ends when the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 is operated once or 5 seconds elapse.

The "operation target" in the effective period column indicates the type of operation unit (effect button 17, effect lever 24) whose operation is valid during the effective period. The operation becomes effective, and if it is the "production lever", the operation of the production lever 24 becomes effective.
The "promoting effect" is a effect that prompts the user to operate the operation unit (the effect button 17, the effect lever 24) during the valid period, and specifically, the effective suggesting effect is not executed or the effective suggesting effect is executed. As a result, an opaque effect button image or an opaque effect lever image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column means that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a normal state that is in a non-protruding state and that emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. 17 indicates white light emission.
"Protruding button red" means that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a projecting state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
"Protruding button rainbow" means that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above, and the effect button 17 emits rainbow light. It is shown that.

"Normal lever" indicates that an effect lever image imitating the effect lever 24 of a predetermined size is displayed as the opaque effect lever image described above.
“Large lever rainbow” indicates that an effect lever image simulating the effect lever 24 larger than a predetermined size is displayed as the opaque effect lever image described above.

"Operation unit state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the operation unit (effect button 17, effect lever 24) during the effective period. If there is, it is a normal state that does not protrude, and "protrusion" indicates that if the target operation unit is the effect button 17, it is in a protruding state. In addition, since the production lever 24 does not have a protruding state, it is only in a normal state.

"Failure" in the column of the determined effect mode means that the first movable member 73 does not operate and the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color, thereby indicating that the jackpot game is not executed. is executed.
“Success” means that the first movable member 73 operates to the maximum operating position and emits light in rainbow colors, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, so that a jackpot game is executed. It indicates that a successful production that is determined to suggest is executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the column of button vibration is determined by the vibrator for vibrating the effect button 17, and when the successful effect starts (=when the effect button 17 is operated or when the effective period ends) It shows that a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is executed in which the strong vibration is performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second after the strong vibration is performed for 4 seconds.

"Rainbow light emission (11 seconds)" in the column of button light emission means that the effect button LED for lighting the effect button 17 is determined from the start of the successful effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It shows that the rainbow light is emitted for 11 seconds (longer period than the effect button 17 strongly vibrates). Even if the operation target is the production lever 24, the production button 17 emits rainbow light.

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each promotion effect is "normal button white"<"projection button red"<"normal lever"<"projection button rainbow"="large lever rainbow". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot in each operation unit state is "normal" < "protruding".

As a first feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. production) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a big winning game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 159 is that the effective period is generated over the longest period as the effective period generated during the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player misses the operation of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 159 is that the effect button 17 or effect lever 24 vibrates for the longest period of time as the strong vibration effect that occurs during the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of exhilaration at the time of the winning performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A fourth feature of the decided effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 159 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed over a longer period than the vibrating period of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 . Therefore, even after the vibration of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 is finished, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Frame Accessory Initial Operation Pattern Decision Table)
FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a frame role-play initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame role-play (effect button 17, effect lever 24) in the second embodiment.

The type of power-on command and the initial operation pattern to be selected are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described as a reference. ing.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when a power-on designation command is received, and the effect button 17 rises greatly, and the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 vibrate continuously for 2.5 seconds, After that, the effect button 17 returns to the origin, and then the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 intermittently vibrate for 2.5 seconds (1.25 second vibration → 1 second interval → 1.25 second vibration). During this period, the effect button 17 lights up (lights up) in the order of red→green→blue.

"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power supply restoration designation command indicating that the customer is in the waiting state is received, and the effect button 17 rises greatly, and the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 After vibrating continuously for 2 seconds, the production button 17 returns to the origin, and the production button 17 lights up (lights up) in blue during that period.

"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when receiving a second power restoration designation command indicating that special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner or a third power restoration designation command indicating that a jackpot game is in progress, The performance button 17 rises greatly, the performance button 17 and the performance lever 24 continuously vibrate for 2 seconds, the performance button 17 returns to the origin after that, and the performance button 17 goes out during that period.

Regarding the continuous vibration time (2.5 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2.5 seconds) of the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24, the vibration time (line Vibration effect during notice effect, Vibration effect during step-up notice effect, Vibration effect during pseudo continuous effect, Vibration effect during development effect, Vibration effect during cut-in effect, Vibration effect during decision effect, Re-lottery effect Vibration production, vibration production at the time of confirmation production) It is a different time.

The first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. (Production button 17, production lever 24) have different operation modes (the number of steps, the operation of each step) in the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

As a second feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160, the initial action of the effect button 17 at the time of power-on performs an action that is not in the initial action of the effect button 17 at the time of power restoration. The point is that it is designed to Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

It should be noted that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 may be the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. By doing so, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame object.

As a third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. is different in the light emission mode of the initial light emission. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

As a fourth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

In addition, during the variable display of special symbols, or at the time of power restoration during the jackpot game, the production button LED is turned off, but it is the same as at the time of power restoration in which the production button LED is restored to the customer waiting state. You may make it light up in a light emission mode.

As a fifth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 160, the number of light emitting colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on and the light emitting color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored One point is that the numbers are different. Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

The number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, but the opposite may be done.

As a sixth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it contains an emission color that is not found in Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

It should be noted that the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 at the time of power restoration may include an emission color that is not included in the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 at the time of power-on.

As the seventh feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Vibration time (vibration effect during speech announcement effect, vibration effect during step-up effect effect, vibration effect during pseudo continuous effect, vibration effect during development effect, vibration effect during cut-in effect, vibration effect during final effect , Vibration effect at the time of re-lottery effect, Vibration effect at the time of fixed effect). Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the vibration is due to the initial operation of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 .

As the eighth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it is executed over the initial action of the effect button 17 in which the presence or absence of detection is performed. Therefore, it is possible to simultaneously check the operation of the effect button 17 and the operation of the button vibration motor and the lever vibration motor, thereby shortening the time required for operation confirmation.

The effect lever 24 may be movable between the normal position and the effect position, and may be operated (moved, vibrated) at the same time as the effect button 17 during the initial operation. → It may be operated (moved, vibrated) by the production lever 24 or vice versa. In this case, the effect lever 24 may be arranged at the normal position when the "normal lever" is used in the determined effect, and the effect lever 24 may be moved to the effect position when the "large lever" is used.

In addition, although the effective period of the production lever 24 was only 5 seconds for a single hit related to the decided production, the production lever 24 is operated a plurality of times, for example, 5 seconds for consecutive pulls, etc., and each operation of the production lever 24 is performed. When the number of operations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times) as the production progresses (for example, the level gauge is raised), a success production or a determined failure production may be executed, or a prolonged 5 seconds or the like may be performed. The production lever 24 is continuously operated during the operation of the production lever 24, and the production progresses (for example, the level gauge is raised, etc.) while the operation of the production lever 24 continues. A success effect or a determined failure effect may be executed.

In addition, during the effective period related to the development performance or the pseudo continuous performance, the performance lever 24 may be operated once or the performance lever 24 may be continuously pulled when the performance with high expectation for the big win is executed. Alternatively, the production lever 24 may be extended (for example, 2 seconds). In the case of a continuous draw, the performance is advanced for each operation of the performance lever 24 (for example, the level gauge is raised, etc.), and when the number of operations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times), the SPSP development performance and the pseudo consecutive success performance are executed. It is better to make sure that In addition, in the case of a long draw, while the operation of the production lever 24 continues, the production is progressed (for example, the level gauge is raised), and when the duration reaches a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the SPSP development production is performed. It is preferable to execute a pseudo consecutive success effect.

Also, when the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 are pulled or pulled continuously, the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 may be weakly vibrated each time the effect progresses (the level gauge rises to the next stage). good.

Further, the vibration strength of the effect button 17 includes weak vibration and strong vibration, and the vibration strength of the effect lever 24 includes strong vibration. The strong vibration may have a higher vibration intensity, or the strong vibration of the production button 17 may have a higher vibration intensity than the production lever 24.例文帳に追加

Also, the type of vibration (vibration time, vibration intensity) may be varied according to the type of effective period (operation prompting image: single-press, long-press, repeated-press, long-pull, consecutive-pull). For example, a single press of the production button 17 for 3 seconds during a serif announcement production or a pseudo-continuous production will be a weak vibration of 1 second, and a long press of the production button 17 for 4 seconds during a development production will be a weak vibration of 1 second, and cut. A single hit of the production button 17 for 4 seconds during the in-stage production is 3 seconds of weak vibration, and a single push of the production button 17 for 5 seconds during the final production is made from 4 seconds to 5 seconds of strong vibration, and the production during the development production is performed. If the long press of the lever 24 is 4 seconds, the strong vibration is 1 second,

In addition, when the reserved icon or the icon changes to a display mode (for example, red or rainbow) with high expectation of a big win, the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 may be vibrated weakly or strongly for one second. .

In this embodiment, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, all the three production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped (shake motion), but the left and right production patterns 70a are stopped and the central production Only the pattern 70a may be temporarily stopped (shaking motion). At this time, all the three production patterns 70a may perform a fluctuation action (production action), or the left and right production patterns 70a do not fluctuate (production action), and only the central production pattern 70a fluctuates (production action). ).

Further, in the present embodiment, the tactile image SK and the design effect image ZE, which constitute the decorative portion, fluctuate during the temporary stop of the performance design 70a. Only one of the above may perform the fluctuation motion (effect motion).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the identification unit composed of the hexagonal base image and the number portion (identification character) does not perform the fluctuation operation (production operation) when the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. A texture (surface pattern, etc.) may be caused to perform a fluctuation action (drawing action), or a fluctuation action (drawing action) may be performed by adding a light emission effect to the identification section.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the performance design 70a is designed to swing up and down as a temporary stop of the performance design 70a, but the performance design 70a may be expanded and contracted. In this case, when the command at the start (signal at the start) is received during the temporary stop, the production design 70a is deviated from the stop position in the direction of shrinking (smaller than the normal size) and deviated in the direction of enlarging. If it is larger than normal size, it should be normal size and displayed at the stop position.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect pattern 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a. You may make it fluctuate|move like this. In this case, when a start command (start signal) is received during a temporary stop, if the decorative part or number part is out of the base image, it will fit within the base image and will be displayed at the stop position. It is better to make sure that

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the specific game state (time saving game state, variable probability game state), since the production pattern 70a is composed only of the number part (identification character), the decoration part fluctuates during the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a. The performance pattern 70a is composed of a number part (identification character) and a decorative part consisting of a pattern effect image, and the design effect image is displayed when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. You may make it fluctuate motion (drawing motion).

Further, in the present embodiment, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a were not mentioned, but during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the frame lighting device At least one of the plurality of light emitting units that constitute 10 may be set to the same mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emission mode with lower luminance than during fluctuation, light emission mode with less change and movement than during fluctuation). At least one of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the board illumination device 76 is set to the same light emission mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emission mode with lower luminance than during fluctuation, light emission with less change and movement than during fluctuation). mode, extinguished). In this case, when the next start command (start signal) is received, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 76 for the board change (switch) to a lighting mode corresponding to the change.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the production pattern 70a of the losing mode is actually stopped, the special pattern TZ is stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), but the same number as the production pattern 70a The main stop may be made in such a failure mode. In addition, when the production pattern 70a of the jackpot mode is actually stopped, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode ("333"), but in the jackpot mode in which the number is the same as that of the production pattern 70a. You may make it stop.

In addition, in this embodiment, the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m during the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a (special figure pending number designation command as a signal at the start, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command ) is received by the effect control unit 130m, the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ is continued, but the variable display is started after instantaneously deriving display in the same manner as the effect symbol 70a. You may make it In this case, as for the special symbols TZ, it is preferable to display the special symbols TZ deviated from the predetermined stop position at the stop position.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a start time command (start time signal) or a customer waiting state designation command is received while the icon TI is being displayed, the icon TI is erased by one frame of non-animation. However, it may be shorter than 10 frames required for erasing the icon TI based on reception of the stop command (stop signal), 20 frames required for shift display of the hold icon HI, and 10 frames required for additional display of the hold icon. , for example, may be erased by five frames worth of animation.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the start time command (start time signal) is received while the number of pending icons larger than the special figure pending number is displayed, the surplus pending icon HI is erased by one frame of non-animation. 10 frames for erasing the icon TI based on the reception of the stop command (stop signal), 20 frames for shift display of the hold icon HI, and 10 frames for additional display of the hold icon. may be a short number of frames, for example, it may be erased by animation for five frames.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the production control unit 130m receives the command (signal at the start) at the start when the number of special figures reserved is a predetermined number, and the number of special figures reserved and the production control notified from the main control unit 110m In the event that there is an inconsistency (abnormality with the same number, abnormality with divergence in the increasing direction) due to command abnormality between the special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the unit 130m, a predetermined A predetermined number of reserved icons are displayed after displaying a number of reserved icons that is one more than the number of reserved icons. may be displayed as it is.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the production control unit 130m receives the command (signal at the start) at the start when the number of special figures reserved is a predetermined number, and the number of special figures reserved and the production control notified from the main control unit 110m In the event that there is an inconsistency (abnormality that is the same number, abnormality that has a divergence in the increasing direction) due to command abnormality between the special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the unit 130m, this The icon is displayed during the variable effect that is executed in response to the reception of the command at the start (signal at the start), but the variable effect that is executed in response to the reception of the command at the start (signal at the start) The icon may not be displayed inside.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal icon is a white icon regardless of the type of production mode. good. In this case, the special icon may be a character icon regardless of the type of production mode, or the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon may be changed according to the type of production mode or game state.

In addition, when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon is changed according to the type of effect mode or game state, the action mode (mode of effect action) during the variable effect is changed according to the form of the normal icon. good too. Furthermore, even when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon is changed according to the type of the effect mode or the game state, the mode of action (mode of effect action) during the variable effect can be changed according to the form of the special icon. good too.

In addition, in the present embodiment, only the special icon was displayed as a result of the icon change effect. A specific icon suggesting that a ready-to-win effect (for example, an SP ready-to-win effect or an SPSP ready-to-win effect) is executed may be provided. In this case, the form of the special icon and the specific icon and the mode of the effect action should be different from the form of the normal icon and the special icon and the mode of the effect action.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the reservation icon is displayed when both the prefetching designation command of the special figure reservation number designation command as the winning time command (winning time signal) is normally received, but the special figure reservation If you receive the number designation command and do not receive the prefetch designation command normally, the pending icon is displayed, while if you successfully receive the prefetch designation command without successfully receiving the special figure hold number designation command may not display the pending icon, or vice versa. In addition, when receiving only one of the special figure pending number designation command and the look-ahead designation command and displaying the pending icon, the icon change effect for this pending icon may not be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode cannot be changed by operating the effect button 17 by the player, but the effect mode may be changed by operating the effect button 17.例文帳に追加In this case, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a based on the command abnormality that the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, the operation for changing the production mode is not accepted, that is, the production button 17 It is preferable to regulate the change of the production mode based on the operation of .

Further, in the present embodiment, the pending icon change effect is executed without operating the effect button 17, but the pending icon is displayed as a button icon prompting the operation of the effect button 17, In response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the display of the button icon for which is valid, an operation change effect of changing the button icon to any of a normal icon, a special icon, and a specific icon may be executed. . In this case, in the operation change effect, the effect button 17 is changed at a predetermined rate from the first operation mode (non-vibrating, non-projecting state at the standby position) to the second operating mode (vibrating, projecting state at the effect position). You may do so. In this case, the production button 17 is changed from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the above-described speech announcement effect and final effect, rather than the rate at which the effect button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the operation change effect. The rate of change should be higher.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the effect button image executed in the effective suggestive effect is semi-transparent. good.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) when the advance notice effect (dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect) and the development effect are executed. However, the glass frame 4 may be provided with a frame movable member, and when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed in the pre-reach announcement effect or the development effect, the motion effect of operating the frame movable member may be executed. Instead of the vibration effect, an action effect for moving the frame movable member may be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute the vibration effect of the effect button 17 at the time of execution of the advance notice effect after reach (pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, fixed effect) or at the time of pattern matching. Alternatively, a frame movable member may be provided in the glass frame 4, and an action performance may be executed by operating the frame movable member when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed when the patterns are aligned, or instead of the vibration performance. An action effect for moving the frame movable member may be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the title display indicating that the reach effect is being performed is not performed during the execution of the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect. The title may be displayed by either red characters that have a higher expectation of winning than white characters, rainbow characters that confirm the big hit, etc.), and after the title display is displayed in white characters, it changes to red characters or rainbow characters. You can let it run.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the cut-in production is performed at the end of the SP reach production, but it is performed in the middle (first period) or the end (second period) of the SP reach production, and the SP reach production is performed. Even if the production button 17 is more likely to be in a protruding state (proportion of protruding state is higher) in the case of performing the cut-in performance at the end of the SP reach performance than in the case of performing the cut-in performance in the middle stage. good.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an effective period for long-pressing the production button 17 is generated in the development performance, but an effective period for long-pressing the performance button 17 is generated as a jackpot announcement performance other than the development performance. At the same time, it may be possible to execute an operation progress effect that progresses the effect according to the long-pressing period during the effective period. In this case, it is preferable to determine that the long press continues at a plurality of determination timings in the valid period, and determine to what stage the effect is to be developed based on the determination results.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon (in-execution information) is displayed on the image display device to indicate that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed. You may make it light-emit a light-emitting part. In this case, a predetermined light emitting unit emits light at the display timing of the icon corresponding to the shift display (decrease display) of the pending icon accompanying the start of the variable effect, and the predetermined light emission occurs at the erasing timing of the icon associated with the end of the variable effect. It is better to turn off the light of the part. Also, in the case of a game machine that erases the icon immediately after starting the variable display, it is preferable to turn off the predetermined light-emitting portion immediately after the start of the variable display.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first variation effect is terminated by receiving a command for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol, a command for stopping the variable display of the second special symbol, an opening designation command, a customer waiting designation command, etc. ( It is designed to stop), but it may be ended by receiving a command at the start of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, or it may be ended (stopped) without receiving a command due to the passage of the fluctuation production time. can be Also, the second variation effect is terminated (stopped) by receiving a command for stopping the variable display of the second special symbol, a command for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol, an opening designation command, a customer waiting designation command, etc. However, it may be terminated by receiving a command at the start of the variable display of the first special pattern, or may be terminated (stopped) without receiving the command due to the lapse of the variable presentation time.

<Content 1 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, determination information acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition is stored as a pending memory, and based on the determination information, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the determination result is used. It is common to execute a variable production based on. In such a game machine, by performing an increase display or a decrease display of the hold image corresponding to each of the hold memories, or by displaying the execution image corresponding to the hold memory in which the variable effect is executed, There have been some that allow a player to grasp the progress of a game (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-018225). However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that it is difficult to immediately grasp the number of reservations when the number of reservations changes.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means control the presentation of the game. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the pending memories decreases, the information display means can execute the display of the first pending information and the second pending information. The decrease display of the first hold information (1 is subtracted) is earlier than the frame update timing at which the decrease display of the second hold information (movement to the center of the next display unit in the hold icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing that will complete the update to the pending digits) is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command etc.) from the main control means to control the game effect. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the pending memories decreases, the information display means displays a decrease in the first pending information and the second pending information in which the variable effect is started. It is possible to perform a change display that changes to the execution information (the icon), and the change display of the second hold information to the execution information (moving from the hold icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the decrement display of the first pending information (update to the pending number decremented by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame update timing at which the frame is updated. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means control the presentation of the game. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the pending memories decreases, the information display means can execute the display of the first pending information and the second pending information. when the number of the reserved memories increases, it is possible to display an increase of the first reserved information and an increased display of the second reserved information, and during the display of the decreased second reserved information, When the number increases, even before the frame update timing at which the decreasing display of the second pending information (movement to the center of the next display unit in the pending icon display area) is completed, the first pending Incremental display of information (update to pending digits incremented by one) is to be initiated. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command etc.) from the main control means to control the game effect. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the reserved memories decreases, the information display means displays the reduced first reserved information and the second reserved information whose variable display is started. A change display that changes to the execution information (the icon) can be executed, and when the number of the pending memories increases, an increase display of the first hold information and an increase display of the second hold information can be executed. Yes, and when the number of pending memories increases during change display of the second pending information, the decreasing display of the second pending information (moving from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. Even before the frame update timing of , the increase display of the first reservation information (update to the reservation number incremented by 1) is started. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, control the presentation of the game. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the pending memories increases, the information display means can increase the display of the first pending information and increase the display of the second pending information. Yes, when the number of the pending memories increases during the execution of the variable effect, the increase display of the second pending information (enlargement of the pending icon additionally displayed in the pending icon display area to the normal size) is completed. The frame update timing at which the increased display of the first pending information (updating to the pending number incremented by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame update timing at which . By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means to control the presentation of the game. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (holding icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the variable effect execution means is capable of displaying during execution of the variable effect It is possible to execute a specific effect (SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect, full rotation ready-to-win effect) that makes the execution of the special game expected, and the information display means displays the first pending information when the number of the pending memories increases. and an increased display of the second pending information, and when the number of the pending memories increases during execution of the specific effect, the increased display of the first pending information (1 is added update to the reserved number) is executed, but the increase display of the second reserved information is executed until a predetermined condition is established (the specific effect is completed, the losing effect pattern or the jackpot effect pattern that has been displayed in a reduced size is enlarged and displayed). It is designed not to be By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command etc.) from the main control means controls the game effect. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, A game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, wherein the sub-control means displays a variable effect according to the result of the determination. Variable effect execution means executable by display means (image display device), first reservation information (reservation number) indicating the number of the reservation memories, and second reservation information indicating the identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories ( and an information display means capable of displaying a pending icon), wherein, when the number of the pending memories increases, the information display means increases display of the first pending information and increases display of the second pending information. The storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the first starting port) as a first reservation storage, and the establishment of the second acquisition condition When the determination information based on (entrance of the game ball to the second starting port) is stored as a second reservation memory, and the number of the first reservation memory increases in the specific game state, the first reservation information Increased display (updated to the reserved number with 1 added) is executed, but the increased display of the second reserved information satisfies a predetermined condition (finishing the final variation effect in the specific game state, returning to the normal game state). It will not run until By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

<Content 2 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to judge whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired judgment information, and to execute the special game according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp whether the game control state has been initialized or restored.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. , effect control capable of performing the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means during execution of the game. means (effect control board 130), and the effect control means changes the operation mode of the initial operation (operation mode, light emission mode, etc.) are made different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, an operating means (effect button 17) that can be operated by the player and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode, and a power source Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and the operation means after the start of power supply Effect control means (effect control board 130) that performs initial light emission and is capable of performing effect light emission of the operation means during execution of the game, wherein the effect control means initializes the control state of the game. The light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission is made different between when the control state of the game is restored and when the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode , second movable member 74), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. , effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing initial operation and initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing effect operation and effect light emission of the movable effect means during game execution. ), wherein the effect control means determines the operation mode of the initial operation of the movable effect means (the number of steps and the Although the operation mode of the operation of each step, etc.) is the same, the light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable effect means is made different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode , second movable member 74), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing effect light emission of the movable effect means during execution of a game; The effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), and the effect control means controls when the control state of the game is initialized. and when the control state of the game is restored, at least part of the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the first movable effect means is the same, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the second movable effect means is the same. are designed to be different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine where a game can be played, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied, Determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and whether to initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or to stop the power supply Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the previous state, and variable display of a plurality of performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. and a production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by the production, wherein the plurality of production patterns include identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) that allow each to be identified, and the production When the game control state is initialized, the control means sets the identification characters in the plurality of performance symbols displayed on the display means to a first combination (for example, "135"), and sets the game control state. is restored, the second combination (for example, "753") is used as the identification characters in the plurality of performance symbols displayed on the display means. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

<Content 3 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
A conventional game machine generally initializes the control state of a game after power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs an initial operation of the movable effect means after power supply is started (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the movable effect means may not be able to perform a suitable initial action.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the power supply was stopped. and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of a game. and a control means (effect control board 130), wherein the effect control means has the movable effect means at the second position at the time of start of power supply (power supply restoration) at which the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the initial action is performed after the return action of the movable effect means to the first position is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the power supply was stopped and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of a game. and a control means (effect control board 130), wherein the effect control means has the movable effect means at the second position at the start of power supply (recovery of power supply) at which the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the return operation of the movable effect means to the first position is performed, and when the movable effect means returns to the first position, the initial motion is performed, but when the movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial motion is performed. The initial operation is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the power supply was stopped and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of a game. a control means (effect control board 130), wherein the movable effect means includes first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and second movable effect means (second movable member 74); The effect control means is arranged so that the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first position at the start of power supply (recovery of power supply) when the control state of the game is restored. , the return operation of the first movable effect means to the first position is performed, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial action of the first movable effect means is Instead, the initial motion of the second movable effect means is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the power supply was stopped and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of a game. a control means (effect control board 130), wherein the movable effect means includes first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and second movable effect means (second movable member 74); The effect control means is arranged so that the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first position at the start of power supply (recovery of power supply) when the control state of the game is restored. , the return operation of the first movable effect means to the first position is performed, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the second movable effect means is performed. is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the power supply was stopped and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of a game. a control means (effect control board 130), wherein the movable effect means includes first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and second movable effect means (second movable member 74); The effect control means is configured such that the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first position when power supply is started (power is turned on) at which the control state of the game is initialized. If it is at the position, the first movable effect means is returned to the first position, and if the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial action of the first movable effect means is performed. , the initial motion of the second movable effect means is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the power supply was stopped and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of a game. A control means (rendering control board 130) is provided, and the movable rendering means includes a first movable rendering means (first movable member 73), a second position of the first movable rendering means, and a second position of itself. Including a second movable effect means (second movable member 74) that overlaps with the above-mentioned effect control means, the control state of the game is initialized When the power supply is started (power-on), the When the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first position, the first movable effect means is returned to the first position, and the first movable effect means is moved to the first position. When the effect means does not return to the first position, the initial movement of the second movable effect means is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

<Content 4 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the power supply that was stopped during the variable effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and the interest in the game is reduced. There was a problem that there is a possibility to

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine where a game can be played, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied, Determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and whether to initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or to stop the power supply Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the previous state, and variation accompanied by variation display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing production is provided, and in the variable production, the production pattern that is being variably displayed is oscillatingly displayed (temporary stop display) and then statically displayed ( When the power supply stopped during the execution of the variable effect that oscillates the effect pattern is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the effect control means returns a predetermined (at the time of receiving the special figure stop designation command, at the time of receiving the customer waiting command), it is possible to statically display the production pattern on the display means without swinging the display. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can be played, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the start opening) information), a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a control state of the game after power supply is started. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of displayed production patterns, and in the variable production, a ready-to-win state is determined by a part of the production patterns. Including a ready-to-win fluctuation effect for forming and displaying and executing a ready-to-win effect, the effect control means, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the ready-to-win effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, at a predetermined timing ( When a special figure stop designation command is received, when a customer waiting command is received), the ready-to-win state is formed and displayed The combination of the performance symbols different from the ready-to-win combination by the performance symbols displayed can be displayed on the display means in a stationary state. there is Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

<Content 5 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, which may reduce the interest in the game. There was a problem that there is

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( main control board 110), initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and determination by the determination means According to the result, a production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production with a variable display of the production pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), are a customer waiting state in which the variable performance is not executed, a first state that is the execution period of the variable performance in the state without the pending memory, and an execution period of the variable performance in the state with the pending memory. When the game control state is restored, the effect control means can perform a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbols on the display means. The mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen only) when the power supply stopped in the customer waiting state is resumed and the customer waiting state is restored, and the power supply is stopped in the first state or the second state. The display mode of the specific display (display of initial screen + screen during recovery) when the power supply is resumed and the state is restored to the first state or the second state is made different. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

<Content 6 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs a customer waiting effect on the display means when the player is not playing a game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the customer waiting effect is not executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a control state of the game after power supply is started. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production with a variable display of the displayed production pattern, and the production control means, after statically displaying the production pattern on the display means When a predetermined period of time elapses, it is possible to execute a customer waiting effect (customer waiting demonstration effect) by the display means, and when the effect pattern is statically displayed after the fluctuation time of the variable effect elapses, and the control state. It is possible to change the period until the customer waiting effect is executed depending on whether the effect pattern is statically displayed after the initialization of or after the control state is restored. Therefore, the customer waiting effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

<Content 7 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays execution information corresponding to determination information during execution of a variable effect on a display means (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-064835). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, which may reduce the interest in the game. There was a problem that there is

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a control state of the game after power supply is started. Initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing or restoring to the state before the power supply is stopped, and an effect displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production with variable display of symbols, and the production control means, when the control state of the game is restored, displays the production on the display means. It is possible to perform a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the pattern, and the determination information during execution of the variable effect is displayed in a predetermined display area (the icon display area 70C) of the display means. It is possible to display the corresponding execution information (the icon), and when the power supply that was stopped during the display of the execution information is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the next from the end of the specific display Until the start of the variable display, the predetermined display area is secured in a predetermined state (a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed), and the execution information is displayed in the predetermined display area. It is set not to display. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

<Content 8 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, based on the preliminary determination result of the determination information, there was a gaming machine that executes a look-ahead notice effect over a plurality of fluctuation effects (for example, JP-A-2017-143904 reference). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply stopped during the pre-reading notice effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. there were.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), and based on the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Judging means (main control board 110), preliminary judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information before judgment by the judgment means, and initializing the control state of the game after power supply is started. Or, initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state before the power supply is stopped, and the production design displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by a variable display, and the production control means performs the variable production a plurality of times based on the determination result of the prior determination means. It is possible to execute a predetermined pre-reading notice effect (continuous notice effect) over a period of time, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the pre-reading notice effect is not restarted, and in the variable performance executed next to the variable performance in which the power supply is stopped, a notice performance (for example, alternative notice performance) different from the look-ahead notice performance can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the continuous advance notice effect due to the stoppage of the power supply, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

<Content 9 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that executes a specific effect that gradually suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed over a plurality of variable effects (for example, JP-A-2017 -143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply that was stopped during the specific effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. rice field.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), and based on the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Judging means (main control board 110), preliminary judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information before judgment by the judgment means, and initializing the control state of the game after power supply is started. Or, initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state before the power supply is stopped, and the production design displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display, wherein the performance control means steps the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed over a plurality of times of the variable performance. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that is explicitly suggested, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the specific effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the power supply is Although the specific performance can be executed in the variable performance executed next to the stopped variable performance, it is not executed from the continuation of the stage suggested before stopping the power supply. Therefore, it is possible to execute an icon change effect in accordance with the contents of the current variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Content 10 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such game machines, there is a game machine that executes a specific effect in which the display mode of the identification information displayed corresponding to each piece of determination information for which the execution of the variable effect is not completed is changed in stages. There was (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the power supply stopped during the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is resumed is high. There was a fear that

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), and based on the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Judging means (main control board 110), preliminary judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information before judgment by the judgment means, and initializing the control state of the game after power supply is started. Or, initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state before the power supply is stopped, and the production design displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. Effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display, and the effect control means is provided with the determination information and the variable effect that the execution of the variable effect is not completed. It is possible to display identification information (the corresponding icon, pending icon) corresponding to each of the determination information that has not been started, and the special game is executed by changing the display mode of the identification information step by step. It is possible to execute a specific effect (e.g., icon change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation to be held, and the display mode includes a first stage mode (e.g., white icon) and a second stage mode (e.g., blue icon). icon) and a third stage mode (red icon), and the power supply stopped during the display of the identification information changing to the third stage mode in the second stage mode is resumed, and the game is controlled. is restored, the identification information displayed in the second stage mode is displayed in the first stage mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after resuming the power supply without being conscious of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped.

<Content 11 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays the number of pending memories, which is determination information for which determination has not been performed, in a display area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it takes a long time to grasp the number of reserved memories. There is a problem that there is a possibility that the

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( main control board 110), initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and determination by the determination means A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means (image display device) according to a result, and the control state of the game is determined. When restored, it is possible to perform a specific display (display of initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbol on the display means, and the first display area (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second Suspension display indicating the number of suspension storage in each of the suspension display 84) and the second display area (first suspension icon display area 70B, second suspension icon display area 70D) different from the first display area When the power supply stopped in the state of the reserved memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the reserved display is executed in the second display area during the execution of the specific display. However, the hold display can be executed in the first display area. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

<Content 12 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, when the stopped power supply is resumed during the effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, and the control state of the game is restored, the interest in the game is lost. There was a problem that it could drop.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), and based on the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Judging means (main control board 110), preliminary judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information before the judgment means, and initializing the control state of the game after power supply is started. Or, initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state before the power supply is stopped, and the production design displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. Effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by variable display, and light emitting means (winning entrance lamp NR) capable of changing to any of a plurality of notification modes, wherein the effect control is performed. The means is capable of executing a change effect (lamp change effect) suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode, and the change effect is being executed. When the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is set to a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishing) different from the specific notification mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation in which the player is puzzled that the ramp change effect is restarted even though the change effect is not being executed, thereby improving the game. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

<Content 13 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
A conventional gaming machine comprises main control means capable of controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine provided with movable effect means that can be operated in a predetermined manner (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-187648). However, in such a game machine, no consideration is given to the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means deviate.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. is possible, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command etc.), the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to the signal (command etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. is possible, and it is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in a standby state (customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration specifying command, etc.), the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect corresponding to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. is possible, and it is possible to execute a variable effect for notifying whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and from the main control means during execution of the variable effect When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to the signal (command etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. It is possible to execute a special game effect (jackpot effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) during execution of a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the special game effect The initial operation can be executed when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. , wherein the effect control means is capable of executing the initial operation and initial light emission of the movable effect means, and is capable of executing the effect operation and light emission of the movable effect means. In the case where the game control state is initialized and in the case where the game control state is restored, the operation mode of the initial operation of the movable effect means (the operation mode such as the number of steps and the motion of each step) is the same. However, the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the production), the initial operation of the movable production means can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination information ), a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and the control state of the game is initialized after power supply is started. or an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the state before the power supply was stopped, and the effect control means initializes the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the performance operation of the movable production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display), and the determination by the determination means Depending on the result, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), and in the variable effect, the variable display of the effect pattern is shaken. It is possible to perform static display (stop display) after moving display (temporary stop display), and the effect control means restarts the power supply that was stopped during execution of the variable effect that oscillates the effect pattern. When the control state of the game is restored by doing so, it is possible to statically display the production pattern on the display means without swinging display at a predetermined timing (when receiving a special figure stop designation command, when receiving a customer waiting command). During the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance corresponding to the signal can be executed, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) from the main control means ) is received, the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( Main control board 110) and initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or for restoring the state before stopping the power supply, and the production The control means controls the initial operation of the production means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the production operation of the production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display). It is possible to execute, and according to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbols displayed on the display means (image display device), and the game machine The states include a customer waiting state in which the variable performance is not executed, a first state that is the execution period of the variable performance in the state without the pending memory, and an execution period of the variable performance in the state with the pending memory. and a second state, wherein the effect control means performs a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbols on the display means when the game control state is restored. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display (only the display of the initial screen) when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the customer waiting state is restored, and the first state or the first state When the power supply stopped during state 2 resumes and the state is restored to the first state or the second state, the display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen + the screen during recovery) is made different, and according to the signal If a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance can be executed, the initial It is possible to perform operations. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( Main control board 110) and initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or for restoring the state before stopping the power supply, and the production The control means controls the initial operation of the production means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the production operation of the production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display). It is possible to execute, and according to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), and the display means When a predetermined period of time elapses after the static display of the production pattern, the display means can execute a customer waiting production (customer waiting demonstration production), and after the fluctuation time of the variable production has elapsed, the production pattern is displayed. It is possible to change the period until the customer waiting effect is executed between the case of static display and the case of static display of the effect symbol after the control state is initialized or after the control state is restored, A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) capable of executing a performance corresponding to the signal. If so, it is possible to carry out said initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( Main control board 110) and initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or for restoring the state before stopping the power supply, and the production The control means controls the initial operation of the production means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the production operation of the production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display). It is possible to execute, and according to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a variable effect with a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), and the prior Based on the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a predetermined pre-reading foretelling effect (continuous foretelling effect) for a plurality of times of the variable performance, and the power supply stopped during the execution of the fore-reading foretelling effect is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored, the predictive notice effect is not restarted, and the notice effect different from the predictive notice effect in the variable effect executed next to the variable effect in which the power supply is stopped (for example, A predetermined signal (power-on designation command , power restoration designation command, etc.), the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( Main control board 110) and initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or for restoring the state before stopping the power supply, and the production The control means controls the initial operation of the production means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the production operation of the production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display). It is possible to execute, and according to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), and a plurality of times It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that gradually suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed over the variable effect, and the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the specific effect is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored by doing so, the specific effect can be executed in the variable effect executed next to the variable effect in which the power supply is stopped, but it was suggested before the power supply was stopped. It is not executed from the continuation of the stage, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, When a command specifying power restoration, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling a light emitting means (winning entrance lamp NR) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes, and an operation in a predetermined mode (Action, light emission, sound output, image display) possible production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and establishment of acquisition conditions Based on the storage means (main control board 110) that can store the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by (entering the game ball into the starting port) as a pending storage, and the determination information, the player Determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute an advantageous special game (jackpot game), and whether to initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or before stopping the power supply and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state of the production control means, the initial operation of the production means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display), and the production It is possible to execute the effect operation of the means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display), and it is expected that the special game will be executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode. It is possible to execute a change effect (lamp change effect) that suggests a degree, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is changed to the above. During the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which it is possible to control to a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishing) different from a specific notification mode and to execute an effect according to the signal, the main control When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the means, the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means Sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and according to the signal When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which performance can be executed, the predetermined It is possible to output a notification sound. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means Sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and the game is progressing. It is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in a waiting state (customer waiting state) where there is no customer waiting, and during execution of the customer waiting effect, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means. In this case, it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means Sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, which is advantageous to the player It is possible to execute a variable effect for notifying whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and during execution of the variable effect, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration) from the main control means designated command, etc.), it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means Sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, which is advantageous to the player It is possible to execute a special game effect (jackpot effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) during execution of a special game (jackpot game), and a predetermined signal from the main control means during execution of the special game effect. When receiving a command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.), it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

<Content 14 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
A conventional gaming machine generally comprises main control means for controlling the progress of a game and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying effect images (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, in such a game machine, no consideration is given to the case where the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the power supply to the effect control means is continued.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect corresponding to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means A game machine having a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling a display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of displaying a production image (variation production, jackpot production, etc.) The effect control means is capable of displaying a game standby screen (a static display screen of effect symbols) on the display means in a standby state (customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing, and the game standby screen When the power supply to the main control means stops during display, the display of the game standby screen can be continued. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

<Content 15 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
A conventional gaming machine generally comprises main control means for controlling the progress of a game and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there is one that executes abnormality notification based on an input signal from a predetermined detection means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-113441). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a possibility that the abnormality notification is not appropriately performed.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, a detection means (starting door detection switch, Magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) and control means (main control board 110 and/or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means and, when the power supply to the game machine is started, if the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic Anomaly notification, radio wave anomaly notification, etc.) can be executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform anomaly notification appropriately.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection) that detects a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) in a game machine that can be played sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means, If the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) when the power supply to the game machine is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification , radio wave anomaly notification, etc.), and if the control means and the detection means are connected during execution of the predetermined anomaly notification, for a predetermined period (30 seconds, until the power is turned off, etc.) Execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify an abnormality.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) in a game machine that can be played sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means, When the control means and the detection means become disconnected (disconnection of the connector, disconnection, etc.) while power is being supplied to the game machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify an abnormality.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine that can be played, a detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection) that detects a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means, When the control means and the detection means become disconnected (disconnection of the connector, disconnection, etc.) while power is being supplied to the game machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality When the control means and the detection means are connected during execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the predetermined period of time (elapsed 30 seconds, until the power is turned off, etc.) Continue execution of anomaly notification. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform anomaly notification appropriately.

<Content 16 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
Conventional gaming machines determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on determination information acquired based on the winning of the game medium in the starting area, and perform game effects according to the result of the determination. A game machine that executes is common. Among such gaming machines, there was a game machine comprising main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means for controlling production in response to a command (signal) from the main control means (for example, , see JP-A-2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, no consideration is given to the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means deviate.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of effect symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal game state. There, according to the increase of the first reserved memory, the first reserved information (first reserved icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and according to the decrease of the first reserved memory, the first Each of the reserved information can be shifted and displayed to be reduced, and the first reserved information is subjected to a production operation (fluctuation, rotation, etc.) when the plurality of production patterns are temporarily stopped in the variable production. It is possible, and the first suspension information is during the temporary stop of the plurality of production symbols performing the production operation, and a specific number (for example, 3) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, 1) During the display of the first reservation information, when the first reservation storage receives the signal at the start of the variation display (reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern designation command) where the predetermined number becomes the predetermined number , without starting the variable effect and shift-displaying the first reserved information corresponding to the specific number of the specific number of the first reserved information (the third reserved icon from the icon display area side), The first pending information (at least the first pending icon from the icon display area side) corresponding to the predetermined number is shift-displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In the normal game state, the effect control means executes a variable effect accompanied by variable display of a plurality of effect symbols in front of the background image so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information. It is possible to display the first suspension information (first suspension icon) corresponding to each of the first suspension storage in the display area (image display device 70), and in the variable effect, the When the plurality of performance patterns are temporarily stopped, the background image can be effected (scrolled, changed, etc.), and the plurality of performance patterns in which the background image is performing the performance operation are temporarily stopped. During the display of a specific number (e.g., three) of the first suspension information that is two more than a predetermined number (e.g., one), the first suspension memory becomes the predetermined number, and the variable display is started. When the time signal (reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) is received, the variation production is started, and the number (for example, two) of the first After displaying the pending information, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the first pending information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of effect symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal game state. It is possible to display the first reserved number indicating the number of the first reserved memories in the first display area (sub-first reserved display 83), and the second corresponding to each of the first reserved memories. 1 reservation information (first reservation icon) can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70), and when the plurality of production patterns are temporarily stopped in the variable production, the production pattern (character tactile image, pattern effect image) that constitute the A signal at the start of the variable display when the first suspension memory reaches the predetermined number during the display of the first suspension information of a specific number (eg, 3) that is two more than a predetermined number (eg, 1). (Reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received, the execution of the variation effect is started, and the first reservation less than the specific number by one in the first display area Display the first pending number (for example, one) of the predetermined number without displaying the number (for example, two), and display the number (for example, two) that is one less than the specific number in the second display area After displaying the first pending information, the predetermined number (for example, one) The first pending information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of effect symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal game state. It is possible to display the first reservation information (first reservation icon) corresponding to each of the first reservation memories in the display area (image display device 70), and the plurality of production patterns are displayed in the variable production During the temporary stop, it is possible to cause the first suspension information to perform a performance operation (fluctuation, rotation, etc.), and the plurality of performance symbols in which the first suspension information is performing the performance operation are temporarily stopped. and at the start of the variable display in which the first suspension memory becomes the predetermined number during the display of the first suspension information of a specific number (eg, 4) that is 3 more than a predetermined number (eg, 1) When a signal (reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received, the variation effect is started, and the first reservation of the number (eg, three) that is one less than the specific number Displaying the predetermined number (eg, one) of the first pending information without displaying information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In the normal game state, the effect control means executes a variable effect accompanied by variable display of a plurality of effect symbols in front of the background image so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information. It is possible to display the first suspension information (first suspension icon) corresponding to each of the first suspension storage in the display area (image display device 70), and in the variable effect, the When the plurality of performance patterns are temporarily stopped, the background image can be effected (scrolled, changed, etc.), and the plurality of performance patterns in which the background image is performing the performance operation are temporarily stopped. During the display of a specific number (e.g., four) of the first suspension information that is three more than a predetermined number (e.g., one), the first suspension memory becomes the predetermined number, and the variable display is started. When the time signal (reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) is received, the variation effect is started, and the number (eg, three) of the first Displaying a number (for example, two) of the first holding information that is less than the specific number by two without displaying the holding information, and then displaying a predetermined number (for example, one) of the first holding information. . Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of effect symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal game state. It is possible to display the first reserved number indicating the number of the first reserved memories in the first display area (sub-first reserved display 83), and the second corresponding to each of the first reserved memories. 1 reservation information (first reservation icon) can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70), and when the plurality of production patterns are temporarily stopped in the variable production, the production pattern (character tactile image, pattern effect image) that constitute the A signal at the start of the variable display when the first suspension memory reaches the predetermined number during the display of the first suspension information of a specific number (eg, four) that is three more than a predetermined number (eg, one). (Reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received, the variation effect is started, and the first storage number (two less than the specific number in the first display area) display the predetermined number of the first stored numbers (for example, one) without displaying the number (for example, two); 1 A number less than the specified number by 2 without displaying pending information (eg, two) of the first pending information are displayed, and then the predetermined number (eg, one) of the first pending information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means, and control to a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. and a state control means, wherein in the normal game state, the effect control means performs a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of effect symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information. It is possible to execute, and when the plurality of performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the variable performance, a performance operation (fluctuation operation) of predetermined elements (character tactile images, symbol effect images) constituting the performance symbols etc.), and when the predetermined element is in the performance operation in the variable performance and the temporarily stopped performance symbol is displaced from the stop position, it is based on the determination result of the first determination information When the signal at the start of the fluctuation display (holding number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, after the production design is displayed at the stop position with the start of the fluctuation production Display variable. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variable effect (variable display of effect symbols 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific game state. There, the second pending information (second pending icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70) according to the increase of the second pending memory, and the second pending information is displayed according to the decrease of the pending memory. can be reduced by one by shifting display, and during the display of a specific number (for example, three) of the second hold information that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one), the second hold storage is the predetermined number of the variation display start time signal (holding number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) is received, the variation production is started, the specific number of the second The second pending information corresponding to the predetermined number (the icon display 1st and 2nd pending icons from the area side) are shift-displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variable effect (variable display of effect symbols 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific game state. There is, second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending storage can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) can be specified During the display of the second reservation information of the number (for example, three), the signal at the start of the variation display that the second reservation storage becomes the predetermined number (holding number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern specified command) is received, the variable effect is started, the second reservation information of the number (for example, 2) less than the specific number is displayed, and then the predetermined number (for example, 1) of the Display the second pending information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variable effect (variable display of effect symbols 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific game state. It is possible to display the second storage number indicating the number of the second storages in the first display area (sub-second storage display 84), and to display the second storage number corresponding to each of the second storages. 2 pending information (second pending icon) can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70), and a specific number (eg, three) of the above-mentioned During the display of the second pending information, when the signal at the start of the fluctuation display (holding number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, where the second reserve storage becomes the predetermined number, The variable effect is started, and the predetermined number of the second stored numbers (for example, one) is displayed without displaying the second stored number (for example, two) that is one less than the specific number in the first display area. is displayed, and after displaying the second pending information of a number (for example, two) that is one less than the specific number in the second display area, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the second pending information is displayed indicate. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variable effect (variable display of effect symbols 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific game state. It is possible to display the second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories in the display area (image display device 70), and the predetermined number (for example, one) is larger than three. During the display of a large specific number (for example, four) of the second reservation information, the second reservation memory becomes the predetermined number. Figure variation pattern specification command) is received, the variation effect is started, and the predetermined number (eg, one ) to display the second pending information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variable effect (variable display of effect symbols 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific game state. It is possible to display the second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories in the display area (image display device 70), and the predetermined number (for example, one) is larger than three. During the display of a large specific number (for example, four) of the second reservation information, the second reservation memory becomes the predetermined number. Figure variation pattern specification command) is received, the variation effect is started, and two more than the specific number without displaying the second hold information of the number (for example, three) that is one less than the specific number A small number (eg, two) of the second pending information are displayed, and then the predetermined number (eg, one) of the second pending information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variable effect (variable display of effect symbols 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific game state. It is possible to display the second storage number indicating the number of the second storages in the first display area (sub-second storage display 84), and to display the second storage number corresponding to each of the second storages. 2 pending information (second pending icon) can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70), and a specific number (eg, four) of the During the display of the second pending information, when the signal at the start of the fluctuation display (holding number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, where the second reserve storage becomes the predetermined number, The variable effect is started, and the predetermined number of the second stored numbers (for example, one) is displayed without displaying the second stored number (for example, two) that is two less than the specific number in the first display area. is displayed, and without displaying the second pending information of a number (for example, three) that is one less than the specific number in the second display area, a number that is two less than the specific number (for example, two) The second pending information is displayed, and then the predetermined number (eg, one) of the second pending information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 14th configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means, and control to a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. and a state control means, wherein the performance control means executes a variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific game state. It is possible, and when the performance symbol that is temporarily stopped in the variation performance is displaced from the stop position, a signal at the start of the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information (holding number designation command, When a special symbol designating command, a special symbol variation pattern designating command) is received, the performance symbol is displayed at the stop position with the start of the variation performance, and then the variation display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the starting condition (entering the starting port). determination means for determining whether or not to execute; variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; and a storage means for performing, the production control means is capable of executing a variable production (variable display of the production pattern 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the determination information, Additional display of pending information (holding icon) in the display area (image display device 70) according to the increase of the pending memory, shift display of the pending information according to the decrease of the pending memory, and one of them is execution information. (the corresponding icon), and while a specific number (for example, 3) of the reserved information that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, 1) is being displayed, the reserved storage becomes the predetermined number When the signal at the start of the fluctuation display (holding number designation command, special pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is erased to start the fluctuation production, and the specific number of the holding Without shift-displaying the reserved information (the third reserved icon from the icon display area side) corresponding to the specific number of the information, the necessary amount of the reserved information (the first and second from the icon display area side) hold icon) are shifted and one is displayed as the execution information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 16th configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the starting condition (entering the starting port). determination means for determining whether or not to execute; variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; and a storage means, wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display, and corresponding to each of the reserved memories It is possible to display the pending information (holding icon) in the display area (image display device 70) and display the holding information for which the variable display is started as execution information (the icon). 1), during the display of a specific number (for example, three) of the holding information, the holding memory becomes the predetermined number. , Toku-zu variation pattern specification command) is received, along with erasing the execution information, starting the variation effect, and displaying the holding information of one less than the specific number (for example, two) , the predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 17th configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the starting condition (entering the starting port). determination means for determining whether or not to execute; variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; The production control means is capable of executing a variable production (such as a variable display of the production pattern 70a) so as to correspond to the variable display, and a holding indicating the number of the holding storage It is possible to display the number in the first display area (sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, first special figure reservation number display area 70E, second special figure reservation number display area 70F) The pending information (holding icon) corresponding to each of the holding memories is displayed in a second display area (holding icon display area), and the holding information whose variable display is started is used as execution information (the icon). During the display of a specific number (e.g., three) of the pending information that is capable of being displayed and is two more than a predetermined number (e.g., one), starting the variable display in which the pending memory is the predetermined number. When the time signal (reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is erased, the variation production is started, and the specific number in the first display area Display the number of reservations (for example, one) of the predetermined number without displaying the number of reservations (for example, two) that is less by one, and a number that is one less than the specific number in the second display area (for example, 2) of the pending information are displayed, and then the predetermined number (for example, 1) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the starting condition (entering the starting port). determination means for determining whether or not to execute; variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; and a storage means, wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display, and corresponding to each of the reserved memories It is possible to display the pending information (holding icon) in the display area (image display device 70) and display the holding information for which the variable display is started as execution information (the icon). 1), during the display of a specific number (for example, 4) of the holding information, the holding memory becomes the predetermined number. , Toku-zu variation pattern specification command) is received, the execution information is erased, the variation effect is started, and the number of the reservation information that is one less than the specific number (for example, three) is displayed. A predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 19th configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the starting condition (entering the starting port). determination means for determining whether or not to execute; variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; and a storage means, wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display, and corresponding to each of the reserved memories It is possible to display the pending information (holding icon) in the display area (image display device 70) and display the holding information for which the variable display is started as execution information (the icon). 1), during the display of a specific number (for example, 4) of the holding information, the holding memory becomes the predetermined number. , Toku-zu variation pattern specification command) is received, the execution information is erased, the variation effect is started, and the number of the reservation information that is one less than the specific number (for example, three) is displayed. A number (for example, two) of the pending information that is less than the specific number is displayed, and then a predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the starting condition (entering the starting port). determination means for determining whether or not to execute; variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; The production control means is capable of executing a variable production (such as a variable display of the production pattern 70a) so as to correspond to the variable display, and a holding indicating the number of the holding storage It is possible to display the number in the first display area (sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, first special figure reservation number display area 70E, second special figure reservation number display area 70F) The pending information (holding icon) corresponding to each of the holding memories is displayed in a second display area (holding icon display area), and the holding information whose variable display is started is used as execution information (the icon). During the display of a specific number (e.g., four) of said pending information that is capable of being displayed and is three more than a predetermined number (e.g., one), said pending memory is said to be said predetermined number, and said variable display is started. When the time signal (reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is erased, the variation production is started, and the specific number in the first display area Display the number of reservations of the predetermined number (for example, one) without displaying the number of reservations less than two (for example, two), and a number that is one less than the specific number in the second display area (for example, 3) of the pending information are displayed, the holding information of a number less than the specific number by two (for example, 2) is displayed, and then the holding information of the predetermined number (for example, 1) and the holding information are displayed. Display execution information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 21st configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means means (production control board 130), the main control means, the special game (jackpot) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the starting condition (entering the starting port) game), and a variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means. It is possible to execute a variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance patterns so as to correspond to the display, and the variable display is started when the temporarily stopped performance symbols in the variable performance are deviated from a stop position. When an hour signal (holding number designation command, special pattern designation command, special pattern variation pattern designation command) is received, the performance design is displayed at the stop position with the start of the variation performance, and then variably displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

<Content 17 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
A conventional gaming machine determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information acquired based on the establishment of a starting condition, and executes a game effect according to the result of the determination. is common. In such a game machine, there is also known one that executes an effect using a predetermined effect device (effect button, movable member, etc.) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-033816). However, the gaming machine as described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem that the interest in the game is low.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the effect control means can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect, and the game effect includes a first effect (pre-reach effect) Includes a specific game effect (reach fluctuation effect) in which the second effect (post-reach effect) is executed later, and the vibration effect includes the first vibration effect (at the time of the dialogue announcement effect, the step-up announcement effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect) , vibration production for 1 second during development production, etc.) and a second vibration production different from the first vibration production (at the time of cut-in production, at the time of decision success production, at the time of final production, at the time of pattern alignment, etc. 3 seconds or more Vibration effect), and in the specific game effect, the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the first effect than during the second effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (the production button 17, the production lever 24) that the player can operate. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the effect control means can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect, and the game effect is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). includes a specific game effect (ready-to-win effect) in which a specific effect (ready-to-win effect) that makes the execution of the special game expected is executed after the predetermined effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is executed, and the vibration effect includes a first Vibration effects (1-second vibration effects such as dialogue announcement effects, step-up announcement effects, pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, etc.) and second vibration effects different from the first vibration effects (during cut-in effects, At the time of decision success performance, at the time of fixed performance, at the time of matching symbols, etc., vibration performance of 3 seconds or more), and in the specific game performance, the first vibration performance is executed rather than when the first vibration performance is not executed. The second vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the second vibration effect is performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (the production button 17, the production lever 24) that the player can operate. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the effect control means includes a suggestive effect (look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead operation effect) suggesting that the special game may be executed during execution of the game effect; It is possible to execute a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, speech announcement effect, cut-in effect, decision success effect, etc.) for vibrating the operation means, and the vibration effect is performed according to the operation of the operation means during the operation prompting display. and a second vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, etc.) executed without the operation prompting display. In a predetermined period after the start of the game effect (until the first high-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is completed), the case where the second vibration effect is executed is higher than the case where the suggestive effect is executed. There is a high degree of expectation that the special game will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (the production button 17, the production lever 24) that the player can operate. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time saving) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state game state) and a game state control means (main control board 110), and a production control means (production control board 130 ), the production control means can execute a vibration production that vibrates the operation means during execution of the variable production, and the variable production includes a first type production pattern (even number design) A first specific variation effect in which the reach effect is executed, a second specific change effect in which the reach effect is executed by the second type of effect pattern (odd number pattern other than "7"), and a third type of effect pattern (" 7" symbol) includes a third specific fluctuation effect in which a ready-to-win effect is executed, and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (at the time of the dialogue notice effect, at the time of the step-up notice effect, at the time of the pseudo continuous effect, at the time of the development effect etc.) and a second vibration performance different from the first vibration performance (3 seconds or more vibration performance such as cut-in performance, determined success performance, finalized performance, etc.), In a normal game state, the first specific variable performance is more likely to be executed than the second specific variable performance, the third specific variable performance is less likely to be executed than the first specific variable performance, and the first specific variable performance is less likely to be executed. The second vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the third specific variation effect is executed than when it is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect (read-ahead vibration effect, speech announcement effect, cut-in effect, determined success effect, etc.) for vibrating the operation means during execution of the game effect. The vibrating effect includes a first vibrating effect (dialogue announcement effect, cut-in effect, determined success effect, etc.) executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation prompting display, and the operation prompting display. When the first vibration effect is executed, a predetermined effect sound (display effect sound of the operation promotion image) corresponding to the operation of the operation means is included. , a production sound corresponding to the operation of the production button, and an operating effect sound of the character) are outputted, while the predetermined production sound is not outputted when the second vibration production is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the effect control means can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect, and the game effect includes a specific effect that makes the execution of the special game expected. Including a specific game effect (reach variation effect) in which (reach effect) is executed, the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (line notice effect, a cut-in effect, a determined success effect, etc.), and a second vibration effect (prefetching vibration effect, etc.) executed without the operation prompting display, and when the first vibration effect is executed, the operation means While a predetermined effect image (operation promotion image, effect image corresponding to the operation of the effect button) related to the operation of is displayed, the predetermined effect image is not displayed when the second vibration effect is executed. , In the specific game effect (jackpot reach fluctuation effect) in which the special game is executed, the number of times the second vibration effect is executed (maximum 3 times) before the start of the specific effect After the start of the specific effect , the number of executions of the second vibration effect (maximum 7 times) tends to increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (the production button 17, the production lever 24) that the player can operate. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the operation means includes a first operation means (effect button 17) and a second operation means (effect lever 24) different from the first operation means, and the effect control means is During the execution of the game effect, a vibration effect (a look-ahead vibration effect, a speech announcement effect, a cut-in effect, a decision success effect, etc.) for vibrating the first operating means can be executed, and during the operation of the second operating means. When the vibration effect is executed, the vibration associated with the vibration effect is transmitted to the player via the second operating means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, a game frame (a frame consisting of a game board mounting frame 3 and a glass frame 4) is provided in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Frame production unit (production button 17 (button vibration motor), production lever (lever vibration motor), frame movable member) provided on the front side of , and establishment of acquisition conditions (first start port 45 or second start port 47 Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball), and determination means (main A control board 110) and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variation effect) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the effect control means is during execution of the game effect. is capable of executing a suggestive effect (jackpot announcement effect) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, and an operation effect (vibration effect) that operates (moves, vibrates) the frame effect unit during execution of the suggestive effect , action effects, etc.) can be executed, and the suggested effects include a first suggested effect (weak notice, pre-reach notice effect) and a second suggested effect (strong When the second suggestion effect is executed, the operation effect is more likely to be executed than when the first suggestion effect is executed, and the first suggestion is performed. The degree of expectation for execution of the special game is higher when the operating performance is executed during execution of the first suggestive performance than when the operating performance is not executed during performance. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), and the production control means is controllable in a first production mode (production modes A to C) and a second production mode (production modes D to G), and during execution of the game production and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation prompting display (at the time of dialogue announcement effect, cut-in effect and a second vibration effect executed without the operation prompting display (prediction vibration effect, step-up notice effect, etc.), and the first Expectations for execution of the special game when the second vibration performance is executed are different between the performance mode and the second performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), and the production control means is controllable in a first production mode (production modes A to C) and a second production mode (production modes D to G), and during execution of the game production and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation prompting display (at the time of dialogue announcement effect, cut-in effect and a second vibration effect executed without the operation prompting display (prediction vibration effect, step-up notice effect, etc.), and the first Expectations for execution of the special game when the first vibration performance is executed are different between the performance mode and the second performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, a game frame (a frame consisting of a game board mounting frame 3 and a glass frame 4) is provided in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Frame production unit (production button 17 (button vibration motor), production lever (lever vibration motor), frame movable member) provided on the front side of , and establishment of acquisition conditions (first start port 45 or second start port 47 Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball), and determination means (main A control board 110) and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variation effect) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the effect control means is during execution of the game effect. Executes a change effect (vibration effect, action effect, light emission effect, etc.) for changing the frame effect part from the first state (standby state, extinction state) to the second state (vibration state, operation state, predetermined light emission state). The variable performance includes a specific game performance (reach variable performance) in which a second performance (post-ready performance) is executed after the first performance (pre-ready performance), and execution of the first performance. Compared to when the change effect is not executed during the change effect, the expectation that the special game is executed is higher, and the specific game effect (jackpot) in which the special game is executed In the reach variation effect), regardless of whether or not the change effect is executed during the execution of the first effect, the change effect is executed during the execution of the second effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the effect control means can execute a vibration effect to vibrate the operation means during execution of the game effect, and the vibration effect includes an operation of the operation means during the operation promotion display. The first vibration effect (one of the vibration effects such as the dialogue announcement effect, the simulated continuous effect, the development effect, and the cut-in effect) executed in response to the above-mentioned operation prompting display is executed without Including a second vibration performance (one of vibration performance at the time of step-up notice performance, at the time of pattern matching, and at the time of C pattern matching), and the first vibration performance has a different degree of expectation for execution of the special game. Multiple vibration modes (weak vibration or strong vibration for 1 second for vibration effects during dialogue announcement, pseudo continuous effects, or development effects, weak or strong vibration for 3 seconds for vibration effects during cut-in effects) Vibration), and the second vibration effect is one predetermined vibration mode (at the time of step-up notice effect) when performing a predetermined effect (step-up notice effect, pattern matching, C pattern matching) If the vibrating effect is weak vibration for 1 second, if the vibrating effect when the pattern is aligned, it is strong vibration for 4 seconds, and if the C pattern is aligned, the strong vibration is performed for 1 second). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time saving) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state A game state control means (main control board 110) that controls the game state), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variation performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. The effect control means can execute a vibration effect to vibrate the operation means during execution of the game effect, and the vibration effect includes a predetermined vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, speech notice effect, step-up notice Vibration production for 1 second at the time of production, etc.) and a specific vibration production different from the predetermined vibration production (Vibration production for 3 seconds or more at the time of success production, pattern matching, etc.), and the predetermined vibration production includes , a first vibration effect executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation prompting display (vibration effect at the time of the dialogue announcement effect), and a second vibration effect executed without the operation prompting display (pre-reading vibration production, vibration production at the time of step-up notice production), and in the game production in which the special game is executed, the first vibration production is executed and the second vibration production is performed. The rate at which the specific vibration effect is executed after that differs depending on when it is executed, and the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the normal game state than during the specific game state. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 14th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the information, and production control for executing a variable production that variably displays a plurality of types of production symbols according to the judgment result of the judgment means. Means (effect control board 130), wherein the effect control means includes a special effect (determined success effect, fixed effect, etc.) that suggests execution of the special game during execution of the variable effect, and the operation means vibrate in any of a plurality of vibration modes (look-ahead vibration effect, dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, determined success effect, fixed effect Vibration effects such as when the symbols are aligned, when the symbols are aligned, and when the C symbols are aligned). The mode of execution of the vibration performance (execution/non-execution, execution timing, etc.) differs depending on even-numbered symbols, odd-numbered symbols other than "7", and "7" symbols, and the vibration performance is executed along with the execution of the special performance. In this case, the vibration mode of the vibration performance is the same regardless of the type of performance symbol that suggests execution of the special game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the operation means includes a first operation means (effect button 17) and a second operation means (effect lever 24) different from the first operation means, and the effect control means is During execution of the game effect, it is possible to execute a vibration effect (a look-ahead vibration effect, a speech announcement effect, a cut-in effect, a decision success effect, etc.) for vibrating the first operation means, and the vibration effect includes an operation prompting display. A first vibration effect executed in response to the operation of the first operation means in the above (vibration effect such as dialogue announcement effect, cut-in effect, decision success effect, etc.) and execution without the operation prompting display and a second vibration effect (a look-ahead vibration effect, a vibration effect at the time of a step-up notice effect, etc.). In the second vibration effect, the start timing of vibration is predetermined, and when the vibration effect is executed during the operation of the second operating means, the vibration related to the vibration effect is played through the second operating means. It is designed to be communicated to Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 16th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the effect control means can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means, and the effective period of the operation means includes a first effective period (line announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development During the second valid period, including the valid period related to the performance, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) and the second valid period (valid period during customer waiting) different from the first valid period The vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the operating means is operated during the first valid period than when the operating means is operated during the first effective period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 17th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect of vibrating the operation means, and the effective period of the operation means includes a first effective period (effective period related to speech advance notice effect, etc.) , a second valid period different from the first valid period (valid period related to cut-in effect, final effect, etc.), and a third valid period different from the first valid period and the second valid period (customer waiting middle valid period), and the vibration effect is executed when the operating means is operated during the second valid period than when the operating means is operated during the third valid period. is becoming easier. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As the 18th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a production unit (production button 17 (button vibration motor) operable in a predetermined manner) , Production lever 24 (lever vibration motor), second movable member 74) and establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of game balls to first start port 45 or second start port 47) Based on determination information (special figure determination information ), an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring the information, a determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination result of the determination means A production control means (production control board 130) that executes a game production (variation production), and the production control means includes a first production mode (production modes A to C) and a second production mode (production mode D to G), and changes the effect section from a first state (standby state, extinction state) to a second state (vibration state, operation state, predetermined light emission state) during execution of the game effect. A change effect (vibration effect, action effect, light emission effect, etc.) can be executed, and the expectation is that the special game will be executed when the change effect is executed in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. degrees are different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 19th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the establishment of the acquisition condition (to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball), and determination means (main Control board 110), and production control means (production control board 130) that executes a game production (variation production) according to the determination result of the judgment means, and the production control means is a first production mode (production Modes A to C) and a second performance mode (performance modes D to G), and up to one of a plurality of stages with different expectations for execution of the special game during execution of the game performance. Progressive step effects (step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect) can be executed, and in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the step effect is a predetermined stage (if the step-up notice effect, the second effect is performed). The degree of expectation for execution of the special game when progressing to any of the 3-step effect, the 4th-step effect, or the 5th-step effect, or once or twice in the case of pseudo-continuous effect, is different. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the establishment of the acquisition condition (to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball), and determination means (main Control board 110), and production control means (production control board 130) that executes a game production (variation production) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the production control means is a first production mode (production Modes A to C) and a second production mode (production modes D to G), and continuous production (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading operation production, pre-reading) that performs advance notice production in one or more times of the game production Vibration effect, look-ahead zone effect, etc.) can be executed, a specific effect (ready-to-win effect) that makes the execution of the special game expected in the game effect can be executed, and a predetermined number of times (once) in the first effect mode. When the continuous performance of the predetermined number of times is executed in the second performance mode than when the continuous performance is executed, the specific performance in the game performance that triggered the execution of the continuous performance are becoming harder to implement. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 21st configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the establishment of the acquisition condition (to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball), and determination means (main Control board 110), and production control means (production control board 130) that executes a game production (variation production) according to the determination result of the judgment means, and the production control means is a first production mode (production Modes A to C) and a second production mode (production modes D to G), and continuous production (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading operation production, pre-reading) that performs advance notice production in one or more times of the game production Vibration effect, look-ahead zone effect, etc.) can be executed, and in the game effect, a specific effect (reach effect) that makes the execution of the special game expected can be executed, and in the second effect mode, a predetermined number of times (twice or 3 times), the case where the continuous effect is executed for the predetermined number of times in the first effect mode is more likely in the game effect that triggered the execution of the continuous effect. The specific effect is easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 22nd configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the establishment of the acquisition condition (to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball), and determination means (main Control board 110), and production control means (production control board 130) that executes a game production (variation production) according to the determination result of the judgment means, and the production control means is a first production mode (production Modes A to C) and a second production mode (production modes D to G), and continuous production (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading operation production, pre-reading) that performs advance notice production in one or more times of the game production Vibration effect, look-ahead zone effect, etc.) can be executed, and in the game effect, a specific effect (reach effect) that expects execution of the special game can be executed, and the specific effect includes a first specific effect (normal reach production) and a second specific production (SP/SPSP ready-to-win production) in which the degree of expectation that the special game is executed is higher than the first specific production, and the first production mode is higher than the second production mode. is more likely to execute the specific effect in the game effect that triggered the execution of the continuous effect when the continuous effect is executed for the first number of times, and the second effect is more likely than the first effect mode. In the performance mode, when the continuous performance is executed a second number of times larger than the first number of times, the second specific performance is more likely to be executed in the game performance that triggered the execution of the continuous performance. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 23rd configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, display means (image display device) capable of displaying the effect image, and determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47) Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring, determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and game according to the determination result of the determination means and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing an effect (variable effect), and the effect control means includes an operation prompting display (opaque button image ) is performed, and an operation effect (development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) can be executed according to the operation of the operation means, and the operation prompting display is displayed on the display means before the operation prompting display is performed. It is possible to perform a suggestive display (semi-transparent button image) suggesting that there is a possibility that the The first operation prompting display includes a second operation prompting display (a normal state red button image, a projected state red button image, and a projected state rainbow button image) with different expectations for the execution of the special game. The degree of expectation for execution of the special game when the first operation prompting display is performed differs between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the suggestive display is not performed in the first effect mode. The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher when the operation prompting display is performed after the suggestive display is performed than when the operation prompting display is performed immediately. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Content 18 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
Conventional gaming machines determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on determination information acquired based on the winning of the game medium in the starting area, and perform game effects according to the result of the determination. A game machine that executes is common. Among such gaming machines, there was a game machine comprising main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means for controlling production in response to a command (signal) from the main control means (for example, , see JP-A-2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, no consideration is given to the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means deviate.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effects that control effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising control means (performance control board 130), the main control means includes acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening, and the determination information. Judging means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on, fluctuation display execution means for executing fluctuation display of symbols (special symbols) based on the judgment result of the judging means, and the judging is not performed and a pending storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a pending storage, and the effect control means stores a prize winning signal transmitted when the pending memory increases due to the winning of the starting port (special at the time of increase). When receiving a figure hold number designation command), it is possible to additionally display a hold display (increase the number of hold icons), and a signal at the start (decrease When receiving a special figure pending number specification command at the time), it is possible to decrease the display of the pending display (transfer the earliest pending icon to the icon, decrease the number of pending icons), and the number of pending displays When the winning signal with one more pending memory is received, the pending display is additionally displayed in a normal additional mode (animation of a plurality of frames, one without a gap), and the pending display is displayed. When the above-mentioned win-time signal is received in which the number of the above-mentioned pending memories is larger than the number, the above-mentioned pending display is additionally displayed in a special additional mode (multiple simultaneous, 1-frame non-animation, 1 at intervals). do. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effects that control effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising control means (performance control board 130), the main control means includes acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening, and the determination information. Judging means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on, fluctuation display execution means for executing fluctuation display of symbols (special symbols) based on the judgment result of the judging means, and the judging is not performed and a pending storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a pending storage, and the effect control means stores a prize winning signal transmitted when the pending memory increases due to the winning of the starting port (special at the time of increase). When receiving the figure hold number designation command), the first hold display is additionally displayed (increase the number of hold icons), and the second hold display is increased (increase the number of the hold number display area, the light emission mode of the sub hold display It is possible to increase and switch), and when the start signal (special figure pending number designation command at the time of decrease) transmitted at the time of the decrease of the pending storage with the start of the variable display is received, the first pending display Decrease display (move the first pending icon to the relevant icon, decrease the number of pending icons), and decrease the second pending display (decrease the number of the pending number display area, switch the lighting mode of the sub-hold indicator to decrease) ), and when the winning-time signal is received in which the number of the pending memories is one more than the number of the first pending displays, the first pending display is normally added (a plurality of frames animation, one without a gap), the second pending display is additionally displayed in a specific update mode (one frame of non-animation switching), and the number of the first pending displays is greater than the number of the first pending displays. When the winning signal with a large number of pending memories is received, the first pending display is additionally displayed in a special additional mode (multiple simultaneous, one frame non-animation, one with an interval). , increasing and displaying the second pending display in the specific update mode. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effects that control effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising control means (performance control board 130), the main control means includes acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening, and the determination information. Judging means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on, fluctuation display execution means for executing fluctuation display of symbols (special symbols) based on the judgment result of the judging means, and the judging is not performed and a pending storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a pending storage, and the effect control means stores a prize winning signal transmitted when the pending memory increases due to the winning of the starting port (special at the time of increase). When receiving a figure hold number designation command), it is possible to additionally display a hold display (increase the number of hold icons), and a signal at the start (decrease When receiving a special figure pending number specification command at the time), it is possible to decrease the display of the pending display (transfer the earliest pending icon to the icon, decrease the number of pending icons), and produce the pending display ( Rotating motion, shaking motion) can be performed, and when the winning signal is received with the number of the pending memories one more than the number of the pending displays, the pending display is normally added ( A plurality of frames of animation, one without a gap) are additionally displayed, and when the winning signal with the number of the pending memories greater than the number of the pending displays is received, the pending display is specially added. Modes (multiple simultaneous, 1-frame non-animation, 1 at intervals) are additionally displayed, and even the pending display additionally displayed in the normal additional mode is additionally displayed in the special additional mode Even in the pending display, it is possible to cause the performance action to be performed in the same performance mode (rotational axis position, rotation speed, swing width, swing speed). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effects that control effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising control means (performance control board 130), the main control means includes acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening, and the determination information. Judging means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on, fluctuation display execution means for executing fluctuation display of symbols (special symbols) based on the judgment result of the judging means, and the judging is not performed and a pending storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a pending storage, and the effect control means stores a prize winning signal transmitted when the pending memory increases due to the winning of the starting port (special at the time of increase). When receiving a figure hold number designation command), it is possible to additionally display a hold display (increase the number of hold icons), and a signal at the start (decrease When receiving a special figure pending number specification command at the time), it is possible to decrease the display of the pending display (transfer the earliest pending icon to the icon, decrease the number of pending icons), and the number of pending displays When the winning signal with one more pending memory is received, the pending display is additionally displayed in a normal additional mode (animation of a plurality of frames, one without a gap), and the pending display is displayed. When the winning signal is received in which the number of pending memories is two more than the number, the pending display is changed to the first special additional mode (two simultaneous, one frame non-animation, one spaced one ), and when the winning signal is received in which the number of the pending memories is three more than the number of the pending displays, the pending displays are displayed in a second special additional mode (three simultaneous, one frame , non-animated, 1 spaced between 2). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effects that control effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising control means (performance control board 130), the main control means includes acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening, and the determination information. Judging means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on, fluctuation display execution means for executing fluctuation display of symbols (special symbols) based on the judgment result of the judging means, and the judging is not performed and a pending storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a pending storage, and the effect control means stores a prize winning signal transmitted when the pending memory increases due to the winning of the starting port (special at the time of increase). When receiving the figure hold number designation command), the first hold display is additionally displayed (increase the number of hold icons), and the second hold display is increased (increase the number of the hold number display area, the light emission mode of the sub hold display It is possible to increase and switch), and when the start signal (special figure pending number designation command at the time of decrease) transmitted at the time of the decrease of the pending storage with the start of the variable display is received, the first pending display Decrease display (move the first pending icon to the relevant icon, decrease the number of pending icons), and decrease the second pending display (decrease the number of the pending number display area, switch the lighting mode of the sub-hold indicator to decrease) ), and when the winning-time signal is received in which the number of the pending memories is one more than the number of the first pending displays, the first pending display is normally added (a plurality of frames animation, one without a gap), the second pending display is additionally displayed in a specific update mode (switching with non-animation of one frame), and the number of the first pending displays is greater than the number of the first pending displays. When the winning signal with two more reserved memories is received, the first reserved display is changed to the first special addition mode (two simultaneous, one frame non-animation, one with one interval) and additionally display the second pending display in the specific update mode, and receive the winning signal in which the number of the pending memories is greater than the number of the first pending displays by three, The first pending display is additionally displayed in a second special additional mode (three simultaneously, one frame non-animation, one spaced between two), and the second pending display is additionally displayed in the specific update mode. do. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effects that control effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising control means (performance control board 130), the main control means includes acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening, and the determination information. Judging means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on, fluctuation display execution means for executing fluctuation display of symbols (special symbols) based on the judgment result of the judging means, and the judging is not performed and a pending storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a pending storage, and the effect control means stores a prize winning signal transmitted when the pending memory increases due to the winning of the starting port (special at the time of increase). When receiving a figure hold number designation command), it is possible to additionally display a hold display (increase the number of hold icons), and a signal at the start (decrease When receiving a special figure pending number specification command at the time), it is possible to decrease the display of the pending display (transfer the earliest pending icon to the icon, decrease the number of pending icons), and produce the pending display ( Rotating motion, shaking motion) can be performed, and when the winning signal is received with the number of the pending memories one more than the number of the pending displays, the pending display is normally added ( A plurality of frames of animation, one without a gap) are additionally displayed, and when the winning signal is received in which the number of the reserved memories is two more than the number of the reserved displays, the reserved display is displayed as the second winning signal. 1 special addition mode (2 simultaneous, 1 frame non-animation, 1 with 1 space) is additionally displayed, and the winning signal with the number of the pending memories being 3 more than the number of the pending displays. When received, the pending display is additionally displayed in a second special additional mode (three simultaneous, one frame non-animation, one spaced between two), and the additionally displayed in the normal additional mode Even if it is a suspended display, even if it is the suspended display additionally displayed in the first special addition mode or the second special addition mode, the same production mode (rotational axis position, rotation speed, shake width, shake speed). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effects that control effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising control means (performance control board 130), the main control means includes acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening, and the determination information. Judging means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on, fluctuation display execution means for executing fluctuation display of symbols (special symbols) based on the judgment result of the judging means, and the judging is not performed and a pending storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a pending storage, and the effect control means stores a prize winning signal transmitted when the pending memory increases due to the winning of the starting port (special at the time of increase). When receiving a figure hold number designation command), it is possible to additionally display a hold display (increase the number of hold icons), and a signal at the start (decrease When receiving a special figure pending number specification command at the time), it is possible to decrease the display of the pending display (transfer the earliest pending icon to the icon, decrease the number of pending icons), and the number of pending displays When the winning signal with one more pending memory is received, the pending display is additionally displayed in a normal additional mode (animation of a plurality of frames, one without a gap), and the pending display is displayed. When the start time signal is received in which the number of pending memories is greater than the number, the pending display is additionally displayed in a special additional mode (multiple simultaneous, 1 frame non-animation, 1 at intervals). do. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effects that control effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising control means (performance control board 130), the main control means includes acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening, and the determination information. Judging means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on, fluctuation display execution means for executing fluctuation display of symbols (special symbols) based on the judgment result of the judging means, and the judging is not performed and a pending storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a pending storage, and the effect control means stores a prize winning signal transmitted when the pending memory increases due to the winning of the starting port (special at the time of increase). When receiving the figure hold number designation command), the first hold display is additionally displayed (increase the number of hold icons), and the second hold display is increased (increase the number of the hold number display area, the light emission mode of the sub hold display It is possible to increase and switch), and when the start signal (special figure pending number designation command at the time of decrease) transmitted at the time of the decrease of the pending storage with the start of the variable display is received, the first pending display Decrease display (move the first pending icon to the relevant icon, decrease the number of pending icons), and decrease the second pending display (decrease the number of the pending number display area, switch the lighting mode of the sub-hold indicator to decrease) ), and when the winning-time signal is received in which the number of the pending memories is one more than the number of the first pending displays, the first pending display is normally added (a plurality of frames animation, one without a gap), the second pending display is additionally displayed in a specific update mode (one frame of non-animation switching), and the number of the first pending displays is greater than the number of the first pending displays. When the start time signal with a large number of pending memories is received, the first pending display is additionally displayed in a special additional mode (multiple simultaneous, 1 frame non-animation, 1 with an interval). , increasing and displaying the second pending display in the specific update manner. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effects that control effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising control means (performance control board 130), the main control means includes acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening, and the determination information. Judging means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on, fluctuation display execution means for executing fluctuation display of symbols (special symbols) based on the judgment result of the judging means, and the judging is not performed and a pending storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a pending storage, and the effect control means stores a prize winning signal transmitted when the pending memory increases due to the winning of the starting port (special at the time of increase). When receiving a figure hold number designation command), it is possible to additionally display a hold display (increase the number of hold icons), and a signal at the start (decrease When receiving a special figure pending number specification command at the time), it is possible to decrease the display of the pending display (transfer the earliest pending icon to the icon, decrease the number of pending icons), and produce the pending display ( Rotating motion, shaking motion) can be performed, and when the winning signal is received with the number of the pending memories one more than the number of the pending displays, the pending display is normally added ( A plurality of frames of animation, one without a gap) are additionally displayed, and when the start time signal is received in which the number of the pending memories is greater than the number of the pending displays, the pending display is specially added. Modes (multiple simultaneous, 1-frame non-animation, 1 at intervals) are additionally displayed, and even the pending display additionally displayed in the normal additional mode is additionally displayed in the special additional mode Even in the pending display, it is possible to cause the performance action to be performed in the same performance mode (rotational axis position, rotation speed, swing width, swing speed). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effects that control effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising control means (performance control board 130), the main control means includes acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening, and the determination information. Judging means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on, fluctuation display execution means for executing fluctuation display of symbols (special symbols) based on the judgment result of the judging means, and the judging is not performed and a pending storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a pending storage, and the effect control means stores a prize winning signal transmitted when the pending memory increases due to the winning of the starting port (special at the time of increase). When receiving a figure hold number designation command), it is possible to additionally display a hold display (increase the number of hold icons), and a signal at the start (decrease When receiving a special figure pending number specification command at the time), it is possible to decrease the display of the pending display (shift the earliest pending icon to the icon, decrease the number of pending icons), and the number of pending memories (for example When the winning signal or the starting signal is received while the number of pending displays (for example, "2") less than "3") is displayed, the number corresponding to the number of pending memories In order to display the pending display of , it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effects that control effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising control means (performance control board 130), the main control means includes acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening, and the determination information. Judging means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on, fluctuation display execution means for executing fluctuation display of symbols (special symbols) based on the judgment result of the judging means, and the judging is not performed and a pending storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a pending storage, and the effect control means stores a prize winning signal transmitted when the pending memory increases due to the winning of the starting port (special at the time of increase). When receiving the pending number designation command), it is possible to additionally display the pending display (increase the number of pending icons) and execute the production at the time of increase of the pending display (output of winning sound, light emission when winning). , When the signal at the start (special figure pending number designation command at the time of decrease) transmitted at the time of the decrease of the pending storage accompanying the start of the variable display is received, the pending display is reduced (the earliest pending icon is changed to the icon and decrease the number of pending icons), and when the winning signal that increases the pending display by one is received, the production at the time of increase is executed once, and the pending display is displayed a plurality of times. When the winning signal to be increased is received, the effect at the time of increase is not performed multiple times, but performed once. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effects that control effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising control means (performance control board 130), the main control means includes acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening, and the determination information. Judging means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on, fluctuation display execution means for executing fluctuation display of symbols (special symbols) based on the judgment result of the judging means, and the judging is not performed A reservation storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a reservation storage, and a preliminary judgment means for pre-judging the judgment information before the judgment means, and the effect control means is a winning prize to the start opening. When receiving a winning signal (special figure pending number specification command at the time of increase) sent when the pending storage increases, additional display of the pending display (increase the number of pending icons) is performed, and when the pending display is increased It is possible to execute production (output of winning sound, light emission when winning), and a signal at the start transmitted when the retention memory decreases with the start of the variable display (special figure retention number designation command at the time of decrease) is received, it is possible to reduce the display of the pending display (shift the earliest pending icon to the relevant icon, decrease the number of pending icons), and when a predetermined signal indicating the result of the preliminary determination is received, the special It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect (icon change effect, continuous notice effect) that expects the execution of a game, and when the winning signal for increasing the pending display by one is received, the increase effect. (output of winning sound, light emission at winning) is executed once, and when the above-mentioned signal at the time of winning that causes the above-mentioned pending display to be increased multiple times is received, the effect at the time of increase is not executed multiple times, but is executed once. , when a plurality of said pending displays are increased, said pending storage corresponding to a specific pending display (a pending icon for which a winning command could not be normally received) among said increased pending displays is targeted; Execution of the look-ahead effect is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effects that control effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine comprising control means (performance control board 130), the main control means includes acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, and the determination information Judging means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on, fluctuation display executing means for executing fluctuation display of symbols (special symbols) based on the judgment result of the judging means, and the judging is not performed and a pending storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a pending storage, and the effect control means stores a prize winning signal transmitted when the pending memory increases due to the winning of the starting port (special when increasing). When receiving the pending number designation command), it is possible to additionally display the pending display (increase the number of pending icons) and to execute the production at the time of increase of the pending display (output of winning sound, light emission when winning). , When the signal at the start (special figure pending number designation command at the time of decrease) transmitted at the time of the decrease of the pending memory accompanying the start of the variable display is received, the pending display is reduced (the earliest pending icon is changed to the icon and decrease the number of pending icons), and when receiving the winning signal that increases the number of pending displays, a plurality of the pending displays are additionally displayed and stored in the latest pending memory. The production at the time of increase targeting the corresponding holding display is executed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 14th configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effects that control effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising control means (performance control board 130), the main control means includes acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening, and the determination information. Judging means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on, fluctuation display execution means for executing fluctuation display of symbols (special symbols) based on the judgment result of the judging means, and the judging is not performed and a pending storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a pending storage, and the effect control means stores a prize winning signal transmitted when the pending memory increases due to the winning of the starting port (special at the time of increase). When receiving the pending number designation command), it is possible to additionally display the pending display (increase the number of pending icons) and execute the production at the time of increase of the pending display (output of winning sound, light emission when winning). , When the signal at the start (special figure pending number designation command at the time of decrease) transmitted at the time of the decrease of the pending storage accompanying the start of the variable display is received, the pending display is reduced (the earliest pending icon is changed to the icon and decrease the number of hold icons), and when the winning signal that increases the hold display by one is received, the increase effect (output of winning sound, light emission at winning) is performed. When the winning signal is received to increase the number of pending displays by executing once, the performance at the time of increase is executed once without being executed multiple times, and the pending display is incremented by one. Even if there is more, even if a plurality of the holding displays are to be increased, the production at the time of increase is executed in the same production mode (type of sound, volume, length of sound, luminescence color, luminescence time). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effects that control effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising control means (performance control board 130), the main control means controls the first symbol (first special A first variable display executing means for executing a first variable display that variably displays a symbol), and a second symbol (second special symbol) based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port 47). ), and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) in which the second start condition is more likely to be established than in the normal game state and the normal game state. ), and the effect control means receives the signal for starting the first variable display (command at the start), the first variable effect (the effect symbol and / or the special symbol production with variable display) is started, and when the condition for ending the first variable production is established (a command for stopping the first variable display is received and the variable production time has elapsed), the first variable production can be ended, When the signal for starting the second variable display (command at the start) is received, the second variable effect is started, and the condition for ending the second variable effect is satisfied (the command at the time of stopping the second variable display is received, the variable effect time Elapsed), the second variation effect can be terminated, and the start signal includes a first information signal (special figure designation command) and a second information signal (variation pattern designation command), and the effect control In the normal game state, the first information signal or the second information signal, which is the start signal of the second variable display, has an abnormality (the winning/losing does not match, the signal is damaged, the special symbol is If the type is different, etc.), the second variable effect is not executed, but an end condition different from the end condition of the second variable effect is established during the execution of the second variable effect (stop of the first variable display When the hour command is received, the second variable display start time command is received, the opening designation command is received, the customer waiting state designation command is received, the power-on designation command, the power restoration designation command, etc.) are received, the second fluctuation end the performance. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 16th configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effects that control effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising control means (performance control board 130), the main control means controls the first symbol (first special A first variable display executing means for executing a first variable display that variably displays a symbol), and a second symbol (second special symbol) based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port 47). ), and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) in which the second start condition is more likely to be established than in the normal game state and the normal game state. ), and the effect control means receives the signal for starting the first variable display (command at the start), the first variable effect (the effect symbol and / or the special symbol production with variable display) is started, and when the condition for ending the first variable production is established (a command for stopping the first variable display is received and the variable production time has elapsed), the first variable production can be ended, When the signal for starting the second variable display (command at the start) is received, the second variable effect is started, and the condition for ending the second variable effect is satisfied (the command at the time of stopping the second variable display is received, the variable effect time has elapsed), the second variation effect can be terminated, and in the normal game state, the signal for starting the second variation display cannot be normally received (within a predetermined time after receiving the special figure designation command If the variation pattern specification command is not received, the variation pattern specification command is received even though the special figure specification command is not received, etc.), the second variation production is not executed, but the second variation production is being executed , an end condition different from the end condition of the second variable effect is established (receiving the command at the time of stopping the first variable display, receiving the command at the time of starting the second variable display, receiving the opening designation command, receiving the customer waiting state designation command is received, a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, etc.), the second variation effect is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 17th configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effects that control effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising control means (performance control board 130), the main control means controls the first symbol (first special A first variable display executing means for executing a first variable display that variably displays a symbol), and a second symbol (second special symbol) based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port 47). ), and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) in which the second start condition is more likely to be established than in the normal game state and the normal game state. ), and the effect control means receives the signal for starting the first variable display (command at the start), the first variable effect (the effect symbol and / or the special symbol production with variable display) is started, and when the condition for ending the first variable production is established (a command for stopping the first variable display is received and the variable production time has elapsed), the first variable production can be ended, When the signal for starting the second variable display (command at the start) is received, the second variable effect is started, and the condition for ending the second variable effect is satisfied (the command at the time of stopping the second variable display is received, the variable effect time Elapsed), the second variation effect can be terminated, and the start signal includes a first information signal (special figure designation command) and a second information signal (variation pattern designation command), and the effect control Means, in the specific game state, there is an abnormality in the first information signal or the second information signal, which is the start signal of the first variable display (not matched, damaged, special symbols) If the type is different, etc.), the first variable effect is not executed, but an end condition different from the end condition of the first variable effect is established during the execution of the first variable effect (stop of the second variable display When the time command is received, the command at the start of the first variable display is received, the opening designation command is received, the customer waiting state designation command is received, the power-on designation command, the power restoration designation command, etc.) are received, the above-mentioned 1 End the variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As the 18th configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effects that control effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising control means (performance control board 130), the main control means controls the first symbol (first special A first variable display executing means for executing a first variable display that variably displays a symbol), and a second symbol (second special symbol) based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port 47). ), and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) in which the second start condition is more likely to be established than in the normal game state and the normal game state. ), and the effect control means receives the signal for starting the first variable display (command at the start), the first variable effect (the effect symbol and / or the special symbol production with variable display) is started, and when the condition for ending the first variable production is established (a command for stopping the first variable display is received and the variable production time has elapsed), the first variable production can be ended, When the signal for starting the second variable display (command at the start) is received, the second variable effect is started, and the condition for ending the second variable effect is satisfied (the command at the time of stopping the second variable display is received, the variable effect time has elapsed), the second variation production can be terminated, and in the specific game state, the start signal for the first variation display cannot be received normally (within a predetermined time after receiving the special figure designation command If the variation pattern specification command is not received, the variation pattern specification command is received even though the special figure specification command is not received, etc.), the first variation production is not executed, but the first variation production is being executed , an end condition different from the end condition of the first variable effect is established (receiving the command at the time of stopping the second variable display, receiving the command at the time of starting the first variable display, receiving the opening designation command, receiving the customer waiting state designation command is received, a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, etc.), the first variation effect is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 19th configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effects that control effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising control means (performance control board 130), the main control means controls the first symbol (first special A first variable display executing means for executing a first variable display that variably displays a symbol), and a second symbol (second special symbol) based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port 47). ), and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) in which the second start condition is more likely to be established than in the normal game state and the normal game state. ), and the effect control means receives the signal for starting the first variable display (command at the start), the first variable effect (the effect symbol and / or the special symbol production with variable display) is started, and when the condition for ending the first variable production is established (a command for stopping the first variable display is received and the variable production time has elapsed), the first variable production can be ended, When the signal for starting the second variable display (command at the start) is received, the second variable effect is started, and the condition for ending the second variable effect is satisfied (the command at the time of stopping the second variable display is received, the variable effect time Elapsed), the second variation effect can be terminated, and the start signal includes a first information signal (special figure designation command) and a second information signal (variation pattern designation command), and the effect control Means, in the specific game state, there is an abnormality in the first information signal or the second information signal, which is the start signal of the second variation display (not matched, damaged, special symbols) If the type is different, etc.), the second variable effect is not executed, but an end condition different from the end condition of the second variable effect is established during the execution of the second variable effect (stop of the first variable display When the hour command is received, the command at the start of the second variable display is received, the opening designation command is received, the customer waiting state designation command is received, the power-on designation command, the power restoration designation command, etc.) are received, the second fluctuation end the performance. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effects that control effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising control means (performance control board 130), the main control means controls the first symbol (first special A first variable display executing means for executing a first variable display that variably displays a symbol), and a second symbol (second special symbol) based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port 47). ), and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) in which the second start condition is more likely to be established than in the normal game state and the normal game state. ), and the effect control means receives the signal for starting the first variable display (command at the start), the first variable effect (the effect symbol and / or the special symbol production with variable display) is started, and when the condition for ending the first variable production is established (a command for stopping the first variable display is received and the variable production time has elapsed), the first variable production can be ended, When the signal for starting the second variable display (command at the start) is received, the second variable effect is started, and the condition for ending the second variable effect is satisfied (the command at the time of stopping the second variable display is received, the variable effect time has elapsed), the second variation effect can be terminated, and in the specific game state, the start signal for the second variation display cannot be received normally (within a predetermined time after receiving the special figure designation command If the variation pattern specification command is not received, the variation pattern specification command is received even though the special figure specification command is not received, etc.), the second variation production is not executed, but the second variation production is being executed , an end condition different from the end condition of the second variable effect is established (receiving the command at the time of stopping the first variable display, receiving the command at the time of starting the second variable display, receiving the opening designation command, receiving the customer waiting state designation command is received, a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, etc.), the second variation effect is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 21st configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effects that control effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising control means (performance control board 130), the main control means controls the first symbol (first special A first variable display executing means for executing a first variable display that variably displays a symbol), and a second symbol (second special symbol) based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port 47). ), and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) in which the second start condition is more likely to be established than in the normal game state and the normal game state. ), and when the effect control means receives a signal for starting the first variable display (starting command), the first variable display is being executed information (the icon, The lamp) is displayed, and when the conditions for erasing the information during execution of the first variable display are satisfied (receiving a stop command and the fluctuation performance time has elapsed), the information during execution can be erased, and the second variable display is executed. When the start signal (starting command) is received, the information during execution of the second variable display (the icon, the lamp) is displayed, and the condition for erasing the information during execution of the second variable display is satisfied (the stop command is received, and the fluctuation performance time has elapsed), the running information can be erased, and the start signal is a first information signal (special figure designation command) and a second information signal (variation pattern designation command). Including, the effect control means, in the specific game state, there is an abnormality in the first information signal or the second information signal, which is the start signal of the second variation display the type of the special symbol is different), the information during execution of the second variable display is not displayed, but the information during execution of the second variable display is displayed while the information during execution of the second variable display is being displayed. Clearing conditions different from the clearing conditions of (1st variable display stop command received, 2nd variable display start command received, opening designation command received, customer waiting state designation command received, power on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.), the information during execution of the second variable display is erased. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 22nd configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effects that control effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising control means (performance control board 130), the main control means controls the first symbol (first special A first variable display executing means for executing a first variable display that variably displays a symbol), and a second symbol (second special symbol) based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the second start port 47). ), and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) in which the second start condition is more likely to be established than in the normal game state and the normal game state. ), and when the effect control means receives a signal for starting the first variable display (starting command), the first variable display is being executed information (the icon, The lamp) is displayed, and when the conditions for erasing the information during execution of the first variable display are satisfied (receiving a stop command and the fluctuation performance time has elapsed), the information during execution can be erased, and the second variable display is executed. When the start signal (starting command) is received, the information during execution of the second variable display (the icon, the lamp) is displayed, and the condition for erasing the information during execution of the second variable display is satisfied (the stop command is received, and the fluctuation performance time has elapsed), the running information can be erased, and in the specific game state, the start signal for the second fluctuation display cannot be received normally (receiving the special figure designation command If the variation pattern specification command is not received within a predetermined time from, the variation pattern specification command is received even though the special figure specification command is not received, etc.), the information during execution of the second variation display is not displayed. , an erasing condition different from the erasing condition of the information during execution of the second variable display is established during the display of the information during execution of the second variable display (a command at the time of stopping the first variable display is received; When a start command is received, an opening designation command is received, a customer waiting state designation command is received, a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, etc.) are received, the execution information of the second variable display is erased. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can also be used for a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jankyu game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment shifts to a low-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game when the type of the jackpot special pattern is the normal pattern, and when the jackpot special pattern type is the specific pattern. 1 shifts to a high-probability game state continuing until the next big-win game after the end of the big-win game, but it may be a game machine that shifts to the high-probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the end of all the big-win games.

In addition, after all the jackpot games are completed, the high-probability game state is entered, and when the falling lottery executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols in the high-probability game state is won, the high-probability game state is ended and the normal It may be a game machine that returns to the game state.

In addition, when a game ball passes through a specific area in a specific round game of a jackpot game, it may be a gaming machine that shifts to a high-probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game ends.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. However, it is also possible to adopt a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel).

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 game machine 5 game board 44 normal figure gate 45 first starting port 47 second starting port 50 big prize winning port 70 first image display device 71 second image display device 110 main control board 110a main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Effect control board 130a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling the progress of a game and effect control means for controlling effects in response to signals from the main control means,
The main control means is
Acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the winning of the game ball into the starting port;
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information;
variable display execution means for executing variable display of symbols based on the determination result of the determination means;
a pending storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as pending storage;
The production control means is
Upon receiving a prize-winning signal transmitted at the time of increase in the pending memory associated with the prize-winning to the starting port, the pending display can be additionally displayed in a normal additional mode,
Upon receiving a start time signal transmitted when the pending memory decreases with the start of the variable display, it is possible to display the pending display in a reduced manner,
When the winning time signal or the start time signal is received while the number of the pending displays smaller than the number of the pending memories is displayed, the number of the pending displays corresponding to the number of the pending memories and It is possible to additionally display the pending display for the shortage so that
When additionally displaying the deficient reserved display, it is possible to additionally display the reserved display in a special addition mode different from the normal addition mode ,
In the special additional mode based on the reception of the winning signal, the deficient reserved display among the plurality of reserved displays to be additionally displayed is additionally displayed in a shorter time than the normal additional mode. A game machine characterized by

Images